<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 nzetc-p5.xsd" xml:id="HawAcco" xml:lang="en">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc xml:id="fileDesc-0001">
      <titleStmt>
        <title type="marc245">An Account of the Voyages undertaken by the order of His Present Majesty, for making Discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere, and successively performed by Commodore Byron, Captain Wallis, Captain Carteret, and Captain Cook, in the Dolphin, the Swallow, and the Endeavour: Drawn from the Journals which were kept by the several Commanders, and from the Papers of Joseph Banks, Esq. [Vol. II]</title>
        <title type="sort">Account of the Voyages undertaken by the order of His Present Majesty, for making Discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere, and successively performed by Commodore Byron, Captain Wallis, Captain Carteret, and Captain Cook, in the Dolphin, the Swallow, and the Endeavour: Drawn from the Journals which were kept by the several Commanders, and from the Papers of Joseph Banks, Esq. [Vol. II]</title>
        <title type="gmd">[electronic resource]</title>
        <author><name key="name-150158" type="person">John Hawkesworth</name>, L.L.D.</author>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0001">
          <resp>Creation of machine-readable version</resp>
          <name key="name-121582" type="organisation">Aptara</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0002">
          <resp>Creation of digital images</resp>
          <name key="name-103025" type="organisation">Google</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0003">
          <resp>Conversion to TEI.2-conformant markup</resp>
          <name key="name-121582" type="organisation">Aptara</name>
        </respStmt>
      </titleStmt>
      <extent>ca. 1,398 kilobytes</extent>
      <publicationStmt>
        <publisher>
          <name key="name-121602" type="organisation">New Zealand Electronic Text Centre</name>
        </publisher>
        <pubPlace>Wellington, New Zealand</pubPlace>
        <idno type="etc">Modern English, HawAcco</idno>
        <availability status="unknown">
          <p>Publicly accessible</p>
          <p n="public">URL: http://www.nzetc.org/collections.html</p>
          <p>copyright 2007, by Victoria University of Wellington</p>
        </availability>
        <date when="2007">2007</date>
      <idno type="vuw-bbid">1177096</idno></publicationStmt>
      <notesStmt xml:id="notesStmt-0001">
        <note xml:id="note-0001">
          <p>This electronic text has been adapted from the version available through Google Books (digitised <date when="2006-03-27">Mar 27, 2006</date>):</p>
          <p>
            <ref target="http://books.google.com/books?id=tbRbF0Zk-NMC">Account of the Voyages undertaken by the order of His Present Majesty, for making Discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere, and successively performed by Commodore Byron, Captain Wallis, Captain Carteret, and Captain Cook, in the Dolphin, the Swallow, and the Endeavour: Drawn from the Journals which were kept by the several Commanders, and from the Papers of Joseph Banks, Esq. [Vol. II]</ref>
          </p>
          <p>Extra mark-up has been undertaken to allow a fuller experience of the text.</p>
        </note>
        <note xml:id="note-0002">Line breaks have only been retained for non-prose elements.</note>
      </notesStmt>
      <sourceDesc xml:id="sourceDesc-0001">
        <biblFull>
          <titleStmt xml:id="titleStmt-0001">
            <title>
              <name key="name-400640" type="work">An Account of the Voyages undertaken by the order of His Present Majesty, for making Discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere, and successively performed by Commodore Byron, Captain Wallis, Captain Carteret, and Captain Cook, in the Dolphin, the Swallow, and the Endeavour: Drawn from the Journals which were kept by the several Commanders, and from the Papers of Joseph Banks, Esq. [Vol. II]</name>
            </title>
            <author><name key="name-150158" type="person">John Hawkesworth</name>, L.L.D</author>
          </titleStmt>
          <editionStmt>
            <p/>
          </editionStmt>
          <publicationStmt>
            <pubPlace>Dublin:</pubPlace>
            <publisher>
              <name key="name-400641" type="organisation">James Williams</name>
            </publisher>
            <!-- <idno type="callNo">Source copy consulted: </idno> -->
            <date when="1775">1775</date>
          </publicationStmt>
        </biblFull>
        <bibl xml:id="text-1-bibl">
          <title>
            <name key="name-400645" type="work">A Voyage towards the North Pole: undertaken by His Majesty's Command, 1773.</name>
          </title>
          <author>
            <name key="name-170619" type="person">Constantine John Phipps</name>
          </author>
        </bibl>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
    <encodingDesc>
      <editorialDecl>
        <p>Missing pages from the GoogleBook version (namely pages 277 and 316 from "An Account of the Voyages undertaken by the order of His Present Majesty, for making Discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere..." and pages 45 and 46 from "A Voyage towards the North Pole..." were sourced from:</p>
        <p>Hawkesworth, John. An account of the voyages undertaken by the order of His present Majesty, for making discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere, ... by John Hawkesworth, L.L.D. To which is added a voyage to the North Pole, by Commodore Phipps. In two volumes. ... Vol. 2. Dublin, 1775. 2 vols. Eighteenth-Century Collections Online. Gale Group.</p>
        <p>All unambiguous end-of-line hyphens have been removed and
        the trailing part of a word has been joined to the preceding
        line, except in the case of those words that break over a
        page. Every effort has been made to preserve the Māori
        macron using unicode.</p>
        <p xml:id="ETC">Some keywords in the header are a local Electronic
          Text Centre scheme to aid in establishing analytical
          groupings.</p>
      </editorialDecl>
      <classDecl>
        <taxonomy xml:id="nzetc-subjects">
          <bibl>
            <title>NZETC Subject Headings</title>
          </bibl>
        </taxonomy>
      </classDecl>
    </encodingDesc>
    <profileDesc xml:id="profileDesc-0001">
      <creation>
        <date when="1775">1775</date>
      </creation>
      <langUsage>
        <language ident="en">English</language>
      </langUsage>
      <textClass>
        <keywords scheme="http://www.nzetc.org/nzetc-subjects">
          <list>
            <item>
              <rs key="subject-000010" type="subject">Historical Māori and Pacific Islands</rs>
            </item>
          </list>
        </keywords>
      </textClass>
    </profileDesc>
    <revisionDesc>
      <change n="quickProof"><date when="2007-10-08T16:06:04">16:06:04, Monday 8 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Text-proofing of a sample of the text</change>
      <change n="teiMarkup"><date when="2007-10-08T16:57:40">16:57:40, Monday 8 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Conversion to TEI.2-conformat markup</change>
      <change n="scriptedMarkup"><date when="2007-10-09T08:57:47">08:57:47, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Adding name markup</change>
      <change n="encodingDesc"><date when="2007-10-09T08:57:48">08:57:48, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Addition of encodingDesc</change>
      <change n="addBibls"><date when="2007-10-09T09:47:32">09:47:32, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Addition of bibls</change>
      <change n="teiValidation"><date when="2007-10-09T09:51:00">09:51:00, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Validation of TEI</change>
      <change n="nameValidation"><date when="2007-10-09T09:51:53">09:51:53, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Validation of names</change>
      <change n="utf8Conversion"><date when="2007-10-09T09:52:19">09:52:19, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Conversion to Unicode (utf-8)</change>
      <change n="makeProduction"><date when="2007-10-09T09:56:48">09:56:48, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Promotion to production</change>
      <change n="drmAddition"><date when="2007-10-09T10:58:49">10:58:49, Tuesday 9 October 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Sam Callaghan</name>Addition of text to access control</change>
      <change n="corpusAddition"><date when="2008-10-31T13:59:02">13:59:02, Friday 31 October 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Samantha Callaghan</name>Addition of text to corpus</change>
      <change n="live"><date when="2009-02-24T12:51:53">12:51:53, Tuesday 24 February 2009</date><label>editorial</label><name type="person" key="name-141366">Samantha Callaghan</name>Make text available on NZETC website</change>
    <change n="catalogueAddition"><date when="2009-02-27T11:39:35">11:39:35, Friday 27 February 2009</date><name type="person" key="name-121584">Jason Darwin</name>Addition of text to Library Catalogue<!-- BBID=1177096 --></change><change n="epubPreparation"><date when="2009-08-04T14:08:42">14:08:42, Tuesday 4 August 2009</date><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Preparation of EPUB (and other formats such as DaisyBook)</change></revisionDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text xml:id="t1">
    <group xml:id="t1-g1">
      <text xml:id="t1-g1-t1">
        <front xml:id="t1-g1-t1-front">
          <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-front-d1" type="covers">
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="HawAccoTit">
                <graphic url="HawAccoTit.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="HawAccoTit-g"/>
                <figDesc>Title Page</figDesc>
              </figure>
            </p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n1"/>
          <pb xml:id="n2"/>
          <pb xml:id="n3"/>
          <pb xml:id="n4"/>
          <pb xml:id="n5"/>
          <titlePage xml:id="t1-g1-t1-front-d3-d1">
            <docTitle>
              <titlePart type="main"><hi rend="lsc">An</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="c">Account</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="lsc">of the</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="c">Voyages</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="lsc">Undertaken by The Order of</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="c">His Present Majesty,</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="lsc">For Making</hi><lb/>
              Discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere,<lb/>
              <hi rend="lsc">And Successively Performed by</hi><lb/>
              <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-150151" type="person">Commodore Byron</name></hi>,<lb/>
              <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-150152" type="person">Captain Wallis</name></hi>,<lb/>
              <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-150153" type="person">Captain Carteret</name></hi>, And <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-207700" type="person">Captain Cook</name></hi>,<lb/>
              In the <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name></hi>, the <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-400643" type="ship">Swallow</name></hi>, and the <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-400074" type="ship">Endeavour</name></hi>:<lb/>
              Drawn up from the <hi rend="sc">Journals</hi> which were kept by the several<lb/>
              Commanders, and from the Papers of <hi rend="sc"><name key="name-123818" type="person">Joseph Banks</name></hi>, Esq.<lb/></titlePart>
            </docTitle>
            <docAuthor><hi rend="sc">By</hi><hi rend="c"><name key="name-150158" type="person">John Hawkesworth</name></hi>, L.L.D.</docAuthor>
            <lb/>
            <docImprint>
To which is added,<lb/>
<name key="name-400645" type="work">A <hi rend="sc">Voyage</hi> to the <hi rend="sc">North Pole</hi>.</name><lb/>
By <name key="name-170619" type="person"><hi rend="sc">Commodore</hi><hi rend="c">Phipps</hi></name>.<lb/>
<hi rend="c">In Two Volumes</hi>.<lb/>
Illustrated with <hi rend="sc">Charts</hi> and elegant <hi rend="sc">Copper-plates</hi>.<lb/>
<hi rend="c">Vol. II</hi>.<lb/>
<pubPlace><hi rend="c">Dublin</hi>:</pubPlace><lb/>
Printed for <hi rend="c"><name key="name-400641" type="organisation">James Williams</name></hi>, N° 21. Skinner Row.<lb/>
<hi rend="sc">Mdcc lxxv</hi>.
</docImprint>
          </titlePage>
          <pb xml:id="n6"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-front-d2" type="contents">
            <head><hi rend="c">Contents</hi>.</head>
            <p>
              <table rows="58" cols="2">
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. IV</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="i">A particular Description of the Island; its Produce and Inhabitants; their Dress, Habitations, Food, domestic Life and Amusements</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d4">35</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. V</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Of the Manufactures, Boats, and Navigation of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d5">57</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VI</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Of the Division of Time in <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; Numeration, Computation of Distance, Language, Diseases, Disposal of the Dead, Religion, War, Weapons, and Government; with some general Observations for the Use of future Navigators.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d6">71</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">A Description of several other Islands in the Neighbourhood of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, with various Incidents; a dramatic Entertainment and many Particulars relative to the Customs and Manners of the Inhabitants.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d7">88</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">BOOK II</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. I</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Passage from Oteroah to New Zealand; Incidents which happened on going a-shore there, and while the Ship lay in Poverty-Bay.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d1">114</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <pb xml:id="n7"/>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. II</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">A Description of Poverty-Bay, and the Face of the adjacent Country. The Range from thence to Cape Turn-again, and back to Tolaga; with some Account of the People and the Country, and several Incidents that happened on that Part of the Coast.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d2">127</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. III</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Range from Tolaga to Mercury-Bay, with an Account of many Incidents that happened both on board and a-shore. A Description of several Views exhibited by the Country, and of the Heppahs, or farfeited Villages of the Inhabitants.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d3">149</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. IV</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Range from Mercury Bay to the Bay of Islands. An Expedition up the River Thames: Some Account of the Indians who inhabit its Banks, and the fine Timber that grows there. Several interviews with the Natives on different Parts of the Coast, and a Skirmish with them upon an Island.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d4">170</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. V</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Range from the Bay of Islands, round North-Cape to Queen Charlotte's Sound; and a Description of that Part of the Coast.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d5">188</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VI</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Transactions in Queen Charlotte's Sound. Passage through the Streight which divides the two Islands, and back to Cape Turnagain. Horrid Custom of the Inhabitants. Remarkable Melody of Birds. A Visit to a Hippah, and many other Particulars.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d6">200</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <pb xml:id="n8"/>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Range from Cape Turnagain southward along the eastern Coast of Poenammoo, round Cape South, and back to the western Entrance of Cooke's Streight, which compleated the Circumnavigation of this Country: with a Description of the Coast, and of Admiralty Bay: The Departure from New Zealand, and various Particulars.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d3-d1">222</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VIII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">A general Account of New Zealand: its first Discovery, Situation, Extent, Climate, and Productions.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d3-d2">241</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. IX</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">A Description of the Inhabitants, their Habitations, Apparel, Ornaments, Food, Cookery, and Manner of Life.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d3-d3">250</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. X</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Of the Canoes and Navigation of the Inhabitants of New Zealand; their Tillage, Weapons, and Music; Government, Religion, and Language: With some Reasons against the Existence of a Southern Continent.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d3-d4">263</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">BOOK III</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. I</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Run from New Zealand to Botany Bay, on the East Coast of <name key="name-008963" type="place">New Holland</name>, now called <name key="name-110004" type="place">New South Wales</name>. Various Incidents that happened there. With some Account of the Country and its Inhabitants.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d1">279</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <pb xml:id="n9"/>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. IV</hi>.</cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>The Range from Botany Bay to Trinity Bay; with a farther Account of the Country, its Inhabitants and Productions.</cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d2">300</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. V</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Dangerous Situation of the Ship in her Course from Trinity Bay to Endeavour River.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d3">331</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VI</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Transactions while the Ship was resitting in Endeavour River: a Description of the adjacent Country, its Inhabitants, and Productions.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d4">342</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Departure from Endeavour River; a particular Description of the Harbour there, in which the Ship was refitted, the adjacent Country, and several Islands near the Coast: the Range from Endeavour River to the Northern Extremity of the Country, and the Dangers of that Navigation.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d5">368</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. VIII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Departure from <name key="name-110004" type="place">New South Wales</name>. A particular Description of the Country, its Products, and People. A Specimen of the Language; and some Observations upon the Currents and Tides.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d6">396</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. IX</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Passage from <name key="name-110004" type="place">New South Wales</name> to <name key="name-019923" type="place">New Guinea</name>; with an Account of what happened upon landing there.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d7">418</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <pb xml:id="n10"/>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. X</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Passage from <name key="name-019923" type="place">New Guinea</name> to the Island of <name key="name-400649" type="place">Savu</name>, the Transactions there.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d8">429</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. XI</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">A particular Description of the Island of <name key="name-400649" type="place">Savu</name>; its Produce and Inhabitants; with a Specimen of their Language.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d9">445</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. XII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Run from the Island of <name key="name-400649" type="place">Savu</name> to <name key="name-035786" type="place">Batavia</name>, and an Account of the Transactions there while the Ship was refitting.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d10">463</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. XIII</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Some Account of <name key="name-035786" type="place">Batavia</name> and the adjacent Country, with their Fruits, Flowers, and other Productions.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d11">479</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. XIV</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Some Account of the Inhabitants of <name key="name-035786" type="place">Batavia</name>, and the adjacent Country, their Manners, Customs, and Manner of Life.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d12">499</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. XV</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">The Passage from <name key="name-035786" type="place">Batavia</name> to the <name key="name-170606" type="place">Cape of Good Hope</name>. Some Account of Prince's Island, and its Inhabitants, and a comparative View of their Language with the Malay and Javanese.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d13">514</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
                <pb xml:id="n11"/>
                <row>
                  <cell><hi rend="c">Chap. XVI</hi>.</cell>
                  <cell/>
                </row>
                <row>
                  <cell>
                    <hi rend="i">Our Arrival at the <name key="name-170606" type="place">Cape of Good Hope</name>; some Remarks on the Run from Java Head to that Place; a Description of the Cape, and of <name key="name-400650" type="place">Saint Helena</name>; with some Account of the Hottentots, and the Return of the Ship to England.</hi>
                  </cell>
                  <cell>
                    <ref target="#t1-g1-t1-body-d4-d14">525</ref>
                  </cell>
                </row>
              </table>
            </p>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n12"/>
        </front>
        <pb xml:id="n13"/>
        <body xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body">
          <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">An</hi> <hi rend="c">Account</hi> <hi rend="sc">of a</hi> <hi rend="c">Voyage</hi> round the <hi rend="c">World</hi>.</head>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d1" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap</hi>. I.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">The Ceremonies of an Indian Funeral particularly described: General Observations on the Subject: A Character found among the Indians, to which the Ancients paid great Veneration: A Robbery at the Fort, and its Consequences; with a Specimen of Indian Cookery, and various Incidents</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">On</hi> the 5th we kept his Majesty's birth-day; for though it is the 4th, we were unwilling to celebrate it during the absence of the two parties who had been sent out to observe the Transit. We had several of the Indian Chiefs at our entertainment, who drank his Majesty's health by the name of Kihiargo, which was the nearest imitation they could produce of <name type="person" key="name-102865">King George</name>.</p>
              <p>About this time died an old woman of some rank, who was related to Tomio, which gave us an opportunity to see how they disposed of the body, and confirmed us in our opinion that these people, contrary to the present custom of all other nations now known, never bury their dead. In the middle of a small square, neatly railed in with bamboo, the awning of a canoe was raised upon two posts, and under this the
<pb xml:id="n14" n="2"/>
body was deposited upon such a frame as has before been described: it was covered with fine cloth, and near it was placed bread-fruit, fish, and other provisions: we supposed that the food was placed there for the spirit of the deceased, and consequently, that these Indians had some confused notion of a separate state; but upon our applying for further information to Tu-bourai Tamaide, he told us, that the food was placed there as an offering to their gods. They do not, however, suppose, that the gods eat, any more than the Jews supposed that Jehovah could dwell in a house: the offering is made here upon the same principle as the Temple was built at Jerusalem, as an expression of reverence and gratitude, and a solicitation of the more immediate presence of the Deity. In the front of the area was a kind of stile, where the relations of the deceased stood to pay the tribute of their sorrow; and under the awning were innumerable small pieces of cloth, on which the tears and blood of the mourners had been shed; for in their paroxysms of grief it is a universal custom to wound themselves with the shark's tooth. Within a few yards two occasional houses were set up, in one of which some relations of the deceased constantly resided, and in the other the chief mourner, who is always a man, and who keeps there a very singular dress, in which a ceremony is performed that will be described in its turn. Near the place where the dead are thus set up to rot, the bones are afterwards buried.</p>
              <p>What can have introduced among these people the custom of exposing their dead above ground, till the flesh is consumed by putrefaction, and then burying the bones, it is perhaps impossible to guess; but it is remarkable, that ælian and Apollonius Rhodius impute a similar practice to the ancient inhabitants of Colchis, a country near Pontus in Asia, now called Mingrelia; except that among them this manner of disposing of the dead did not extend to both sexes; the women they buried; but the men they wrapped in a hide, and hung up in the air by a chain. This practice among the Colchians is referred to a religious cause. The principal objects of their worship were the Earth and the Air; and it is supposed that, in <choice><orig>conse-
<pb xml:id="n15" n="3"/>
quence</orig><reg>consequence</reg></choice> of some superstitious notion, they devoted their dead to both. Whether the natives of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> had any notion of the same kind, we were never able certainly to determine; but we soon discovered, that the repositories of their dead were also places of worship. Upon this occasion it may be observed, that nothing can be more absurd than the notion that the happiness or misery of a future life depends, in any degree, upon the disposition of the body when the state of probation is past; yet that nothing is more general than a solicitude about it. However cheap we may hold any funeral rites which custom has not familiarized, or superdition rendered sacred, most men gravely deliberate how to prevent their body from being broken by the mattock and devoured by the worm, when it is no longer capable of sensation; and purchase a place for it in holy ground, when they believe the lot of its future existence to be irrevocably determined. So strong is the association of pleasing or painful ideas with certain opinions and actions which affect us while we live, that we involuntarily act as if it was equally certain that they would affect us in the same manner when we are dead, though this is an opinion that nobody will maintain. Thus it happens, that the desire of preserving from reproach even the name that we leave behind us, or of procuring it honour, is one of the most powerful principles of action, among the inhabitants of the most speculative and enlightened nations. Posthumous reputation, upon every principle, must be acknowledged to have no influence upon the dead; yet the desire of obtaining and securing it, no force of reason, no habits of thinking, can subdue, except in those whom habitual baseness and guilt have rendered indifferent to honour and shame while they lived. This indeed seems to be among the happy imperfections of our nature, upon which the general good of society in a certain measure depends; for as some crimes are supposed to be prevented by hanging the body of the criminal in chains after he is dead, so in consequence of the same association of ideas, much good is procured to society, and much evil prevented, by a desire of preventing disgrace or procuring honour to a name, when nothing but a name remains.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n16" n="4"/>
              <p>Perhaps no better use can be made of reading an account of manners altogether new, by which the follies and absurdities of mankind are taken out of that particular connection in which habit has reconciled them to us, than to consider in how many instances they are essentially the same. When an honest devotee of the Church of Rome reads, that there are Indians on the banks of the Ganges, who believe that they shall secure the happiness of a future state by dying with a cow's tail in their hands, he laughs at their folly and superstition; and if these Indians were to be told, that there are people upon the continent of Europe, who imagine that they shall derive the same advantage from dying with the slipper of St. Francis upon their foot, they would laugh in their turn. But if, when the Indian heard the account of the Catholic, and the Catholic that of the Indian, each was to reflect, that there was no difference between the absurdity of the slipper and of the tail; but that the veil of prejudice and custom, which covered it in their own case, was withdrawn in the other, they would turn their knowledge to a profitable purpose.</p>
              <p>Having observed that bread-fruit had for some days been brought in less quantities than usual, we enquired the reason; and were told, that there being a great shew of fruit upon the trees, they had been thinned all at once, in order to make a kind of our paste, which the natives call Mahie, and which, in consequence of having undergone a fermentation, will keep a considerable time, and supply them with food when no ripe fruit is to be had.</p>
              <p>On the 10th, the ceremony was to be performed, in honour of the old woman whose sepulchral tabernacle has just been described, by the chief mourner; and Mr. Banks had so great a curiosity to see all the mysteries of the solemnity, that he determined to take a part in it, being told, that he could be present upon no other condition. In the evening, therefore, he repaired to the place where the body lay, and was received by the daughter of the deceased, and several other persons, among whom was a boy about fourteen years old, who were to assist in the ceremony. Tubourai Tamaide was to be the principal mourner;
<pb xml:id="n17" n="5"/>
and his dress was extremely fantastical, though not unbecoming. Mr. Banks was stripped of his European clothes, and a small piece of cloth being tied round his middle, his body was smeared with charcoal and water, as low as the shoulders, till it was as black as that of a negroe; the same operation was performed upon several others, among whom were some women, who were reduced to a state as near to nakedness as himself; the boy was blacked all over, and then the procession set forward. Tubourai Tamaide uttered something, which was supposed to be a prayer, near the body, and did the same when he came up to his own house: When this was done, the procession was continued towards the fort, permission having been obtained to approach it upon this occasion. It is the custom of the Indians to fly from these processions with the utmost precipitation, so that as soon as those who were about the fort saw it at a distance, they hid themselves in the woods. It proceeded from the fort along the shore, and put to flight another body of Indians, consisting of more than an hundred, every one hiding himself under the first shelter that he could find; it then crossed the river, and entered the woods, passing several houses, all which were deserted, and not a single Indian could be seen during the rest of the procession, which continued more than half an hour. The office that Mr. Banks performed was called that of the Nineveh, of which there were two besides himself; and the natives having all disappeared, they came to the chief mourner, and said imatata, there are no people; after which the company was dismissed to wash themselves in the river, and put on their customary apparel.</p>
              <p>On the 12th, complaint being made to me, by some of the natives, that two of the seamen had taken from them several bows and arrows, and some strings of plaited hair; I examined the matter, and finding the charge well supported, I punished each of the criminals with two dozen lashes.</p>
              <p>Their bows and arrows have not been mentioned before, nor were they often brought down to the fort. This day, however, Tubourai Tamaide brought down his, in consequence of a challenge which he had received from Mr. Gore. The Chief supposed it was
<pb xml:id="n18" n="6"/>
to try who could send the arrow farthest; Mr. Gore, who best could hit a mark: and as Mr. Gore did not value himself upon shooting to a great distance, nor the Chief upon hitting a mark, there was no trial of skill between them. Tubourai Tamaide, however, to shew us what he could do, drew his bow, and sent an arrow, none of which are feathered, two hundred and seventy-four yards, which is something more than a seventh, and something less than a sixth part of a mile. Their manner of shooting is somewhat singular; they kneel down, and the moment the arrow is discharged drop the bow.</p>
              <p>Mr. Banks, in his morning walk this day, met a number of the natives, whom, upon inquiry, he found to be travelling musicians; and having learned where they were to be at night, we all repaired to the place. The band consisted of two flutes and three drums, and we found a great number of people assembled upon the occasion. The drummers accompanied the musick with their voices, and, to our great surprize, we discovered that we were generally the subject of the song. We did not expect to have found among the uncivilized inhabitants of this sequestered spot, a character which has been the subject of such praise and veneration, where genius and knowledge have been most conspicuous; yet these were the bards or minstrels of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>. Their song was unpremeditated, and accompanied with musick; they were continually going about from place to place, and they were rewarded by the master of the house, and the audience, with such things as one wanted, and the other could spare.</p>
              <p>On the 14th, we were brought into new difficulties and inconvenience, by another robbery at the fort. In the middle of the night one of the natives contrived to steal an iron coal-rake, that was made use of for the oven. It happened to be set up against the inside of the wall, so that the top of the handle was visible from without; and we were informed that the thief, who had been seen lurking. there it the evening, came secretly about three o'clock in the morning, and, watching his opportunity when the centinel's back
<pb xml:id="n19" n="7"/>
was turned, very dexterously laid hold of it with long crooked stick, and drew it over the wall. thought it of some consequence, if possible, to put an end to these practices at once, by doing something that should make it the common interest of the natives themselves to prevent them. I had given strict orders that they should not be fired upon, even when detected in these attempts, for which I had many reasons: the common centinels were by no means sit to be enrusted with a power of life and death, to be exerted whenever they should think sit; and I had already experienced, that they were ready to take away the lives that were in their power, upon the slightest occasion; neither indeed did I think that the thefts which these people committed against us were, in them, crimes worthy of death: that thieves are hanged in England, I thought no reason why they should be shot in <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; because, with respect to the natives, it would have been an execution by a law ‘ex post facto:’ they had no such law among themselves, and it did not appear to me that we had any right to make such a law for them. That they should abstain from thest, or be punished with death, was not one of the conditions under which they claimed the advantages of civil society, as it is among us; and as I was not willing to expose them to fire arms, loaded with shot, neither could I perfectly approve of firing only with powder: at first, indeed, the noise and the smoke would alarm them, but when they found that no mischief followed, they would be led to despise the weapons themselves, and proceed to insults, which would make it necessary to put them to the test, and from which they would be deterred by the very sight of a gun, if it was never used but with effect. At this time, an accident furnished me with what I thought a happy expedient. It happened that above twenty of their sailing canoes were just come in with a supply of fish; upon these I immediately seized, and bringing them into the river behing the fort, gave publick notice, that except the rake, and all the rest of the things which from time to time had been stolen, were returned, the canoes should be burned. This menace I ventured to publish, though I had no design to put it into execution, making no
<pb xml:id="n20" n="8"/>
doubt but that it was well known in whose possession the stolen goods were, and that as restitution was thus made a common cause, they would all of them in a short time be brought back. A list of the things was made out, consisting principally of the rake, the musket which had been taken from the marine when the Indian was shot, the pistols which Mr. Banks lost with his clothes at Atahourou, a sword belonging to one of the petty officers, and the water cask. About noon the rake was restored, and great solicitation was made for the release of the canoes; but I still insisted upon my original condition. The next day came, and nothing farther was restored, at which I was much surprised, for the people were in the utmost distress for the fish, which in a short time would be spoiled; I was therefore reduced to a disagreeable situation, either of releasing the canoes, contrary to what I had solemnly and publicly declared, or to detain them, to the great injury of those who were innocent, without answering any good purpose to ourielves: as a temporary expedient, I permitted them to take the fish, but still detained the canoes. This very licence, however, was productive of new confusion and injury; for, it not being easy at once to distinguish to what particular persons the several lots of fish belonged, the canoes were plundered, under favour of this circumstance, by those who had no right to any part of their cargo. Most pressing instances were still made that the canoes might be restored; and I having now the greatest reason to believe, either that the things for which I detained them were not in the island', or that those who suffered by their detention had not sufficient influence over the thieves to prevail upon them to relinquish their booty, determined at length to give them up, not a little mortified at the bad success of my project.</p>
              <p>Another accident also about this time was, notwith-standing all our caution, very near embroiling us with the Indians. I sent the boat on shore with an officer to get ballast for the ship, and not immediately finding stones convenient for the purpose, he began to pull down some part of an inclosure where they deposited the bones of their dead: this the Indians violently opposed, and a messenger came down to the tents to <choice><orig>ac-
<pb xml:id="n21" n="9"/>
quaint</orig><reg>acquaint</reg></choice> the officers that they would not suffer it. Mr. Banks immediately repaired to the place, and an amicable end was soon put to the dispute, by sending the boat's crew to the river, where stones enough were to be gathered without a possibility of giving offence. It is very remarkable, that these Indians appeared to be much more jealous of what was done to the dead than the living. This was the only measure in which they ventured to oppose us, and the only insult that was offered to any individual among us was upon a similar occasion. Mr. Monkhouse happening one day to pull a flower from a tree which grew in one of their sepulchral inclosures, an Indian, whose jealousy had probably been upon the watch, came suddenly behind him and struck him: Mr. Monkhouse laid hold of him, but he was instantly rescued by two more, who took hold of Mr. Monkhouse's hair, and forced him to quit his hold of their companion, and then ran away, without offering him any farther violence.</p>
              <p>In the evening of the 19th, while the canoes were still detained, we received a visit from Oberea, which surprized us not a little, as she brought with her none of the things that had been stolen, and knew that she was suspected of having some of them in her custody. She said, indeed, that her favourite, Obadee, whom she had beaten and dismissed, had taken them away; but she seemed conscious that she had no right to be believed: she discovered the strongest signs of fear, yet she surmounted it with astonishing resolution, and was very pressing to deep with her attendants in Mr. Banks's tent. In this, however, she was not gratified; the affair of the jackets was too recent, and the tent was besides filled with other people. Nobody else seemed willing to entertain her, and she therefore, with great appearance of mortification and disappointment, spent the night in her canoe.</p>
              <p>The next morning early she returned to the sort, with her canoe and every thing that it contained, putting herself wholly into our power, with something like greatness of mind, which excited our wonder and admiration. As the most effectual means to bring about a reconciliation, she presented us with a hog, and several other things, among which was a dog.
<pb xml:id="n22" n="10"/>
We had lately learned, that these animals were esteemed by the Indians as more delicate food than their pork; and upon this occasion we determined to try the experiment: the dog, which was very fat, we consigned over to Tupia, who undertook to perform the double office of butcher and cook. He killed him, by holding his hands close over his mouth and nose, an operation which continued above a quarter of an hour. While this was doing, a hole was made in the ground about a foot deep, in which a fire was kindled, and some small stones placed in layers alternately with the wood to heat; the dog was then singed, by holding him over the fire, and, by scraping him with a shell, the hair was taken off as clean as if he had been scalded in hot water: he was then cut up with the same instrument, and his entrails being taken out, were sent to the sea, where being carefully washed, they were put into cocoa-nut-shells, with what blood had come from the body: when the hole was sufficiently heated, the fire was taken out, and some of the stones which were not so hot as to discolour any thing that they touched, being placed at the bottom, were covered with green leaves: the dog, with the entrails, was then placed upon the leaves, and other leaves being laid upon them, the whole was covered with the rest of the hot stones, and the mouth of the hole close stopped with mould: in somewhat less than four hours it was again opened, and the dog taken out excellently baked, and we all agreed that he made a very good dish. The dogs which are here bread to be eaten, taste no animal food, but are kept wholly upon bread-fruit, cocoanuts, yams, and other vegetables of the like kind: all the flesh and fish eaten by the inhabitants is dressed in the same way.</p>
              <p>On the 21st, we were visited at the fort by a Chief, called <hi rend="sc">Oamo</hi>, whom we had never seen before, and who was treated by the natives with uncommon respect; he brought with him a boy about seven years old, and a young woman about sixteen: the boy was carried upon a man's back, which we considered as a piece of state, for he was as well able to walk as any present. As soon as they were in sight, Oberea, and several other natives who were in
<pb xml:id="n23" n="11"/>
the fort, went out to meet them, having first uncovered their heads and bodies as low as the waist: as they came on, the same ceremony was performed by all the natives who were without the fort. Uncovering the body, therefore, is in this country probably a mark of respect; and as all parts are here exposed with equal indifference, the ceremony of uncovering it from the waist downwards, which was performed by Oorattooa, might be nothing more than a different mode of compliment, adapted to persons of a different rank. The chief came into the tent, but no entreaty could prevail upon the young woman to follow him, though she seemed to refuse contrary to her inclination; the natives without were indeed all very solicitous to prevent her; sometimes when her resolution seemed to sail, almost using force: the boy also they restrained in the same manner; but Dr. Solander happening to meet him at the gate, took him by the hand, and led him in be fore the people were aware of it: as soon, however, as those that were within saw him, they took care to have him sent out.</p>
              <p>These circumstances having strongly excited our curiosity, we enquired who they were, and were informed, that Oamo was the husband of Oberea, tho' they had been a long time separated by mutual consent; and that the young woman and the boy were their children. We learnt also, that the boy, whose name was <hi rend="sc">Terridiri</hi>, was heir apparent to the sovereignty of the island, and that his sister was intended for his wife, the marriage being deferred only till he should arrive at a proper age. The sovereign at this time was a son of <hi rend="sc">Whappai</hi>, whose name was <hi rend="sc">Outou</hi>, and who, as before has been observed, was a minor. Whappai, Oamao, and Tootahah, were brothers: Whappai was the eldest, and Oamo the second; so that, Whappai having no child but Outou, Terridiri, the son of his next brother Oamo, was heir to the sovereignty. It will, perhaps, seem strange that a boy should be sovereign during the life of his father: but, according to the eustom of the country, a child succeeds to a father's title and authority as soon as it is born: a regent is then elected, and the father of the new sovereign is generally continued in his authority,
<pb xml:id="n24" n="12"/>
under that title, till his child is of age; but, at this time, the choice had fallen upon Tootahah, the uncle, in consequence of his having distinguished himself in a War. Oamo asked many questions concerning England and its inhabitants, by which he appeared to have great shrewdness and understanding.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d2" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. II</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">An Account of the Circumnavigation of the Island, and various Incidents that happened during the Expedition; with a Description of a Burying-place and place of Worship, called Morai</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">On</hi> Monday the 26th, about three o'clock in the morning, I set out in the pinnace, accompanied by Mr. Banks, to make the circuit of the island, with a view to sketch out the coast and harbours. We took our rout to the eastward, and about eight in the forenoon we went on shore, in a district called <hi rend="sc">Oahounuf</hi>, which is governed by <hi rend="sc">Ahio</hi>, a young Chief, whom we had often seen at the tents, ana who favoured us with his company to breakfast. Here also we found two other natives of our old acquaintance, <hi rend="sc">Tituboalo</hi> and <hi rend="sc">Hoona</hi>, who carried us to their houses, near which we saw the body of the old woman, at whose funeral rites Mr. Banks had assisted, and which had been removed hither from the spot where it was first deposited, this place having descended from her by inheritance to Hoona, and it being necessary on that account that it should lie here. We then proceeded on foot, the boat attending within call, to the harbour in which Mr. Bougainville lay, called <hi rend="sc">Ohidea</hi>, where the natives shewed us the ground upon which his people pitched their tent, and the brook at which they water, though no trace of them remained, except the holes where the poles of the tent had been fixed, and a small piece of potsheard, which Mr. Banks found in looking narrowly about the spot. We met, however, with <hi rend="sc">Orette</hi>, a Chief who was their principal friend, and whose brother <hi rend="sc">Outorrou</hi> went away with them.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n25" n="13"/>
              <p>This harbour lies on the west side of a great bay, under shelter of a small island called <hi rend="sc">Boourou</hi>, near which is another called <hi rend="sc">Taawirrh</hi>; the breach in the reefs is here very large, but the shelter for ships is not the best.</p>
              <p>Soon after we had examined this place, we took boat, and askted Tituboalo to go with us to the other side or the bay; but he refused, and advised us not to go, for he said the country there was inhabited by people who were not subject to Tootahah, and who would kill both him and us. Upon receiving this intelligence, we did not, as may be imagined, relinquish our enterprize; but we immediately loaded our pieces with ball: this was so well understood by Tituboalo as a precaution which rendered us formidable, that he now consented to be of our party.</p>
              <p>Having rowed till it was dark, we reached a low neck of land, or isthmus, at the bottom of the bay, that divides the island into two peninsulas, each of which is a district or government wholly independent of the other. From Port-Royal, where the Ship was at anchor, the coast trends E. by S. and E. S. E. ten miles, then S. by E. and S. eleven miles to the isthmus. In the first direction, the shore is in general open to the sea; but in the last it is covered by reefs of rocks, which form several good harbours, with safe anchorage, in 16, 18, 20, and 24 fathom of water, with other conveniences. As we had not yet got into our enemy's country, we determined to sleep on shore: we landed, and though we found but few houses, we saw several double canoes whose owners were well known to us, and who provided us with supper and lodging; of which Mr. Banks was indebted for his share to Ooratooa, the lady who had paid him her compliments in so Angular a manner at the fort.</p>
              <p>In the morning, we looked about the country, and found it to be a marshy flat, about two miles over, across which the natives haul their canoes to the corresponding bay on the other side. We then prepared to continue our route for what Tituboalo called the other Kingdom; he said that the name of it was <hi rend="sc">Tiarrabou</hi>, or <hi rend="sc">Otaheite Ete</hi>; and that of the Chief who governed it, <hi rend="sc">Waheatua</hi>; upon this occasion
<pb xml:id="n26" n="14"/>
also, we learnt that the name of the peninsula where we had taken our station was <hi rend="sc">Opoureonu</hi>, or <hi rend="sc">Otaheite Nue</hi>. Our new associate seemed to be now in better spirits than he had been the day before; the people in Tiarabou would not kill us, he said, but he assured us that we should be able to procure no victuals among them; and indeed we had seen no breadfruit since we set out.</p>
              <p>After rowing a few miles, we landed in a district, which was the dominion of a Chief, called <hi rend="sc">Maraitata</hi>, the burying-place of men; whose father's name was <hi rend="sc">Pahairedo</hi>, the stealer of boats. Though these names seemed to favour the account that had been given by Tituboalo, we soon found that it was not true. Both the father and the son received us with the greatest civility, gave us provisions, and, after some delay, sold us a very large hog for a hatchet. A croud soon gathered round us, but we saw only two people that we knew; neither did we observe a Angle bead or ornament among them, that had come from our ship, though we saw several things which had been brought from Europe. In one of the houses lay two twelve-pound shot, one of which was marked with the broad arrow of England, though the people said they had them from the ships that lay in Bougainville's harbour.</p>
              <p>We proceeded on foot till we came to the dislrict which was immediately under the government of the principal, Chief, or King of the peninsula, Waheatua. Waheatua had a son, but whether, according to the custom of Opoureonu, he administered the government as regent, or in his own right, is uncertain. This district consists of a large and fertile plain, watered by a river so wide, that we were obliged to ferry over it in a canoe; our Indian train, however, chose to swim, and took to the water with the same facility as a pack of hounds. In this place we saw no house that appeared to be inhabited, but the ruins of many, that had been very large. We proceeded along the shore, which forms a bay, called <hi rend="sc">Oaitipeha</hi>, and at last we found the Chief sitting near some pretty canoe awnings, under which, we supposed, he and his attendants slept. He was a thin old man, with a very white head and beard, and had with him a comely woman, about
<pb xml:id="n27" n="15"/>
five and twenty years old, whose name was <hi rend="sc">Toudidde</hi>. We had often heard the name of this woman, and, from report and observation, we had reason to think that she was the <hi rend="sc">Oberea</hi> of this peninsula. From this place, between which and the isthmus there are Other harbours formed by the reefs that lie along the shore, where shipping may lie in perfect security, and from whence the land trends S. S. E. and S. to the S. E. part of the island, we were accompanied by <hi rend="sc">Tearee</hi>, the son of Waheatua, of whom we had purchased a hog, and the country we parted through appeared to be more cultivated than any we had seen in other parts of the island: the brooks were every where banked into narrow channels with stone, and the shore had also a facing of stone, where it was washed by the sea. The houses were neither large nor numerous, but the canoes that were hauled up along the shore were almost innumerable, and superior to any that we had seen before, both in size and make; they were longer, the sterns were higher, and the awnings were supported by pillars. At almost every point there was a sepulchral building, and there were many of them also inland. They were of the same figure as those in Opoureonu, but they were cleaner and better kept, and decorated with many carved boards, which were set upright, and on the top of which were various figures of birds and men: on one in particular, there was the representarion of a cock, which was painted red and yellow, to imitate the feathers of that animal, and rude images of men were, in some of them, placed one upon the head of another. But in this part of the country, however fertile and cultivated, we did not see a single bread-fruit; the trees were entirely bare, and the inhabitants seemed to subsist principally upon nuts which are not unlike a chesnut, and which they call <hi rend="sc">Ahee</hi>.</p>
              <p>When we had walked till we were weary, we called up the boat, but both our Indians, Tituboalo and Tuahow, were missing: they had, it seems, stayed behind at Waheatua's, expeding us to return thither, in consequence of a promise which had been extorted from us, and which we had it not in our power to fulfil.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n28" n="16"/>
              <p>Tearee, however, and another, embarked with us, and we proceeded till we came a-breast of a small island called <hi rend="sc">Otooareite</hi>; it being then dark, we determined to land, and our Indians conducted us to a place where they said we might sleep: it was a deserted house, and near it was a little cove, in which the boat might lie with great safety and convenience. We were, however, in want of provisions, having been very sparingly supplied since we set out; and Mr. Banks immediately went into the woods to see whether any could be procured. As it was dark, he met with no people, and could find but one house that was inhabited: a bread-fruit and a half, a few ahees, and some fire, were all that it afforded; upon which, with a duck or two, and a few curlieus, we made our supper, which, if not scanty, was disagreeable, by the want of bread, with which we had neglected to furnish ourselves, as we depended upon meeting with bread-fruit, and took up our lodging under the awning of a canoe belonging to Tearee, which followed us.</p>
              <p>The next morning, after having spent some time in another fruitless attempt to procure a supply of provisions, we proceeded round the south-east point, part of which is not covered by any reef, but lies open to the sea; and here the hill rises directly from the shore. At the southermost part of the island, the shore is again covered by a reef, which forms a good harbour; and the land about it is very fertile. We made this route partly on foot and partly in the boat; when we had walked about three miles, we arrived at a place where we saw several large canoes, and a number of people with them, whom we were agreeably surprised to find were of our intimate acquaintance. Here, with much difficulty, we procured some cocoa-nuts, and then embarked, taking with us Tuahow, one of the Indians who had waited for us at Waheatua's, and had returned the night before, long after it was dark.</p>
              <p>When we came a-breast of the south-east end of the island, we went ashore, by the advice of our Indian guide, who told us that the country was rich and good. The Chief, whose name was <hi rend="sc">Mathiabo</hi>, soon came down to us, but seemed to be a total stranger both to us and to our trade: his subjects, however, brought
<pb xml:id="n29" n="17"/>
us plenty of cocoa-nuts, and about twenty bread fruit. The bread-fruit we bought at a very dear rate, but his, excellency sold us a pig for a glass bottle, which he preferred to every thing else that we could give him. We found in his possession a goose and a turkey-cock, which, we were informed, had been left upon the island by the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>: they were both enormously fat, and so tame that they followed the Indians, who were fond of them to excess, wherever they went.</p>
              <p>In a long house, in this neighbourhood, we saw what was altogether new to us. At one end of it, fastened to a semi-circular board, hung fifteen human jawbones; they appeared to be fresh, and there was not one of them that wanted a single tooth. A sight so extraordinary strongly excited our curiosity, and we made many enquiries about it; but at this time could get no information; for the people either could not or would not understand us.</p>
              <p>When we left this place, the Chief, Mathiabo, desired leave to accompany us, which was readily granted. He continued with us the remainder of the day, and proved- very useful, by piloting us over the shoals. In the evening, we opened the bay on the north-west side of the island, which answered to that on the south-east, so as at the isthmus, or carrying place, almost to intersect the island, as I have observed before; and when we had coasted about two-thirds of it, we determined to go on more for the night. We saw a large house at some distance, which, Mathiabo informed us, belonged to one of his friends; and soon after several canoes came off to meet us, having on board some very handsome women, who, by their behaviour, seemed to have been sent to entice us on shore. As we had before resolved to take up our residence here for the night, little invitation was necessary. We found that the house belonged to the Chief of the district, whose name was WIVEROU: he received us in a very friendly manner, and ordered his people to assist us in dressing our provision, of which we had now got a tolerable stock. When our supper was ready, we were conducted into that part of the house where Wiverou was sitting, in order to eat it: Mathiabo supped with us; and Wiverou, calling for his
<pb xml:id="n30" n="18"/>
supper at the same time, we eat our meal very sociably, and with great good humour. When it was over, we began to enquire where we were to sleep, and a part of the house was shewn us, of which we were told we might take possession for that purpose. We then sent for our cloaks, and <name key="name-123818" type="person">Mr. Banks</name> began to undress, as his custom was, and, with a precaution which he had been taught by the loss of the jackets at Atahourou, sent his clothes aboard the boat, proposing to cover himself with a piece of Indian cloth. When Mathiabo perceived what was doing, he also pretended to want a cloak; and, as he had behaved very well, and done us some service, a cloak was ordered for him. We lay down, and observed that Mathiabo was not with us; but we supposed that he was gone to bathe, as the Indians always do before they sleep. We had not waited long, however, when an Indian, who was a stranger to us, came and told Mr.Banks, that the cloak and Mathiabo had disappeared together. This man had so far gained our confidence that we did not at first believe the report; but it being soon after confirmed by Tuahow, our own Indian, we knew no time was to be lost. As it was impossible for us to pursue the thief with any hope of success, without the assistance of the people about us, Mr. Banks started up, and telling our case, required them to recover the cloak, and, to enforce his requisition,. shewed one of his pocket pistols, which he always kept about him. Upon sight of the pistol, the whole company took the alarm, and, instead of assisting to catch the thief, or recover what had been stolen, began with great precipitation to leave the place; one of them, however, was seized, upon which he immediately offered to direct the chace: I set out therefore with Mr. Banks, and though we ran all the way, the alarm had got before us, for in about ten minutes we met a man bringing back the cloak, which the thief had relinquished in great terror; and as we did not then think fit to continue the pursuit, he made his escape. When we returned, we found the house, in which there had been between two and three hundred people, entirely deserted. It being, however, soon known that we had no resentment against any body
<pb xml:id="n31" n="19"/>
but Mathiabo, the Chief Wiverou, our host, with his wife, and many others, returned, and took up their lodging with us for the night. In this place, however, we were destined to more confusion and trouble, for about five o'clock in the morning our centry alarmed us with an account that the boat was missing: he had seen her, he said, about half an hour before, at her grappling, which was not above fifty yards from the shore; but upon hearing the found of oars, he had looked out again, and could see nothing of her. At this account we started up greatly alarmed, and ran to the water side; the morning was clear and star light, so that we could see to a considerable distance, but there was no appearance of the boat. Our situation was now such as might justify the most terrifying apprehensions; as it was a dead calm, and we could not therefore suppose her to have broken from her grappling, we had great reason to fear that the Indians had attacked her, and finding the people asleep, had succeeded in their enterprize. We were but four, with only one musquet and two pocket pistols, without a spare ball or charge of powder for either. In this state of anxiety and distress we remained a considerable time, expecting the Indians every moment to improve their advantage, when, to our unspeakable satisfaction, we saw the boat return, which had been driven from her grappling by the tide; a circumstance to which, in our confusion and surprise, we did not advert.</p>
              <p>As soon as the boat returned, we got our breakfast, and were impatient to leave the place, left some other vexatious accident should befal us. It is situated on the north side of Tiarrabou, the south-east peninsula, or division, of the island, and at the distance of about five miles south-east from the isthmus, having a large and commodious harbour, inferior to none in the island, about which the land is very rich in produce. Notwithstanding we had had little communication with this division, the inhabitants every where received us in a friendly manner; we found the whole of it fertile and populous, and, to all appearance, in a more flourishing state than Opoureonu, though it is not above one fourth part as large.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n32" n="20"/>
              <p>The next district in which we landed was the last in Tiarrabou, and governed by a Chief, whose name we understood to be OMOE. Omoe was building a house, and being herefore very desirous of procuring a hatchet, he would have been glad to have purchased one with any thing that he had in his possession; it. happened, however, rather unfortunately for him and us, that we had not one hatchet left in the boat. We offered to trade with nails, but he would not part with any thing in exchange for them; we therefore reimbarked, and put off our boat; but the Chief being unwilling to relinquish all hope of obtaining something from us that would be of use to him, embarked in a canoe, with his wife <hi rend="sc">Whano-ouda</hi>, and followed us. After some time we took them into the boat, and when we had rowed about a league, they desired we would put ashore: we immediately complied with his request, and found some of his people, who brought down a very large hog. We were as un willing to lose the hog, as the Chief was to part with us, and indeed it was worth the best axe we had in the ship; we therefore hit upon an expedient, and told him, that if he would bring his hog to the fort at MATAVAI, the Indian name for Port Royal bay, he should have a large axe, and a nail into the bargain, for his trouble. To this proposal, after having consulted with his wife, he agreed, and gave us a large piece of his country cloth as a pledge, that he would perform his agreement, which, however, he never did.</p>
              <p>At this place we saw a very singular curiosity: it was the figure of a man constructed of basket work, rudely made, but not ill designed; it was something more than seven feet high, and rather too bulky in proportion to its height. The wicker skeleton was completely covered with feathers, which were white where the skin was to appear, and black in the parts which it is their custom to paint or stain, and upon the head, where there was to be a representation of hair; upon the head also were four protuberances, three in front, and one behind, which we should have called horns, but which the Indians dignified with the name of TATE ETE, little men. The image was
<pb xml:id="n33" n="21"/>
called <hi rend="sc">Manioe</hi>, and was said to be the only one of the kind in <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>. They attempted to give us an explanation of its use and design, but we had not then acquired enough of their language to understand them. We learned, however, afterwards, that it was a representation of Mauwe, one of their Eatuas, or gods of the second class.</p>
              <p>After having settled our affairs with Omoe, we proceeded on our return, and soon reached Opoureonu, the north-west peninsula. After rowing a few miles, we went on shore again, but the only thing we saw worth notice was a repository for the dead, uncommonly de corated; the pavement was extremely neat, and upon it was raised a pyramid, about five feet high, which was intireiy covered with the fruits of two plants peculiar to the country. Near the pyramid was a small image of stone, of very rude workmanship, and the first instance of carving in stone that we had seen among these people. They appeared to set a high value upon it, for it was covered from the weather by a shed, that had been erected on purpose.</p>
              <p>We proceeded in the boat, and passed through the only harbour, on the south side of Opoureonu, that is fit for shipping. It is situated about five miles to the westward of the isthmus, between two small islands that lie near the shore, and about a mile distant from each other, and affords good anchorage in eleven and twelve fathom water. We were now not far from the district called <hi rend="sc">Paparra</hi>, which belonged to our friends Oamo and Oberea, where we proposed to sleep. We went on shore about an hour before night, and found that they were both absent, having left their habitations to pay us a visit at Matavai: this, however, did not alter our purpose; we took up our quarters at the house of Oberea, which, though small, was very neat, and at this time had no inhabitant but her father, who received us with looks that bid us welcome. Having taken possession, we were willing to improve the little day-light that was left us, and therefore walked out to a point, upon which we had seen, at a distance, trees that are here called Etoa, which generally distinguish the places where these people bury the bones of their dead; their name for such burying-grounds, which are
<pb xml:id="n34" n="22"/>
also places of worship, is MORAI. We were soon struck with the sight of an enormous pile, which, we were told, was the Morai of Oamo and Oberea, and the principal piece of Indian architecture in the island. It was a pile of stone work, raised pyramidically upon an oblong base, or square, two hundred and sixty-seven feet long, and eighty-seven wide. It was built like the small pyramidal mounts upon which we sometimes fix the pillar of a sun-dial, where each side is a flight of steps; the steps, however, at the sides were broader than those at the ends, so that it terminated not in a square of the same figure with the base, but in a ridge; like the roof of a house; there were eleven of these steps, each of which was four feet high, so that the height of the pile was forty-four feet; each step was formed of one course of white coral stone, which was neatly squared and polished; the rest of the mass, for there was no hollow within, consited of round pebbles, which, from the regularity of their figure, seemed to have been wrought. Some of the coral stones were very large; we measured one of them, and found it three feet and an half by two feet and an half. The foundation was of rock stones, which were also squared, and one of them measured four feet seven inches by two feet four. Such a structure, raised without the assistance of iron tools to shape the stones, or mortar to join them, struck as with astonishment: it seemed to be as compact and firm as it could have been made by any workman in Europe, except that the steps, which range along its greatest length, are not perfectly straight, but sink in a kind of hollow in the middle, so that the whole surface, from end to end, is not a right line, but a curve. The quarry-stones, as we saw no quarry in the neighbourhood, must have been brought from considerable distance, as there is no method of conveyance here but by the hand; the coral must also have been fished for from under the water, where, though it may be found in plenty, it lies at a considerable depth, never less than three feet. Both the rock stone and the coral could be squared only by tools made of the same substance, which must have been a work of incredible labour; but the polishing was more easily effected by means of the sharp coral sand, which is found every where
<pb xml:id="n35" n="23"/>
upon the sea-shore in great abundance. In the middle of the top stood the image of a bird, carved in wood; and near it lay the broken one of a fish, carved in stone. The whole of this pyramid made part of one side of a spacious area or square, nearly of equal sides, being three hundred and sixty feet by three hundred and fifty-four, which was walled in with stone, and paved with flat stones in its whole extent; though there were growing in it, notwithstanding the pavement, several of the trees which they call Etoa, and plantains. About an hundred yards to the west of this building, was another paved area or court, in which were several small stages raised on wooden pillars, about seven seet high, which are called by the Indian Ewattas, and seem to be a kind of altars, as upon these are placed provisions of all kinds, as offerings to the gods; we have since seen whole hogs placed upon them, and we found here the skulls of above fifty, besides the skulls of a great number of dogs.</p>
              <p>The principal object of ambition among these peopleis to have a magnificent Morai, and this was a striking memorial of the rank and power of Oberea. It has been remarked, that we did not find her invested with the same authority that she exercised when the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name> was at this place, and we now learnt the reason of it. Our way from her house to the Morai lay along the sea side, and we observed every where under our feet a great number of human bones, chiesly ribs and vertebrae. Upon enquiring into the cause of so singular an appearance, we were told, that in the then last month of Owarahew, which answered to our December, 1768, about four or five months before our arrival, the people of Tiarrabou, the S. E. peninsula which we had just visited, made a descent at this place, and killed a great number of the people, whose bones were those that we saw upon the shore: that, upon this occasion, Oberea, and Oamo, who then administered the government for his son, had fled to the mountains; and that the conquerors burnt all the houses, which were very large, and carried away the hogs and what other animals they found. We learnt also, that the turkey and goose, which we had seen when we were with Mathiabo, the stealer of cloaks,
<pb xml:id="n36" n="24"/>
were among the spoils; this accounted for their being found among people with whom the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name> had little or no communication; and upon mentioning the jawbones, which we had seen hanging from a board in a long house, we were told, that they also had been carried away as trophies, the people here carrying away the jaw-bones of their enemies, as the Indians of North America do the scalps.</p>
              <p>After having thus gratified our curiosity, we returned to our quarters, where we passed the night in perfect security and quiet. By the next evening we arrived at Atthourou, the residence of our friend Tootahah, where, the last time we passed the night under his protection, we had been obliged to leave the best part of our clothes behind us. This adventure, however, seemed now to be forgotten on both sides. Our friends received us with great pleasure, and gave us a good supper and a good lodging, where we suffered neither loss or disturbance.</p>
              <p>The next day, Saturday, July the 1st, we got back to our fort at Matavia, having found the circuit of the island, including both peninsulas, to be about thirty leagues. Upon our complaining of the want of bread-fruit, we were told, that the produce of the last season was nearly exhausted; and that what was seen sprouting upon the trees, would not be fit to use in less than three months; this accounted for our having been able to procure so little of it in our route.</p>
              <p>While the bread-fruit is ripening upon the flats, the inhabitants are supplied in some measure from the trees which they have planted upon the hills to proserve a succession; but the quantity is not sufficient to prevent scarcity: they live therefore upon the four paste which they call Mahie, upon wild plantains, and ahee nuts, which at this time are in perfection. How it happened that the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>, which was here at this season, found such plenty of bread-fruit upon the trees, I cannot tell, except the season in which they ripen varies.</p>
              <p>At our return, our Indian friends crowded about us, and none of them came empty-handed. Though I had determined to restore the canoes which had been
<pb xml:id="n37" n="25"/>
detained to their owners, it had not yet been done; but I now released them as they were applied for. Upon this occasion I could not but remark, with concern, that these people were capable of practising petty frauds against each other, with a deliberate dishonesty, which gave me a much worse opinion of them than I had ever entertained from the robberies they committed under the strong temptation to which a sudden opportunity of enriching themselves with the ineslimable metal and manufactures of Europe exposed them.</p>
              <p>Among others who applied to me for the release of a canoe, was one POTATTOW, a man of some conse-quence, well known to us all. I consented, supposing the vessel to be his own, or that he applied on the behalf of a friend: he went immediately to the beach, and took possession of one of the boats, which, with the assistance of his people, he began to carry off. Upon this, however, it was eagerly claimed by the right owners, who, supported by the other Indians, clamorously reproached him for invading their property, and prepared to take the canoe from him by force. Upon this he desired to be heard, and told them, that the canoe did, indeed, once belong to those who claimed it; but that I, having seized it as a forfeit, had sold it to him for a pig. This silenced the clamour, the owners, knowing that from my power there was no appeal, acquiesced; and Potattow would have carried off his prize, if the dispute had not fortunately been overheard by some of our people, who reported it to me. I gave orders immediately that the Indians should be undeceived; upon which the right owners took possession of their canoe, and Potattow was so conscious of his guilt, that neither he nor his wife, who was privy to his knavery, could look us in the face for some time afterwards.</p>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n38" n="26"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d3" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. III</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p>
                  <hi rend="i">An Expedition of Mr. Banks to trace the River: Marks of subterraneous Fire: Preparations for leaving the Island: An Account of Tupia.</hi>
                </p>
              </argument>
              <p>On the 3d, Mr. Banks, set out early in the morning, with some Indian Guides, to trace our River up the valley from which it istues, and examine' how far its banks were inhabited. For about six miles they met with houses, not. far distant from each other, on each side of the river, and the valley was every where about four hundred yards wide, from the foot of the hill on one side, to the foot of that on the other; but they were now shewn a house. which they were, told was the last that they would see. When they came up to it, the master of it offered them refresh-ments of cocoa nuts and other fruit, of which they accepted; after a short stay, they walked forward for a considerable time; in bad way it is not easy to compute distances, but they imagined that they had walked about six miles farther, following the course of the river, when they frequently passed under vaults, formed by fragments of the rock, in which they were told people who were benighted frequently passed the night. Soon after they found the river banked by steep rocks, from which a cascade falling with great violence, form ed a pool, so steep, that the Indians said they could not pass it. They seemed, indeed, not much to be acquainted with the valley beyond this place, their business lying chiefly upon the declivity of the rocks on each side, and the plains which extended on their summits, where they found plenty of wild plantain, which they called Vae. The way up these rocks from the banks of the river was in every respect dreadful; the sides were nearly perpendicular, and in some places one hundred feet high; they were also rendered exceedingly slippery by the water of innumerable springs which issued from the fissures on the surface; yet up these precipices a way was to be traced by a succession of long pieces of the bark of the Hibiscus tiliaceus, which served as a rope for the climber to take
<pb xml:id="n39" n="27"/>
hold of, and assisted him in scrambling from one ledge to another, though upon these ledges there was footing only for an Indian or goat. One of these ropes was nearly thirty feet in length, and their guides offered to assist them in mounting this pass, but recommended another, at a little distance lower down, as less difficult and dangerous. They took a view of this “better way,” but found it so bad that they did not choose to attempt it, as there was nothing at the top to reward their toil and hazard but a grove of the wild plantain or Vae tree, which they had often seen before.</p>
              <p>During this excursion, Mr. Banks had an excellent opportunity to examine the rocks, which were almost every where naked, for minerals; but he found not the least appearance of any. The stones every where, like those of Madeira, shewed manifest tokens of having been burned; nor is there a single specimen of any stone, among all those that were collected in the island, upon which there are not manifest and indubitable marks of fire, except perhaps some small pieces of the hatchet-stone, and even of that, other fragments were collected, which are burned almost to a pumice. Traces of fire are also manifest in the very clay upon the hills; and it may, therefore, not unreasonably be supposed, that this, and the neighbonring islands, are either Shattered remains of a continent, which some have supposed to be necessary in this part of the globe, to preserve an equilibrium of its parts, which were left behind when the rest sunk, by the mining of a subterraneous fire, so as to give a passage to the sea over it; or were torn from rocks, which, from the creation of the world, had been the bed of the sea, and thrown up in heaps, to a height which the waters never reach. One or other of these suppositions will, perhaps, be thought the more probable, as the water does not gradually grow shallow, as the shore is approached, and the islands are almost every where surrounded by reefs, which appear to be rude and broken, as some violent concussion would naturally leave the solid substance of the earth. It may also be remarked, upon this occasion, that the most probable cause of earthquakes seems to be the sudden rushing in of water upon some vast
<pb xml:id="n40" n="28"/>
mass of subterraneous fire, by the instantaneous rare-faction of which into vapour, the mine is sprung, and various substances, in all stages of vitrification, with shells, and other marine productions, that are now found fossil, and the strata that covered the furnace, are thrown up; while those parts of the land which were supported upon the broken shell give way, and sink into the gulph. With this theory the phænomena of all earthquakes seem to agree; pools of water are frequently left where land has subsided, and various substances, which manifestly appear to have suffered by the action of fire, are thrown up. It is indeed true, that fire cannot subsist without air; but this cannot be urged against there being fire below that part of the earth which forms the bed of the sea; because there may be innumerable fissures by which a communication between those parts and the external air may be kept up, even upon the highest mountains, and at the greatest distance from the sea-shore.</p>
              <p>On the 4th, Mr. Banks employed himself in plantinga great quantity of the feeds of water-melons, oranges, lemons, limes, and other plants and trees which he had collected at Rio de Janeiro. For these he prepared ground on each side of the fort, with as many varieties of foil as he could choose; and there is little doubt but that they will succeed. He also gave liberally of these feeds to the Indians, and planted many of them in the woods: some of the melon seeds having been planted soon after our arrival, the natives shewed him several of the plants, which appeared to be in a most flourishing condition, and were continually asking him for more.</p>
              <p>We now began to prepare for our departure, by bending the sails and performing other necessary operations on board the ship, our water being already on board, and the provisions examined. In the mean time we had another visit from Oamo, Oberea, and their Ion and daughter; the Indians expressing their respect by uncovering the upper parts of their body, as they had done before. The daughter, whose name we understood to be TOIMATA, was very desirous to see the fort, but her father would by no means suffer her to come in. Tearee. the son of Waheatua. the <choice><orig>sove-
<pb xml:id="n41" n="29"/>
reign</orig><reg>sovereign</reg></choice> of Tiarrabou, the south-east peninsula, was also with us at this time; and we received intelligence of the landing of another guest, whose company was neither expected nor desined; this was no other than the ingenious gentleman who contrived to steal our quadrant. We were told, that he intended to try his fortune again in the night; but the Indians all offered very zealously to assist us against him, desiring that, for this purpose, they might be permitted to lie in the fort. This had so good an effect, that the thief relinquished his enterprize in despair.</p>
              <p>On the 7th, the carpenters were employed in taking down the gates and pallisadoes of our little fortification, for fire-wood on board the ship; and one of the Indians bad dexterity enough to steal the staple and book upon which the gate turned; he was immediately pursued, and after a chace of six miles he appeared to have been passed, having concealed himself among some rushes in the brook; the rushes were searched, and tho' the thief had escaped, a scraper was found, which had been stolen from the ship some time before; and soon after our old friend Tubourai Tamaide brought us the staple.</p>
              <p>On the 8th and 9th, we continued to dismantle our fort, and our friends still flocked about us; some, I believe, sorry at the approach of our departure, and others desirous to make as much as they could of us while we stayed.</p>
              <p>We were in hopes that we should now leave the island, without giving or receiving any other offence; but it unfortunately happened otherwise. Two foreign seamen having been out with my permission, one of them was robbed of his knife, and endeavouring to recover it, probably with circumstances of great provocation, the Indians attacked him, and dangerously wounded him with a stone; they wounded his companions also slightly in the head, and then fled into the mountains. As I should have been sorry to take any farther notice of the affair, I was not displeased that the offenders had escaped, but I was immediately involved in a quarrel which I very much regretted, and which yet it was not possible to avoid.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n42" n="30"/>
              <p>In the middle of the night between the 8th and 9th, <name type="person" key="name-400651">Clement Webb</name> and <name type="person" key="name-400657">Samuel Gibson</name>, two of the marines, both young men, went privately from the fort, and in the morning were not to be found. As public notice had been given, that all hands were to go on board on the next day, and that the ship would sail on the morrow of that day or the day following, I began to fear that the absentees intended to stay behind. I knew that I could take no effectual steps to recover them, without endangering the harmony and good-will which at present subsisted among us; and, therefore, determined to wait a day for the chance of their return.</p>
              <p>On Monday morning the 10th, the marines, to my great concern, not being returned, an enquiry was made after them of the Indians, who frankly told us, that they did not intend to return, and had taken refuge in the mountains, where it was impossible for our people to find them. They were then requested to assist in the search, and, after, some deliberation, two of them undertook to conduct such persons as I should think proper to send after them to the place of their retreat. As they were known to be without arms, I thought two would be sufficient, and accordingly dispatched a petty officer, and the corporal of the marines, with the Indian guides, to fetch them back. As the recovery of these men was a matter of great importance, as I had no time to lose, and as the Indians spoke doubtfully of their return, telling us, that they had each of them taken a wife, and were become inhabitants of the country, it was intimated to several of the Chiefs who were in the fort with their women, among whom were Tubourai Tamaide, Tomio, and Oberea, that they would not be permitted to leave it till our deserters were brought back. This precaution I thought the more necessary, as, by concealing them a few days, they might compel me to go without them; and I had the pleasure to observe, that they received the intimation with very little signs either of fear or discontent; assuring me that my people should be secured and sent back as soon as possible. While this was doing at the fort, I sent Mr. Hicks in the pinnace to fetch Tootahah on board the ship, which he did, without alarming either him or his
<pb xml:id="n43" n="31"/>
people. If the Indian guides proved faithful and in earnest, I had reason to expect the return of my people, with the deserters before evening. Being disappointed, my suspicions increased; and night coming on, I thought it was not safe to let the people whom I had detained as hostages continue at the fort, and I therefore ordered Tubourai Tamaide, Oberea, and some others, to be taken on board the ship. This spread a general alarm, and several of them, especially the women, expressed their apprehensions with great emotion and many tears, when they were put into the boat. I went on board with them, and Mr. Banks remained on shore, with some others whom I thought it of less consequence to secure.</p>
              <p>About nine o'clock, Webb was brought back by some of the natives, who declared, that Gibson, and the petty officer and corporal would be detained till Tootahah should be set at liberty. The tables were now turned upon me; but I had proceeded too far to retreat. I immediately dispatched Mr. Hicks in the long-boat, with a strong party of men, to rescue the prisoners, and told Tootahah that it behoved him to send some of his people with them, with orders to afford them effectual assistance, and to demand the release of my men in his name, for that I should expect him to answer for the contrary. He readily complied; this party recovered my men without the least opposition, and, about seven o'clock in the morning, returned with them to the ship, though they had not been able to recover the arms which had been taken from them when they were seized: these, however, were brought on board in less than half an hour, and the Chiefs were immediately set at liberty.</p>
              <p>When I questioned the petty officer concerning what had happened on more, be told me, that neither the natives who went with him, nor those whom they met in their way, would give them any intelligence of the deserters; but, on the contrary, became very troublesome: that as he was returning for further orders to the ship, he and his comrade were suddenly seized by a number of armed men, who having learned that Tootahah was confined, had concealed themselves in a wood for that purpose, and, who having taken them at a disadvantage, forced their weapons out of their
<pb xml:id="n44" n="32"/>
hands, and declared, that they would detain them till their Chief should be set at liberty. He said, however, that the Indians were not unanimous in this measure; that some were for setting them at liberty, and others for detaining them: that an eager dispute ensued, and that from words they came to blows, but that the party for detaining them at length prevailed: that soon after, Webb and Gibson were brought in by a party of the natives, as prisoners, that they also might be secured as hostages for the Chief; but that it was after some debate resolved to send Webb to infrom me of their resolution, to assure me that his companions were safe, and direct me where I might send my answer. Thus it appears that whatever were the disadvantages of seizing the Chiefs, I should never have recovered my men by any other method. When the Chiefs were set on shore from the ship, those at the fort were also set at liberty, and, after staying with Mr. Banks about an hour, they all went away. Upon this occasion, as they had done upon another of the same kind, they expressed their joy by an undeserved liberality, strongly urging us to accept of four hogs. These we absolutely refused as a present, and they as absolutely refusing to be paid for them, the hogs did not change masters. Upon examining the deserters, we found that the account which the Indians had given of them was true: they had strongly attached themselves to two girls, and it was their intention to conceal themselves till the ship had sailed, and take up their residence upon the island. This night every thing was got off from the shore, and every body slept on board.</p>
              <p>Among the natives who were most constantly with us, was Tupia, whose name has been often mentioned in this narrative. He had been, as I have before observed, the first minister of Oberea, when she was in the height of her power: he was also the chief Tahowa or Priest of the island, consequently well acquainted with the religion of the country, as well with respect to its ceremonies as principles. He had also great experience and knowledge in navigation, and was particularly acquainted with the number and situation of the neighbouring islands. This man had often expressed a desire to go with us, and on the 12th in the
<pb xml:id="n45" n="33"/>
morning, having with the other natives left us the day before, be came on board, with a boy about thirteen years of age, his servant, and urged us to let him proceed with us on our voyage. To have such a person on board, was certainly desirable for many reasons; by learning his language, and teaching him ours, we should be able to acquire a much better knowledge of the custom, policy, and religion of the people, than our short stay among them could give us; I therefore gladly agreed to receive them on board. As we were prevented from sailing to-day, by having found it necessary to make new stocks to our small and best bower anchors, the old ones having been totally destroyed by the worms, Tupia said he would go once more on shore, and make a signal for the boat to fetch him off in the evening. He went accordingly, and took with him a miniature picture of Mr. Banks's, to show his friends, and several little things to give them as parting presents.</p>
              <p>After dinner, Mr. Banks being desirous to procure a drawing, of the Merai belonging to Tootahah at Eparré, I attended him thither, accompanied by Dr. Solander, in the pinnace. As soon as we landed, many of our friends came to meet us, though some absented themselves in resentment of what had happened the day before. We immediately proceeded to Too tahah's house, where we were joined by Oberea, with several others who had not come out to meet us, and a perfect reconciliation was soon brought about; in consequence of which they promised to visit us early the next day, to take a last farewell of us, as we told them we should certainly set sail in the afternoon. At this place also we sound Tupia, who returned with us, and slept this night on board the ship for the first time.</p>
              <p>On the next morning, Thursday the 13th of July, the ship was very early crowded with our friends, and surrounded by a multitude of canoes, which were filled with the natives of an inferior class. Between eleven and twelve we weighed anchor, and as soon as the ship was under sail, the Indians on board took their leave, and wept, with a decent and silent sorrow, in which there was something very striking and tender: the people in the canoes, on the contrary, seemed to vie
<pb xml:id="n46" n="34"/>
with each other in the boldness of their lamentations, which we considered rather as affectation than grief. Tupia sustained himself in this scene with a sirmnesand resolution truly admirable: he wept indeed, but the effort that he made to conceal his tears concurred, with them, to do him honour. He sent his last present, a shirt, by Otheothea, to Potomai, Tootahah's favourite mistress, and then went with Mr. Banks to the masthead, waving to the canoes as long as they continued in fight.</p>
              <p>Thus we took leave of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, and its inhabitants, after a stay of just three months; for much the greater part of the time we lived together in the most cordial friendship, and a perpetual reciprocation of good offices. The accidental differences which now and then happened, could not be more sincerely regretted on their part than they were on ours: the principal causes were such as necessarily resulted from our situation and circumstances, in conjunction with the infirmities of human nature, from our not being able perfectly to understand each other, and from the disposition of the inhabitants to thest, which we could not at all times bear with or prevent. They had not however, except in one instance, been attended with any fatal consequence; and to that accident were owing the measures that I took to prevent others of the same kind. I hoped, indeed, to have availed myself of the impression which had been made upon them by the lives that had been sacrificed in their contest with the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>, so as that the intercourse between us should have been carried on wholly without bloodshed; and by this hope all my measures were directed during the whole of my continuance at the island, and I sincerely wish, that whoever shall next visit it, may be still more fortunate. Our traffic here was carried on with as much order as in the best regulated market in Europe. It was managed principally by Mr. Banks, who was indefatigable in procuring provisiton and resreshments while they were to be had; but during the latter part of our time they became scarce, partly by the increased consumption at the fort and ship, and partly by the coming on of the season in which cocoa-nuts and bread-fruit sail. All kind of fruit we <choice><orig>pur-
<pb xml:id="n47" n="35"/>
chased</orig><reg>purchased</reg></choice> for beads and nails, but no nails less than forty-penny were current: after a very short time we could never get a pig of more than ten or twelve pounds, for less than a hatchet; because, tho' these people set a high value upon spike-nails, yet these being an article with which many people in the ship were provided, the women found a much more easy way of procuring them than by bringing down provisions.</p>
              <p>The best articles for traffic here are axes, hatchets, spikes, large nails, looking-glasses, knives, and beads, for some of which every thing that the natives have may be procured. They are indeed fond of fine line-cloth, both white and printed; but an axe worth half a crown will fetch more than a piece of cloth worth twenty shillings.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d4" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. IV</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">A particular Description of the Island; its Produce and Inbabitants; their Dress, Habitations, Food, domestic Life and Amusements</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">We</hi> found the longitude of Port-Royal Bay, in this island, as settled by <name type="person" key="name-150152">Captain Wallis</name>, who discovered it on the 9th of June 1767, to be within half a degree of the truth. We found Point Venus, the northern extremity of the island, and the eastern point of the bay, to lie in the longitude of 149° 30, this being the mean result of a great number of observations made upon the spot. The island is surrounded by a reef of coral rock, which forms several excellent bays and harbours, some of which have been particularly described, where there is room and depth of water for any number of the largest ships. Port-Royal Bay, called by the natives Matavi, which is not inferior to any in <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, may easily be known by a very high mountain in the middle of the island, which bears due south from Point Venus. To sail into it, either keep the west point of the reef that lies before Point Venus, close on board, or give it a birth of near half a mile, in order to avoid a small shoal of coral rocks, on which there is but two fathom and a half of water. The best anchoring is on the
<pb xml:id="n48" n="36"/>
eastern side of the bay, where there is sixteen and fourteen fathom upon an oozy bottom. The shore of the bay is a fine sandy beach, behind which runs a river of fresh water, so that any number of ships may water here without incommoding each other; but the only wood, for firing, upon the whole island, is that of fruit trees, which must be purchased of the natives, or all hope of living upon good terms with them given up. There are some harbours to the westward of this bay, which have not been mentioned, but, as they are consiguous to it, a description of them is unnecessary.</p>
              <p>The face of the country, except that part of it which borders upon the sea, is very uneven; it rises in ridges that run up into the middle of the island, and there form mountains, which may be seen at the distance of sixty miles: between the foot of these ridges and the sea is a border of low land, surrounding the whole island, except in a few places where the ridges rise directly from the sea; the border of low land is in different parts of different breadths, but no where more than a mile and a half. The soil, except upon the very tops of the ridges, is extremely rich and fertile, watered by a great number of rivulets of excellent water, and covered with fruit-trees of various kinds, some of which are of a stately growth and thick foliage, so as to form one continued wood; and even the tops of the ridges, though in general they are bare, and burned up by the sun, are, in some parts, not without their produce.</p>
              <p>The low land that lies between the foot of the ridges and the sea, and some of the vallies, are the only parts of the island that are inhabited, and here it is populous: the houses do not form villages or towns, but are ranged along the whole border at the distance of about fifty yards from each other, with little plantations of plantains, the tree which furnishes them with cloth. The whole island, according to Tupia's account, who certainly knew, could furnish six thousand seven hundred and eighty fighting men, from which the number of inhabitants may easily be computed.</p>
              <p>The produce of this island is bread-fruit, cocoanuts, bananas, of thirteen sorts, the best we had ever
<pb xml:id="n49" n="37"/>
eaten; plantains; a fruit not unlike an apple, which, when ripe, is very pleasant; sweet potatoes, yams, cocoas, a kind of Arum; a fruit known here by the name of Jambu, and reckoned most delicious; sugar-cane, which the inhabitants eat raw; a root of the Salop kind, called by the inhabitants Pea; a plant called Ethee, of which the root only is eaten; a fruit that grows in a pod, like that of a large kidney-bean, which, when it is roasted, eats very much like a chesnut, by the natives called Ahee; a tree called Wharra, called in the East-Indies Pandanes, which produces fruit, something like the pine-apple; a shrub called Nono; the Morinda, which also produces fruit; a species of fern, of which the root is eaten, and sometimes the leaves; and a plant called Theve, of which the root also is eaten; but the fruits of the Nono, the fern, and the Theve, are only eaten by the inferior people, and in times of scarcity. All these, which serve the inhabitants for food, the earth produces spontaneously, or with so little culture that they seem to be exempted from the first general curse, that “man should eat his bread in “the sweat of his brow.” They have also the Chinese paper mulberry, morus papyrifera, which they call Aouta; a tree resembling the wild fig-tree of the West Indies; another species of fig, which they call Matte; the cordia sebestina orientalis, which they call Etou; a kind of Cyprus grass, which they call Moo; a species of tournefortia, which they call Taheinoo; another of the convolvulus poluce, which they call Eurhe; the solanum centisolium, which they call Ebooa; the calophyllum mophylum, which they call Tamannu; the hibiscus tiliaceus, called Poerou, a frutescent nettle; the urtica argentea, called Erowa; with many other plants, which cannot here be particularly mentioned; those that have been named already, will be referred to in the subsequent part of this work.</p>
              <p>They have no European fruit, garden-stuff, pulse, or legumes, nor grain of any kind.</p>
              <p>Of tame animals they have only hogs, dogs, and poultry; neither is there a wild animal in the island, except ducks, pigeons, paroquets, with a few other birds, and rats, there being, no other quadruped, nor
<pb xml:id="n50" n="38"/>
any serpent. But the sea supplies them with great variety of most excellent fish, to eat which is their chief luxury, and to catch it their principal labour.</p>
              <p>As to the people, they are of the largest size of Europeans. The men are tall, strong, well-limbed, and finely shaped. The tallest that we saw was a man upon a neighbouring island, called <hi rend="sc">Huaheine</hi>, who measured six feet three inches and an half. The women of the superior rank are also in general above our middle stature, but those of the inferior class are rather below it, and some of them are very small. This defect in size probably proceeds from their early commerce with men, the only thing in which they differ from their superiors, that could, possibly affect their growth.</p>
              <p>Their natural complexion is that kind of clear olive, or Brunette, which many people in Europe prefer to the finest white and red. In those that are exposed to the wind and sun, it is considerably deepened, but in others that live under shelter, especially the superior class of women, it continues of its native hue, and the skin is most delicately smooth and soft; they have no tint in their cheeks, which we distinguish by the name of colour. The shape of the face is comely, the cheek, bones are not high, neither are the eyes hollow, nor the brow prominent; the only feature that does not correspond with our ideas of beauty is the nose, which, in general, is somewhat flat; but their eyes, especially those of the women, are full of expression, sometimes sparkling with fire, and sometimes melting with softness; their teeth also are, almost without exception, most beautifully even and white, and their breath perfecly without taint.</p>
              <p>The hair is almost universally black, and rather coarse; the men have beards, which they wear in many fashions, always, however, plucking out great part of them, and keeping the rest perfectly clean and neat. Both sexes also eradicate every hair from under their arms, and accused us of great uncleanness for not doing the same. In their motions there is at once vigour and ease; their walk is graceful, their deportment liberal, and their behaviour to Grangers and to each other affable and courteous. In their dispositions also, they
<pb xml:id="n51" n="39"/>
seemed to be brave, open, and candid, without either suspicion or treachery, cruelty or revenge; so that we placed the same confidence in them as in our best friends; many of us, particularly Mr. Banks, sleeping frequently in their houses in the woods, without a companion, and consequetly wholly in their power. They were, however, all thieves; and when that is allowed, they need not much fear a competition with the people of any other nation upon earth. During our stay in this island we saw about five or six persons, like one that was met by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander on the 24th of April, in their walk to the east ward, whose skins were of a dead white, like the nose of a white horse; with white hair, beard, brows, and eye lashes; red, tender eyes; a short sight, and scurfy skins, covered with a kind of white down; but we found that no two of these belonged to the same family, and there-fore concluded, that they were not a species. but unhappy individuals, rendered anomalous by disease.</p>
              <p>It is a custom in most countries where the inhabitants have long hair, for the men to cut it short, and the women to pride themselves in its length. Here, however, the contrary custom prevails; the women always cut it short round their ears, and the men, except the fishers, who are almost continually in the water, suffer it to flow in large waves over their moulders, or tie it up in a bunch on the top of their heads.</p>
              <p>They have a custom also of anointing their heads with what they call Monoe, an oil expressed from the cocoa-nut, in which some sweet herbs or flowers have been infused: as the oil is generally rancid, the smell is at first very disagreeable to an European; and as they live in a hot country, and have no such thing as a comb, they are not able to keep their heads free from lice, which the children and common people some times pick out and eat; a hateful custom, wholly different from their manners in every other particular, for they are delicate and cleanly, almost without example, and those to whom we distributed combs soon delivered themselves from vermin, with a diligence which shewed that they were not more odious to us than to them.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n52" n="40"/>
              <p>They have a custom of staining their bodies, nearly in the same manner as is practised in many other parts of the world, which they call Tattowing. They prick the skin, so as just not to fetch blood, with a small instrument, something in the form of a hoe; that part which answers to the blade is made of a bone or shell, scraped very thin, and is from a quarter of an inch to an inch and a half wide; the edge is cut into sharp teeth or points, from the number of three to twenty, according to its size: when this is to be used, they dip the teeth into a mixture of a kind of lamp black, formed of the smoke that rises from an oily nut, which they burn instead of candles, and water: the teeth, thus prepared, are placed upon the skin, and the handle to which they are fastened being struck, by quick smart blows, with a stick fitted to the purpose, they pierce it, and at the same time carry into the puncture the black composition, which leaves an indelible stain. The operation is painful, and it is some days before the wounds are healed. It is performed upon the youth of both sexes, when they are about twelve or fourteen years of age, on several parts of the body, and in various figures, according to the fancy of the parent, or perhaps the rank of the party. The women are generally marked with this stain, in the form of a Z, on every joint of their fingers and toes, and frequently round the outside of their feet; the men are also marked with the same figure, and both men and women have squaras, circles, crescents, and ill-designed representations of men, birds, or dogs, and various other devices, impressed upon their legs and arms, some of which, we were told, had significations, though we could never learn what they were. But the part on which these ornaments are lavished with the greatest profusion, is the breech; this, in both sexes, is covered with a deep black, above which, arches are drawn one over another as high as the short ribs. They are often a quarter of an inch broad, and the edges are not straight lines, but indented. These arches are their pride, and are shown both by men and women with a mixture of ostentation and pleasure; whether as an ornament, or a proof of their fortitude and resolution in bearing pain,
<pb xml:id="n53" n="41"/>
we could not determine. The face in general is left unmarked; for we saw but one instance to the contrary. Some old men had the greatest part of their bodies covered with large patches of black, deeply indented at the edges, like a rude imitation of flames; but we were told, that they came from a low island called Noouoora, and were not natives of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>.</p>
              <p>Mr. Banks saw the operation of Tattowing performed upon the backside of a girl about thirteen years old. The instrument used upon this occasion had thirty teeth, and every stroke, of which at least an hundred were made in a minute, drew an ichor, or serum, a little tinged with blood. The girl bore it with a most stoical resolution for about a quarter of an hour; but the pain of so many hundred punctures as she had received in that time then became intolerable: she first complained in murmurs, then wept, and at last burst into loud lamentations, earnestly imploring the operator to desist: he was, however, inexorable, and when she began to struggle, she was held down by two women, who sometimes soothed, and sometimes chid her; and now and then, when she was most unruly, gave her a smart blow. Mr. Banks stayed in a neighbouring house an hour, and the operation was not over when he went away; yet it was performed but upon one side, the other having been done some time before; and the arches upon the loins, in which they most pride themselves, and which give more pain than all the rest, were still to be done.</p>
              <p>It is strange that these people should value themselves upon what is no distinction; for I never saw a native of this island, either man or woman, in a state of maturity, in whom these marks were wanting: possibly they may have their rise in superstition, especially as they produce no visible advantage, and are not made without great pain; but though we enquired of many hundred, we could never get any account of the matter.</p>
              <p>Their cloathing consists of cloth or matting of different kinds, which will be described among their other manufactures. Their cloth, which will not bear weting, they wear in dry weather, and the matting when
<pb xml:id="n54" n="42"/>
it rains: they are put on in many different ways, Just as their fancy leads them; for in their garments nothing is cut into shape, nor any two pieces sewed together. The dress of the better sort of women cosists of three or four pieces; one piece, about two yards wide and eleven yards long, they wrap several times round their waist, so as to hang down like a petticoat as low as the middle of the leg, and this they call Parou; two or three other pieces, about two yards and an half long and one wide, each having a hole cut in the middle, they place one upon another, and then putting the head through the holes, they bring the long ends down before and behind, the others remain open at the sides, and give liberty to the arms: this, which they call the Tebuta, is gathered round the waist, and confined with a girdle or sash of thinner cloth, which is long enough to go many times round them, and exactly resembles the garments worn by the inhabitants of Peru and Chili, which the Spaniards call Poncho. The dress of the men is the same; except that instead of suffering the cloth that is wound about the hips to hang down like a petticoat, they bring it between their legs, so as to have some resemblance to breeches, and it is then called Maro This is the dress of all ranks of people, and being universally the same as to form. the gentlemen and ladies distinguish themselves from the lower people by the quantity; some of them will wrap round them several pieces of cloth, eight or ten yards long, and two or three broad; and some throw a large piece loosely over their shoulders, in the manner of a cloak, of perhaps two pieces, if they are very great personages, and are desirous to appear in state. The inferior sort, who have only a small allowance of cloth from the tribes or families to which they belong, are obliged to be more thinly clad. In the heat of the day they appear almost naked, the women having only a scanty petticoat, and the men nothing but the sash that is passed between their legs and sastened round the waist. As finery is always troublesome, and particularly in a hot country, where it consists in putting one covering upon another, the women of rank always uncover themselves as low as the waist in the evening, throwing off all that they wear on the
<pb xml:id="n55" n="43"/>
upper part of the body, with the same negligence and ease as our ladies would lay by a cardinal or double handkerchief. And the Chiefs, even when they visited us, though they had as much cloth round their middle as would clothe a dozen people, had frequently the rest of the body quite naked.</p>
              <p>Upon their legs and feet they wear no covering; but they shade their faces from the sun with little bonnets, either of matting or of cocoa-nut leaves, which they make occasionally in a few minutes. This, however, is not all their head-dress; the women sometimes wear little turbans, and sometimes a dress which they value much more, and which, indeed, is much more becoming, called Tomou; the Tomou consists of human hair, plaited in threads, scarcely thicker than sewing silk. Mr. Banks has pieces of it above a mile in length, without a knot. These they wind round the head in such a manner as produces a very pretty effect, and in a very great quantity; for I have seen five or six such pieces wound about the head of one woman: among these threads they stick flowers of various kinds, particularly the cape-jessamine, of which they have great plenty, as it is always planted near their houses. The men sometimes slick the tail feather of the Topic-bird upright in their hair, which, as I have observed before, is often tied in a bunch upon the top of their heads: sometimes they wear a kind of whimsical garland, made of flowers of various kinds, stuck into a piece of the rind of plantain; or of scarlet peas, stuck with gum upon a piece of wood: and sometimes they wear a kind of wig, made of the hair of men or dogs, or perhaps of cocoa-nut strings, woven upon one thread, which is tied under their hair, so that these artificial honours of their head may hang down behind. Their personal ornaments, besides flowers, are few; both sexes wear ear-rings, but they are placed only on one side: when we came they consisted of small pieces of shell, stone, berries, red peas, or some small pearls, three in a string; but our beads very soon supplanted them all.</p>
              <p>The children go quite naked; the girls till they are three or four years old, and the boys till they are six or seven.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n56" n="44"/>
              <p>The houses, or rather dwellings, of these peoples have been occasionally mentioned before: they are all built in the wood, between the sea and the mountaint, and no more ground is cleared for each house, than just sufficient to prevent the dropping of the branches from rotting the thatch with which they are covered; from the house, therefore, the inhabitant steps immediately under the shade, which is the most delightful that can be imagined. It consists of groves of bread-fruit and cocoa-nuts, without underwood, which are intersected, in all directions, by the paths that lead from one house to the other. Nothing can be more grateful than this shade in so warm a climate, nor any thing more beautiful than these walks. As there is no underwood, the shade cools without impeding the air; and the houses, having no walls, receive the gale from whatever point it blows. I shall now give a particular description of a house of a middling size, from which, as the structure is universally the same, a perfect idea may be formed both of those that are bigger, and those that are less.</p>
              <p>The ground which it covers is an oblong square, four and twenty feet long, and eleven wide; over this a roof is raised, upon three rows of pillars or posts parallel to each other, one on each side, and the other in the middle. This roof consists of two flat sides inclining to each other, and terminating in a ridge, exactly like the roofs of our thatched houses in England. The utmost height within is about nine feet, and the eaves on each side reach to within about three feet and an half of the ground: below this, and through the whole height at each end, it is open, no part of it being inclosed with a wall. The roof is thatched with palm-leaves, and the floor is covered, some inches deep, with soft hay; over this are laid mats, so that the whole is one cushion, upon which they sit in the day, and sleep in the night. In some houses, however, there is one stool, which is wholly appropriated to the master of the family; besides this, they have no furniture, except a few little blocks of wood, the upper side of which is hollowed into a curve, and which serve them for pillows.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n57" n="45"/>
              <p>The house is indeed principally used as a dormitory; for, except it rains, they cat in the open air, undor the shade of the next tree. The clothes that they wear in the day, serve them for covering in the night: the floor is the common bed of the whole household, and is not divided by any partition. The master of the house and his wife deep in the middle, next to them the marrried people, next to them the unmarried women, and next to them, at a little distance, the unmarried men; the servants, or Toutous, as they are called, sleep in the open air, except it rains, and in that case they come just within the shed.</p>
              <p>There are, however, houses of another kind, belonging to the Chiefs, in which there is some degres of privacy. These are much smaller, and so constructed as to be carried about in their canoes from place to place, and set up occasionally, like a tent; they are inclosed on the sides with cocoa-nut leaves, but not so close as to exclude the air, and the Chief and his wife sleep in them alone.</p>
              <p>There are houses also of a much larger size, not built either for the accommodation of a single Chief, or a single family; but as common receptacles for all the people of a district. Some of them are two hundred feet long, thirty broad, and, under the ridge, twenty feet high; these are built and maintained at the common expence of the district, for the accommodation of which they are intended; and have on one side of them a large area, inclosed with low pallisadoes.</p>
              <p>These houses, like those of separate families, have no walls. Privacy, indeed, is little wanted among people who have not even the idea of indecency, and who gratify every appetite and passion before witnesses, with no more sense of impropriety than we feel when we satisfy our hunger at a social board with our family or friends. Those who have no idea of indecency with respect to actions, can have none with respect to words; it is, therefore, scarcely necessary to observe, that, in the conversation of these people, that which is the principal source of their pleasure, is always the principal topic and that every thing is mentioned without any restraint or emotion, and in the most direct terms, by both sexes.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n58" n="46"/>
              <p>Of the food eaten here the greater part is vegetable. Here are no tame animals except hogs, dogs, and poultry, as I have observed before, and these are by no means plenty. When a Chief kills a hog, it is almost equally divided among his dependants; and as they are very numerous, the share of each individual at these feasts, which are not frequent, must necessarily be small. Dogs and fowls fall somewhat more frequently to the share of the common people. I cannot much commend the flavour of their fowls; but we all agreed, that a South-Sea dog was little inferior to an English lamb; their excellence is probably owing to their being kept up, and fed wholly upon vegetables. The sea affords them a great variety of fish. The smaller fish, when they catch any, are generally eaten raw, as we eat oysters; and nothing that the sea produces comes amiss to them: they are fond of lobsters, crabs, and other shell fish, which are found upon the coast; and they will eat not only sea-insects, but what the seamen call Blubbers, tho' some of them are so tough, that they are obliged to suffer them to become putrid before they can be chewed. Of the many vegetables that have been mentioned already as serving them for food, the principal is the bread-fruit, to procure which costs them no trouble or labour but climbing a tree: the tree which produces it, does not indeed shoot up spontaneously; but if a man plants ten of them in his life-time, which he may do in about an hour, he will as completely fulfil his duty to his own and future generations, as the native of our less temperate climate can do by ploughing in the cold of winter, and reaping in the summer's heat, as often as these seasons return; even if, after he has procured bread for his present household, he should convert a surplus into money, and lay it up for his children.</p>
              <p>It is true, indeed, that the bread-fruit is not always in season; but cocoa-nuts, bananas, plantains, and a great variety of other fruits, supply the deficiency.</p>
              <p>It may well be supposed that cookery is but little studied by these people as an art; and, indeed, they have but two ways of applying fire to dress their food, broiling and baking; the operation of broiling is so simple that it requires no description, and their baking
<pb xml:id="n59" n="47"/>
has been described already, (page 10), in the account of an entertainment prepared for us by Tupia. Hogs, and large fish, are extremely well dressed in the same manner; and, in our opinion, were more juicy and more equally done than by any art of cookery now practised in Europe. Bread-fruit is also cooked in an oven of the same kind, which renders it soft, and something like a boiled potatoe: not quite so farinaceous as a good one, but more so than those of the middling fort.</p>
              <p>Of the bread-fruit they also make three dishes, by putting either water or the milk of the cocoa-nut to it, then beating it to a paste with a stone pestle, and afterwards mixing it with ripe plantains, bananas, or the four paste which they call Mahie.</p>
              <p>The mahie, which has been mentioned as a succedaneum for ripe bread-fruit, before the season for gathering a fresh crop comes on, is thus made:—The fruit is gathered just before it is perfectly ripe, and being laid in heaps, is closely covered with leaves; in this state it undergoes a fermentation, and becomes disagreeably sweet: the core is then taken out entire, which is done by gently pulling the stalk, and the rest of the fruit is thrown into a hole which is dug for that purpose, generally in the houses, and neatly lined in the bottom and sides with grass; the whole is then covered with leaves, and heavy stones laid upon them: in this state it undergoes a second fermentation, and becomes four, after which it will suffer no change for many months: it is taken out of the hole as it is wanted for use, and being made into balls, it is wrapped up in leaves and baked; after it is dressed, it will keep five or six weeks. It is eaten both cold and hot, and the natives seldom make a meal without it, tho' to us the taste was as disagrecable as that of a pickled olive generally is the first time it is eaten.</p>
              <p>As the making of this mahie depends, like brewing, upon fermentation, so, like brewing, it sometimes sails, without their being able to ascertain the cause; it is very natural, therefore, that the making it should be connected with superstitious notions and ceremonies. It generally falls to the lot of the old women, who will suffer no creature to touch any thing belonging to it,
<pb xml:id="n60" n="48"/>
but those whom they employ as assistants, nor even to go into that part of the house where the operation is carrying on. Mr. Banks happened to spoil a large quantity of it only by inadvertently touching a leas which lay upon it. The old woman, who then presided over these mysteries, told him, that the procese would sail; and immediately uncovered the hole in a fit of vexation and despair. Mr. Banks regretted the mischief he had done, but was somewhat consoled by the opportunity which it gave him of examining the preparation, which perhaps, but for such an accident, would never have offered.</p>
              <p>Such is their food, to which salt-water is the universal sauce, no meal being eaten without it: those who live near the sea have it fetched as it is wanted; those who hive at some distance keep it in large bamboos, which are set up in their houses, for use. Salt-water, however, is not their only sauce; they make another of the kernels of cocoa-nuts, which being fermented till they dissolve into a paste somewhat resembling butter, are beaten up with salt-water. The flavour of this is very strong, and was, when we first tasted it, exceedingly nauseous; a little use, however, reconciled some of us to it so much, that they preferred it to our own sauces, especially with fish. The natives seemed to considen it as a dainty, and do not use it at their common meals; possibly, because they think it ill management to use cocoa-nuts so lavishly, or perhaps, when we were at the island, they were scarcely ripe enough for the purpose.</p>
              <p>For drink, they have in general nothing but water, or the juice of the cocoa-nut; the art of producing liquors that intoxicate, by fermentation, being happily unknown among them; neither have they any narcotic which they chew, as the natives of some other countries do opium, beetle-root, and tobacco. Some of them drank freely of our liquors, and in a few instances became very drunk; but the persons to whom this happened were so far from desiring to repeat the debauch, that they would never touch any of our liquors afterwards. We were however informed, that they became drunk by drinking a juice that is expressed from the leaves of a plant which they call Ava Ava. This
<pb xml:id="n61" n="49"/>
plant was not in season when we were there, so that we saw no instances of its effects; and as they confidered drunkenness as a disgrace, they probably would have concealed from us any instances which might have happened during our stay. This vice is almost peculiar to the Chiefs, and considerable ersons, who vie with each other in drinking the greatest number of draughts, each draught being about a pint. They keep this intoxicating juice with great care from their women.</p>
              <p>Table they have none; but their apparatus for eating is set out with great neatness, though the articles are too simple and too few to allow any thing for show, and they commonly eat alone; but when a stranger happens to visit them, he sometimes makes a second in their mess. Of the meal of one of their principal people I shall give a particular description.</p>
              <p>He sits down under the shade of the next tree, or on the shady side of his house, and a large quantity of leaves, either of the bread-fruit on banana, are neatly spread before him upon the ground, as a table-cloth; a basket is then set by him that contains his provision, which, if fish or flesh, is ready dressed, and wrapped up in leaves, and two cocoa-nut shells, one full of salt and water, and the other of fresh: his attendants, which are not few, seat themselves round him, and when all is ready, he begins by washing his hands and his mouth thoroughly with the fresh water, and this he repeats almost continually throughout the whole meal; he then takes part of his provision out of the basket, which generally consists of a small fish or two, two or three bread-fruits, fourteen or fifteen ripe bananas, or six or seven apples: he first takes half a bread-fruit, peels off the rind, and takes out the core with his nails; of this he puts as much into his mouth as it can hold, and, while he chews it, takes the fish out of the leaves, and breaks one of them into the salt water, placing the other, and what remains of the bread-fruit, upon the leaves that have been spread before him. When this is done, he takes up a small piece of the fish that has been broken into the salt water, with all the fingers of one hand, and sucks it into his mouth, so as to get with it as much of the salt water
<pb xml:id="n62" n="50"/>
as possible: in the same manner he takes the rest by different morsels, and between each, at least very frequently, takes a small sup of the salt water, either out of the cocoa-nut shell, or the palm of his hand; in the mean time one of his attendants has prepared a young cocoa-nut, by peeling off the outer rind with his teeth, an operation which to an European appears very surprising; but it depends so much upon slight, that many of us were able to do it before we left the island, and some that could scarcely crack a filbert: the master, when he chooses to drink, takes the cocoa-nut, thus prepared, and boring a hole through the shell with his finger, or breaking it with a stone, he sucks out the liquor. When he has eaten his bread-fruit and fish, he begins with his plantains, one of which makes but a mouthful, though it be as big as a black pudding; if, instead of plantains he has apples, he never tastes them till they have been pared; to do this, a shell is picked up from the ground, where they are always in plenty, and tossed to him by an attendant; he immediately begins to cut or scrape off the rind, but so aukwardly, that great part of the fruit is wasted. If, instead of fish, he has flesh, he must have some succedaneum for a knife to divide it; and for this purpose a piece of bamboo is tossed to him, of which he makes the necessary implement, by splitting it transversely with his nail. While all this has been doing, some of his attendants have been employed in beating bread-fruit with a stone pestle upon a block of wood; by being beaten in this manner, and sprinkled from time to time with water, it is reduced to the consistence of a soft paste, and is then put into a vessel somewhat like a butcher's tray, and either made up alone, or mixed with banana or mahie, according to the taste of the master, by pouring water upon it by degrees, and squeezing it often through the hand; under this operation it acquires the consistence of a thick custard, and a large cocoa-nut shell full of it being set before him, he sips it as we should do a jelly, if we had no spoon to take it from the glass: the meal is then finished, by again wasning his hands and his mouth. After which the cocoa-nut
<pb xml:id="n63" n="51"/>
shells are cleaned, and every thing that is left is replacced in the basket.</p>
              <p>The quantity of food which these people eat at a meal is prodigious; I have seen one man devour two or three fishes as big as a perch; three bread-fruits, each bigger than two fists; fourteen or fifteen plantains, or bananas, each of them six or seven inches long, and four or five round; and near a quart of the pounded bread-fruit, which is as substantial as the thickest unbaked custard. This is so extraordinary that I scarcely expect to be believed; and I would not have related it upon my own single testimony, but Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and most of the other gentlemen, have had ocular demonstration of its truth, and know that I mention them upon the occasion.</p>
              <p>It is very wonderful that these people, who are remarkably fond of society, and particularly that of their women, should exclude its pleasures from the table, where, among al other nations, whether civil or savage, they have been principally enjoyed. How a meal, which every where else brings families and friends together, came to separate them here, we often enquired, but could never learn. They eat alone, they said, because it was right; but why it was right to eat alone, they never attempted to tell us; such, however, was the force of habit, that they expressed the strongest dislike, and even disgust, at our eating in society, especially with our women, and of the same victuals. At first, we thought this strange singularity arose from some superstitious opinion; but they constantly affirmed the contrary. We observed also some caprices in the custom, for which we could as little account as for the custom itself. We could never prevail with any of the women to partake of the victuals at our table, when we were dining in company; yet they would go, five or six together, into the servants apartments, and there eat very heartily of whatever they could find, of which I have before given a particular instance; nor were they in the least disconcerted if we came in while they were doing it. When any of us have been alone with a woman, she has sometimes eaten in our company; but then she has expressed the greatest unwillingness that it sould be
<pb xml:id="n64" n="52"/>
known, and always extorted the strongest promises of secrecy.</p>
              <p>Among themselves, even two brothers and two sisters have each their separate baskets, with provision and the apparatus of their meal. When they first visited us at our tents, each brought his basket with him; and when we sat down to table, they would go out, sit down upon the ground, at two or three yards distance from each other, and, turning their faces different ways, take their repast without interchanging a single word.</p>
              <p>The women not only abstain from eating with the men, and of the same victuals, but even have their victuals separately prepared by boys kept for that purpose, who deposit it in a separate shed, and attend them with it at their meals.</p>
              <p>But though they would not eat with us or with each other, they have often asked us to eat with them, when we have visited those with whom we were particularly acquainted at their houses; and we have often, upon such occasions, eaten out of the same basket, and drunk out of the same cup. The elder women, however, always appeared to be offended at this liberty; and if we happened to touch their victuals, or even the basket that contained it, would throw it away.</p>
              <p>After meals, and in the heat of the day, the middleaged people of the better sort generally sleep; they are indeed extremely indolent, and sleeping and eating is almost all that they do. Those that are older are less drowsy, and the boys and girls are kept awake by the natural activity and sprightliness of their age.</p>
              <p>Their amusements have occasionally been mentioned, in my account of the incidents that happened during our residence in this island, particularly music, dancing, wrestling, and shooting with the bow; they also sometimes vie with each other in throwing a lance. As shooting is not at a mark, but for a distance, throwing the lance is not for distance, but at a mark; the weapon is about nine feet long, the mark is the bole of a plantain, and the distance about twenty yards.</p>
              <p>Their only musical instruments are flutes and drums; the flutes are made of a hollow bamboo, about a foot long, and, as has been observed before, have only two
<pb xml:id="n65" n="53"/>
stops, and consequently but four notes, out of which they seem hitherto to have formed but one tune; to these stops they apply the fore finger of the lest hand, and the middle finger of the right.</p>
              <p>The drum is made of a hollow block of wood, of a cylindrical form, solid at one end, and covered at the other with shark's skin; these they beat, not with sticks, but their hands, and they know how to tune two drums of different notes into concord. They have also an expedient to bring the flutes that play together into unison, which is to roll up a leaf so as to slip over the end of the shortest, like our sliding tubes for telescopes, which they move up or down till the purpose is answered, of which they seem to judge by their ear with great nicety.</p>
              <p>To these instruments they sing; and, as I have observed before, their songs are often extempore: they call every two verses, or couplet a song, Pehay; they are generally, though not always, in thime; and when pronounced by the natives, we could discover that they were metre. Mr. Banks took great pains to write down some of them, which were made upon our arrival, as nearly as he could express their sounds by combinations of our letters; but when we read them, not having their accent, we could scarcely make them either metre or rhime. The reader will easily perceive that they are of very different structure.</p>
              <q>
                <lg type="verse" rend="center">
                  <l>Tede pahai de parow-a</l>
                  <l>Ha maru no mina.</l>
                </lg>
                <lg type="verse" rend="center">
                  <l>E pahah Tayo malama tai ya</l>
                  <l>No Tabane lonatou whannomi ya.</l>
                </lg>
                <lg type="verse" rend="center">
                  <l>E Turai eattu terara patee whennua toai</l>
                  <l>Ino o maio Pretane to wheunuaia no Tute.</l>
                </lg>
              </q>
              <p>Of these verses our knowledge of the language is too imperfect to attempt a translation. They frequently amuse themselves by singing such couplets as these when they are alone, or with their families, especially after it is dark; for though they need no fires, they are not without the comfort of artificial light between
<pb xml:id="n66" n="54"/>
sunset and bed-time. Their candles are made of the kernels of an oily nut, which they stick over one another upon a skewer, that is thrust through the middle of them; the upper one being lighted burns down to the second, at the same time consuming that part of the skewer which goes through it; the second taking fire burns in the same manner down to the third, and so of the rest: some of these candles will burn a considerable time, and they give a very tolerable light. They do not often sit up above an hour after it is dark; but when they have strangers who sleep in the house, they generally keep a light burning all night, possibly as a check upon such of the women as they wish not to honour them with their favours.</p>
              <p>Of their itinerary concerts, I need add nothing to what has been already said; especially as I shall have occasion, more particularly, to mention them, when I relate our adventures upon another island.</p>
              <p>In other countries, the girls and unmarried women are supposed to be wholly ignorant of what others, upon some occasions, may appear to know; and their conduct and conversation are consequently restrained within narrower bounds, and kept at a more remote distance from whatever relates to a connection with the other sex; but here it is just the contrary. Among other diversions, there is a dance called Timorodee, which is performed by young girls, whenever eight or ten of them can be collected together, consisting of motions and gestures beyond imagination wanton, in the practice of which they are brought up from their earliest childhood, accompanied by words, which, if it were possible, would more explicitly convey the same ideas. In these dances, they keep time with an exactness which is scarely excelled by the best performers upon the stages of Europe. But the practice which is allowed to the virgin, is prohibited to the woman from the moment that she has put these hopeful lessons in practice, and realized the symbols of the dance.</p>
              <p>It cannot be supposed that, among these people, chastity is held in much estimation; It might be exected that sisters and daughters would be offered to strangers, either as a courtesy, or for reward; and that breaches of conjugal fidelity, even in the wife,
<pb xml:id="n67" n="55"/>
should not be otherwise punished than by a few hard words, or perhaps a slight beating, as indeed is the case: but there is a scale in dissolute sensuality, which these people have ascended, wholly unknown to every other nation, whose manners have been recorded from the beginning of the world to the present hour, and which no imagination could possibly conceive.</p>
              <p>A very considerable number of the principal people of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, of both sexes, have formed themselves into a society, in which every woman is common to every man: thus securing a perpetual variety, as often as their inclination prompts them to seek it, which is so frequent, that the same man and woman seldom cohabit together more than two or three days.</p>
              <p>These societies are distinguished by the name of Arreoy; and the members have meetings, at which no other is present, where the men amuse themselves by wrestling, and the women, not with standing their occasional connection with different men, dance the Timorodee in all its latitude, as an incitement to desires, which, it is said, are frequently gratified upon the spot. This, however, is comparatively nothing, If any of the women happen to be with child, which in this manner of life happens less frequently than if they were to cohabit only with one man, the poor infant is smothered the moment it is born, that it may be no incumbrance to the father, nor interrupt the mother in the pleasures of her diabolical prostitution. It. sometimes indeed happens, that the passion which prompts a woman to enter into this society, is surmounted when she becomes a mother, by that instinctive affection which Nature has given to all creatures for the preservation of their offspring; but even in this cafe, she is not permitted to spare the life of her infant, except she can find a man who will patronise it as his child; if this can be done, the murder is preented; but both the man and woman, being deemed by this act to have appropriated each other, are ejected from the community, and forfeit all claim to the privileges and pleasures of Arreoy for the future; the woman from that time being distinguished by the term Whannownow, “bearer of children,” which is here a term of reproach; though none can be more
<pb xml:id="n68" n="56"/>
honourable in the estimation of wisdom and humanity, of right reason, and every passion that distinguishes the man from the brute.</p>
              <p>It is not fit that a practice so horrid and so strange should be imputed to human beings upon slight evidence, but I have such as abundantly justifies me in the account I have given. The people themselves are so far from concealing their connection with such a society as a disgrace, mat they boast of it as a privilege; and both myself and Mr. Banks, when particular persons have been pointed out to us as members of the Arreoy, have questioned them about it, and received the account that has been here given from their own lips. They have acknowledged, that they had long been of this accursed society, that they belonged to it at that time, and that several of their children had been put to death.</p>
              <p>But I must not conclude my account of the domestic life of these people, without mentioning their personal cleanliness. If that which lessens the good of life, and increases the evil, is vice, surely cleanliness is a virtue; the want of it tends to destroy both beauty and health, and mingles disgust with our best pleasures. The natives of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, both men and women, constantly wash their whole bodies in running water three times every day; once as soon as they rise in the morning, once at noon, and again before they sleep at night, whether the sea or river is near them or at a distance. I have already observed, that they wash not only the mouth, but the hands at their meals, almost between every morsel; and their clothes, as well as their persons, are kept without spot or stain; so that in a large company of these people, nothing is suffered but heat, which perhaps is more than can be said of the politest assembly in Europe.</p>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n69" n="57"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d5" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. V</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p>
                  <hi rend="i">Of the Manufacturers, Boats, and Navigation of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>.</hi>
                </p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">If</hi> necessity is the mother of invention, it cannot be supposed to have been much exerted where the liberality of Nature has rendered the diligence of Art almost superfluous; yet there are many instances both of ingenuity and labour among these people, which, considering the want of metal for tools, do honour to both.</p>
              <p>Their principal manufacture is their cloth, in the making and dying of which, I think, there are some particulars which may instruct even the artificers of Great Britain, and for that reason my description will be more minute.</p>
              <p>Their cloth is of three kinds, and it is made of the bark of three different trees, the Chinese paper mulberry, the bread-fruit tree, and the tree which resembles the wild fig-tree of the West Indies.</p>
              <p>The finest and whitest is made of the paper mulberry, Aouta; this is worn chiefly by the principal people, and when it is dyed red takes a better colour. A second sort, inferior in whiteness and softness, is made of the bread-fruit tree, Ooroo, and worn chiefly by the inferior people; and a third of the tree that resembles the fig, which is coarse and harsh, and of the colour of the darkest brown paper: this, though it is less pleasing both to the eye and the touch, is the most valuable, because it resists water, which the other two sorts will not. Of this, which is the most rare as well as the most useful, the greater part is perfumed, and worn by the Chiefs as a morning dress.</p>
              <p>All these trees are propagated with great care, particularly the mulberry, which covers the largest part of the cultivated land, and is not fit for use after two or three years growth, when it is about six or eight feet high, and somewhat thicker than a man's thumb; its excellence is to be thin, straight, tall, and without branches; the lower leaves, therefore are carefully
<pb xml:id="n70" n="58"/>
plucked off, with their germs, as often as there is any appearance of their producing a branch.</p>
              <p>But though the cloth made of these three trees is different, it is all manufactured in the same manner; I shall therefore describe the process only in the fine sort, that is made of the mulberry. When the trees are of a proper size, they are drawn up, and stripped of their branches, after which the roots and tops are cut off; the bark of these rods being then slit up longitudinally, is easily drawn off, and, when a proper quantity has been procured, it is carried down to some running water, in which it is deposited to soak, and secured from floating away by heavy stones; when it is supposed to be sufficiently softened, the women servants go down to the brook, and stripping themselves fit down in the water, to separate the inner bark from the green part on the outside; to do this, they place the under side upon a flat smooth board, and with the shell which our dealers call Tyger's Tongue, Tellina gargadia, scrape it very carefully, dipping it continually in the water, till nothing remains but the fine fibres, of the inner coat. Being thus prepared in the afternoon, they are spread out upon plantain leaves in the evening; and in this part of the work there appears to be some difficulty, as the mistress of the family always superintends the doing of it; they are placed in lengths of about eleven or twelve yards, one by the side of another, till they are about a foot broad, and two or three layers are also laid one upon the other; care is taken that the cloth shall be in all parts of art equal thickness, so that if the bark happens to be thinner in any one particular part of one layer than the rest, a piece that is somewhat thicker is picked out to be laid over it in the next. In this dare it remains till the morning, when great part of the water, which it contained when it was laid out, is either drained off or evaporated, and the several fibres adhere together, so as that the whole may be raised from the ground in one piece.</p>
              <p>It is then, taken away, and laid upon the smooth side of a long piece of wood, prepared for the purpose and beaten by the women servants, with instrument
<pb xml:id="n71" n="59"/>
ments about a foot long and three inches thick, made of a hard wood which they call Etoa. The shape of this instrument is not unlike a square razor strap, only that the handle is longer, and each of its four sides or faces is marked, lengthways, with small grooves, or furrows, of different degrees of fineness; those on one side being of a width and depth sufficient to receive a small packthread, and the others finer, in a regular gradation, so that the last are not more than equal to sewing silk.</p>
              <p>They beat it first with the coarsest side of this mallet, keeping time like our smiths; it spreads very fast under the strokes, chiefly, however, in the breadth, and the grooves in the mallet mark it with the appearance of threads; it is successively beaten with the other sides, last with the finest, and is then fit for use, Sometimes, however, it is made still thinner, by beating it with the finest side of the mallet, after it has been several times doubled it is then called Hoboo, and is almost as thin as a muslin; it becomes very white by being bleached in the air, but is made stil whiter and softer by being washed, and beaten again after it has been worn.</p>
              <p>Of this cloth there are several sorts, of different degrees of fineness, in proportion as it is more or less beaten without being doubled; the other cloth also differs in proportion as it is beaten; but they differ from each other in consequence of the different materials of which they are made. The bark of the bread-fruit is not taken till the trees are considerably longer and thicker than those of the fig; the process after-wards is the same.</p>
              <p>When cloth is to be washed after it has been worn, it is taken down to the brook, and lest to soak, being kept fast to the bottom, as at first, by a stone; it is then gently wrung, or squeezed, and sometimes several pieces of it are laid one upon another, and beaten together with the coarsest side of the mallet, and they are then equal in thickness to broad-cloth, and much more soft and agreeable to the touch, after they have been a little while in use, though when they come immediately from the mallet, they feel as if they had been starched. This cloth sometimes breaks in the
<pb xml:id="n72" n="60"/>
beating, but it is easily repaired by pasting on a patch with a gluten, that is prepared from the root of the Pea, which is done so nicely, that it cannot be discovered. The women also employ themselves in removing blemishes of every kind, as our ladies do in needlework or knotting; sometimes, when their work is intended to be very fine, they will paste an entire covering of hoboo over the whole. The principal excellencies of this cloth are its coolness and softness; and its imperfections, its being pervious to water, like paper, and almost as easily torn.</p>
              <p>The colours with which they dye this cloth are principally red and yellow. The red is exceedingly beautiful, and, I may venture to say, a brighter and more delicate colour than any we have in Europe; that which approaches nearest is our full scarlet, and the best imitation which Mr. Banks's natural-history painter could produce, was by a mixture of vermilion and carmine. The yellow is also a bright colour, but we have many as good.</p>
              <p>The red colour is produced by the mixture of the juices of two vegetables, neither of which separately has the least tendency to that hue. One is a species of fig, called here Matte, and the other the Cordia Sebestina, or Etou; of the fig the fruit is used, and of the Cordia the leaves.</p>
              <p>The fruit of the fig is about as big as a rounceval pea, of very small gooseberry; and each of them, upon breaking off the stalk very close, produces one drop of a milky liquor, resembling the juice of our figs, of which the tree is indeed a species. This liquor the women collect into a small quantity of cocoanut water: to prepare a gill of cocoa-nut water, will require between three and four quarts of these little figs. When a sufficient quantity is prepared, the leaves of the Etou are well wetted in it, and then laid upon a plantain leaf, where they are turned about till they become more and more flaccid, and then they are gently squeezed, gradually increasing the pressure, but so as not to break them; as the flaccidity increases; and they become spongy, they are supplied with more of the liquor; in about five minutes the colour begins to appear upon the veins of the leaves, and in about
<pb xml:id="n73" n="61"/>
ten, or a little more, they are perfectly saturated with it; they are then squeezed with as much force as can be applied, and the liquor strained at the same time that it is expressed.</p>
              <p>For this purpose the boys prepare a large quantity of the Moo, by drawing it between their teeth, or two little sticks, till it is freed from the green bark and the branny substance that lies under it, and a thin web of the fibres only remains; in this the leaves of the Etou are inveloped, and through these the juice which they contain is strained, as it is forced out. As the leaves are not succulent, little more juice is pressed out of them than they have imbibed: when they have been once emptied, they are filled again, and again pressed, till the quality which tinctures the liquor as it passes through them is exhausted; they are then thrown away; but the Moo, being deeply stained with the liquor is preserved, as a brush to lay the dye upon the cloth.</p>
              <p>The expressed liquor is always received into small cups made of the plantain leaf, whether from a notion that it has any quality favourable to the colour, or from the facility with which it is procured, and the convenience of small vessele to distribute it among the artificers, I do not know.</p>
              <p>Of the thin cloth they seldom dye more than the edges, but the thick, cloth is coloured through the whole surface; the liquor is indeed used rather as a pigment than a dye, for a coat of it is laid upon one side only, with the fibres of the Moo; and though I have seen of the thin cloth that has appeared to have been soaked in the liquor, the colour has not had the same richness and lustre as when it has been applied in the other manner.</p>
              <p>Though the leaf of the Etou is generally used in this process, and probably produces the finest colour, yet the juice of the figs will produce a red, by a mixture with the species of Tournesortia, which they call Taheinoo, the Pohuc, the Eurhe, or Convolvulus Brasiliensis, and a species of Solanum, called Ebooa; from the use of these different plants, or from different proportions of the materials, many varieties are observabe in
<pb xml:id="n74" n="62"/>
the colours of their cloth, some of which are conspicuously superior to others.</p>
              <p>The beauty, however, of the best is nor permanent, but it is probable that some method might be found to fix it, if proper experiments were made, and perhaps to search for latent qualities, which might be brought out by the mixture of one vegetable juice with another, would not be an unprofitable employment; our present most valuable dyes afford sufficient encouragement to the attempt; for by the mere inspection of indico, woad, dyer's weed, and most of the leaves which are used for the like purposes, the colours which they yield could never be discovered. Of this Indian red I shall only add, that the women who have been employed in preparing or using it, carefully preserve the colour upon their fingers and nails, where it appears in its utmost beauty, as a great ornament.</p>
              <p>The yellow is made of the bark of the root of the Morinda citrifolia, called Nono, by scraping and insusing it in water; after standing some time, the water is strained and used as a dye, the cloth being dipped into it. The Morinda, of which this is a species, seems to be a good subject for examination with a view to dyeing. Brown, in his History of Jamaica, mentions three species of it, which, he says, are used to dye brown; and Rumphius says of the Bancuda Augustifolia, which is nearly allied to our Nono, that it is used by the inhabitants of the East-India islands as a fixing drug for red colours, with which it particularly agrees.</p>
              <p>The inhabitants of this island also dye yellow with the fruit of the Tamanu; but how the colour is, extracted, we had no opportunity to discover. They have also a preparation with which they dye brown and black; but these colours are so indifferent, that the method of preparing them did not excite our curiosity.</p>
              <p>Another considerable manufacture is matting of various kinds, some of which is finer, and better in every respect than any we have in Europe; the coarser sort serves them to sleep upon, and the finer to wear in wet weather. With the fine, of which there are also two sorts, much pains is taken, especially with that
<pb xml:id="n75" n="63"/>
made of the bark of the Poerou, the Hibiscus tiliaceus of Linnaeus, some of which is as fine as a coarse cloth; the other sort, which is still more beautiful, they call Vanne; it is white, glossy, and shining, and is made of the leaves of their Wharrou, a species of the Pandanus, of which we had no opportunity to see either the flowers or fruit: they have other matts, or, as they call them, Moeas, to sit or to sleep upon, which are formed of a great variety of rushes and grass, and which they make, as they do every thing else that is plaited, with amazing facility and dispatch.</p>
              <p>They are also very dextrous in making basket and wicker-work; their baskets are of a thousand different patterns, many of them exceedingly neat; and the making them is an art that every one practises, both men and women: they make occasional baskets and panniers of the cocoa-nut leaf in a few minutes, and the women who visited us early in a morning, used to send, as soon as the sun was high, for a few of the leaves, of which they made little bonnets to shade their faces, at so small an expence of time and trouble, that when the sun was again low in the evening, they used to throw them away. These bonnets, however, did not cover the head, but consisted only of a band that went round it, and a shade that projected from the forehead.</p>
              <p>Of the bark of the Poerou they make ropes and lines from the thickness of an inch to the size of a small packthread; with these they make nets for fishing; of the fibres of the cocoa-nut they make thread, for fastening together the several parts of their canoes and belts, either round or flat, twisted or plaited; and of the bark of the Erowa, a kind of nettle which grows in the mountains, and is therefore rather scarce, they make the best fishing-lines in the world; with these they hold the strongest and most active fish, such as bonetas and albicores, which would snap our strongest silk lines in a minute, tho' they are twice as thick.</p>
              <p>They make also a kind of seine, of a coarse broad grass, the blades of which are like flags; these they twist and tie together in a loose manner, till the net, which is about as wide as a large sack, is from sixty to
<pb xml:id="n76" n="64"/>
eighty fathom long; this they haul in shoal smooth water, and its own weight keeps it so close to the ground that scarcely a single fish can escape.</p>
              <p>In every expedient, indeed, for taking fish, they are exceedingly ingenious; they make harpoons of cane, and point them with hard wood, which in their hands strike fish more effectually, than those which are headed with iron can do in ours, setting aside the advantage of ours being fastened to a line, so that the fish is secured if the hook takes place, tho' it does not mortally wound him.</p>
              <p>Of fish-hooks they have two sorts, admirably adapted in their construction, as well to the purpose they are to answer, as to the materials of which they are made. One of these, which they call Wittee Wittee, is used for towing. The shank is made of mother-of-pearl, the most glossy that can be got; the inside, which is naturally the brightest, is put behind. To these hooks a tuft of white dogs or hogs hair is fixed, so as somewhat to resemble the tail of a fish; these implements, therefore, are both hook and bait, and are used with a rod of bamboo, and line of Erowa. The fisher, to secure his success, watches the flight of the birds, which constantly attend the bonetas when they swim in shoals, by which he directs, his canoe, and when he has the advantage of these guides, he seldom returns without a prize.</p>
              <p>The other kind of hook is also made of mother-of-pearl, or some other hard shell; they cannot make them bearded, like our hooks, but, to effect the same purpose, they make the point turn inwards. These are made of all sizes, and used to catch various kinds of fish with great success. The manner of making them is very simple, and every fisherman is his own artificer; the shell is first cut into square pieces, by the edge of another shell, and wrought into a form, corresponding with the outline of the hook by pieces of coral, which are sufficiently rough to perform the office of a file; a hole is then bored in the middle, the drill being no other than the first stone they pick up that has a sharp corner; this they fix into the end of a piece of bamboo, and turn it between the hands
<pb xml:id="n77" n="65"/>
like a chocolate-mill; when the shell is perforated, and the whole sufficiently wide, a small file of coral is introduced, by the application of which the hook is in a short time completed, few costing the artificer more time than a quarter of an hour.</p>
              <p>Of their masonry, carving, and architecture, the reader has already formed some idea, from the account that has been given of the Morais, or repositories of the dead: the other most important article of building and carving is their boats; and, perhaps, to fabricate one of their principal vessels with their tools, is as great a work as to build a British man of war with ours.</p>
              <p>They have an adze of stone; a chissel or gouge of bone, generally that of a man's arm, between the wrist and elbow; a rasp of coral; and the skin of a sting-ray, with coral sand, as a file or polisher.</p>
              <p>This is a complete catalogue of their tools, and with these they build houses, construct canoes, hew stone, and sell, cleave, carve, and polish timber.</p>
              <p>The stone which makes the blade of their adzes is a kind of Basaltes, of a blackish or grey colour, not very hard, but of considerable toughness; they are formed of different sizes, some, that are intended for selling, weigh from six to eight pounds; others, that are used for carving, not more than so many ounces; but it is necessary to sharpen both almost every minute, for which purpose a stone and a cocoa-nut shell full of water are always at hand.</p>
              <p>Their greatest exploit, to which these tools are less equal than to any other, is felling a tree; this requires many hands, and the constant labour of several days. When it is down, they split it, with the grain, into planks from three to four inches thick, the whole length and breadth of the tree, many of which are eight feet in the girt, and forty to the branches, and nearly of the same thickness throughout. The tree generally used is in their language called Avie, the stem of which is tall and straight; though some of the smaller boats are made of the bread-fruit tree, which is a light spongy wood, and easily wrought. They smooth the plank very expeditiously and dexterously with their adzes, and can take off a thin coat from a
<pb xml:id="n78" n="66"/>
whole plank without missing a stroke. As they have not the art of warping a plank, every part of the canoe, whether hollow or flat, is shaped by hand.</p>
              <p>The canoes, or boats, which are used by the inhabitants of this and the neighbouring islands, may be divided into two general classes, one of which they call Ivahahs, the other Pahies.</p>
              <p>The Ivahah is used for short excursions to sea, and is wall-sided and flat-bottomed; the Pahie for longer voyages, and is bow-sided and sharp-bottomed. The Ivahahs are all of the same figure, but of different sizes, and used for different purposes; their length is from seventy-two feet to ten, but the breadth is by no means in proportion, for those of ten feet are about a foot wide, and those of more than seventy are scarcely two. There is the fighting Ivahah, the fishing Ivahah, and the travelling Ivahah; for some of these go from one island to another. The fighting Ivahah is by far the longest, and the head and stern are considerably raised above the body, in a semicircular form, particularly the stern, which is sometimes seventeen or eighteen feet high, though the boat itself is scarcely three. These never go to sea single, but are fastened together, side by side, at the distance of about three feet, by strong poles of wood, which are laid across them and lasted to the gunwales. Upon these, in the fore-part, a stage or platform is raised, about ten or twelve feet long, and somewhat wider than the boats, which is supported by pillars about six feet high; upon this stage stand the fighting men, whose missile weapons are slings and spears; for, among other singularities in the manners of these people, their bows and arrows are used only for divertion, as we throw quoits: below these stages sit the rowers, who receive from them those that are wounded, and furnish fresh men to ascend in their room. Some of these have a platform of bamboos, or other light wood, through their whole length, and considerably broader, by means of which they will carry a great number of men; but we saw only one fitted in this manner.</p>
              <p>The fishing Ivahahs vary in length from about forty feet to the smallest size, which is about ten; all that are of the length of twenty-five feet and upwards, of
<pb xml:id="n79" n="67"/>
whatever sort, occasionally carry sail. The travelling Ivahah is always double, and furnished with a small neat house about five or six feet broad, and six or seven feet long, which is fastened upon the fore-part for the convenience of the principal people, who sit in them by day, and sleep in them at night. The fishing Ivahahs are sometimes joined together, and have a house on board; but this is not common.</p>
              <p>Those which are shorter than five and twenty feet, seldom or never carry sail; and, though the stern rises about four or five feet, have a flat head, and a board that projects forward about four feet.</p>
              <p>The Pahie is also of different sizes, from sixty to thirty feet long, but, like the Ivahah, is very narrow. One that I measured was fifty-one feet long, and only one foot and a half wide at the top. In the widest part it was about three feet, and this is the general proportion. It does not, however, widen by a gradual swell, but, the sides being straight, and parallel, for a little way below the gunwale, it swells abruptly, and draws to a ridge at the bottom; so that a transverse section of it has somewhat the appearance of the mark upon cards, called a Spade, the whole being much wider in proportion to its length. These, like the largest Ivahahs are used for fighting, but principally for long voyages. The fighting Pahie, which is the largest, is fitted with the stage or platform, which is proportionably larger than those of the Ivahah, as their form enables them to sustain a much greater weight. Those that are used for sailing are generally double; and the middle size are said to be the best sea-boats. They are sometimes out a month together, going from island to island; and sometimes, as we were credibly informed, they are a fortnight or twenty days at sea, and could keep it longer if they had more stowage for provisions, and conveniences to hold fresh water.</p>
              <p>When any of these boats carry sail single, they make use of a log of wood, which is fastened to the end of two poles that lie across the vessel, and project from six to ten feet, according to the size of the vessel, beyond its side, somewhat like what is used by the flying Proa of the Ladrone Islands, and called, in
<pb xml:id="n80" n="68"/>
the Account of Lord Anson's Voyage, an Outrigger. To this outrigger the shrouds are fastened, and it is essentially necessary in trimming the boat when it blows fresh.</p>
              <p>Some of them have one mast, and some two; they are made of a single stick, and when the length of the canoe is thirty feet, that of the mast is somewhat less than five and twenty; it is fixed to a frame that is above the canoe, and receives a sail of matting about one third longer than itself; the sail is pointed at the top, square at the bottom, and curved at the side, somewhat resembling what we call a shoulder of mutton sail, and life for boats belonging to men of war; it is placed in a frame of wood, which surrounds it on every side, and has no contrivance either for reefing or furling; so that, if either should become necessary, it must be cut away, which, however, in these equal climates can seldom happen. At the top of the mast are fastened ornaments of feathers, which are placed inclining obliquely forwards; the shape and position of which will be conceived at once, from the figure in one of the cuts.</p>
              <p>The oars or paddles that are used with these boats, have a long handle and a flat blade, not unlike a baker's peel. Of these every person in the boat has one, except those that sit under the awning; and they push her forward with them at a good rate. These boats, however, admit so much water at the teams, that one person, at least, is continually employed in throwing it out. The only thing in which they excel is landing, and putting off from the shore in a surf; by their great length and high sterns they land dry, when our boats could scarcely land at all; and have the same advantages in putting off, by the height of the head.</p>
              <p>The Ivahahs are the only boats that are used by the inhabitants of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; but we saw several Pahies that came from other islands. Of one of these I shall give the exact dimensions from a careful admeasurement, and then particularly describe the mannar in which they are built.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n81" n="69"/>
              <p>
                <table rows="14" cols="2">
                  <row>
                    <cell/>
                    <cell role="label">Feet</cell>
                    <cell role="label">Inch</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Extreme length from stem to stern, not reckoning the bending up of either</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">51</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">0</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Breadth in the clear of the top forward</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">1</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">2</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Breadth in the midships</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">1</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">6</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Breadth aft</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">1</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">3</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>In the bilge forward</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">2</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">8</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>In the midships</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">2</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">11</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Aft</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">2</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">9</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Depth in the midships</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">3</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">4</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Height from the ground on which he stood</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">3</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">6</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Height of her head from the ground, without the figure</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">4</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">4</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Height of the figure</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">0</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">11</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Height of the stern from the ground</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">8</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">9</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Height of the figure</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">2</cell>
                    <cell rend="right">0</cell>
                  </row>
                </table>
              </p>
              <p>To illustrate my description of the manner in which these vessels are built, it will be necessary to refer to the figure; in which <hi rend="i">aa</hi> is the first seam, <hi rend="i">bb</hi> the second, and <hi rend="i">cc</hi> the third.</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="HawAcco069a">
                  <graphic url="HawAcco069a.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="HawAcco069a-g"/>
                  <figDesc>Black and white cross-section diagram of a canoe showing points where seams occur.</figDesc>
                </figure>
              </p>
              <p>The first stage or keel, under <hi rend="i">a a</hi>, is made of a tree hollowed out like a trough; for which the longest trees are chosen that can be got, so that there are never more than three in the whole length; the next stage under <hi rend="i">b b</hi>, is formed of strait plank, about four feet long, fifteen inches broad, and two inches thick: the third stage, under <hi rend="i">c c</hi>, is, like the bottom, made of trunks, hollowed into its bilging form; the last is also cut out of trunks, so that the moulding is of one piece with the upright. To form these parts separately, without saw, plane, chissel, or any other iron tool, may well be thought no easy task; but the great difficulty is to join them together.</p>
              <p>When all the parts are prepared, the keel is laid upon blocks, and the planks being supported by stanchions, are sewed or clamped together with strong thongs of plaiting, which are passed several times through holes that are bored with a gouge or auger of bone, that has been described already; and the nicety with which this is done, may be inferred from their being sufficiently
<pb xml:id="n82" n="70"/>
water-tight for use without calking. As the plaiting soon rots in the water, it is renewed at least once a year; in order to which, the vessel is taken entirely to pieces. The head and stern are rude with respect to the design; but very neatly finished, and polished to the highest degree.</p>
              <p>These Pahies are kept with great care, in a kind of house built on purpose for their reception; the houses are formed of poles set upright in the ground, the tops of which are drawn towards each other, and fastened together with their strongest cord, so as to form a kind of Gothic arch, which is completely thatched quite to the ground, being open only at the ends; they are sometimes fifty or sixty paces long.</p>
              <p>As connected with the navigation of these people, I shall mention their wonderful sagacity in foretelling the weather, at least the quarter from which the wind shall blow at a future time; they have several ways of doing this, of which, however, I know but one. They say, that the Milky-way is always curved laterally; but sometimes in one direction, and sometimes in another: and that this curvature is the effect of its being already acted upon by the wind, and its hollow part therefore towards it; so that, if the same curvature continues a night, a corresponding wind certainly blows the next day. Of their rules, I shall not pretend to judge; but I know that, by whatever means, they can predict the weather, at least the wind, with much greater certainty than we can.</p>
              <p>In their longer voyages, they steer by the sun in the day, and in the night by the stars; all of which they distinguish separately by names, and know in what part of the heavens they will appear in any of the months during which they are visible in their horizon; they also know the time of their annual appearing and disappearing with more precision than will easily be believed by an European astronomer.</p>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n83" n="71"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d6" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. VI</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">Of the Diviston of Time in <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; Numeration, Computation of Distance, Language, Diseases, Disposal of the Dead, Religion, War, Weapons, and Government with some general Observations for the Use of future Navigators</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">We</hi> were not able to acquire a perfect idea of their method of dividing time; but observed, that in speaking of it, either past or to come, they never used any term but Malama, which signifies Moon. Of these moons they count thirteen, and then begin again; which is a demonstration that they have a notion of the solar year: but how they compute their months so that thirteen of them shall be commensurate with the year, we could not discover; for they say that each month has twenty-nine days, including one in which the moon is not visible. They have names for them separately, and have frequently told us the fruits that would be in the season, and the weather that would prevail, in each of them; and they have indeed a name for them collectively, though they use it only when they speak of the mysteries of their religion.</p>
              <p>Every day is subdivided into twelve parts, each of two hours, of which six belong to the day, and six to the night. At these divisions they guess pretty nearly by the height of the sun while he is above the horizon; but there are few of them who can guess at them, when he is below it, by the stars.</p>
              <p>In numeration they proceed from one to ten, the number of fingers on both hands; and though they have for each number a different name, they generally take hold of their fingers one by one, shifting from one hand to the other till they come to the number they want to express. And in other instances, we observed that, when they were conversing with each other, they joined signs to their words, which were so expressive that a stranger might easily apprehend their meaning.</p>
              <p>In counting from ten they repeat the name of that number, and add the word <hi rend="i">more</hi>; ten, and one more,
<pb xml:id="n84" n="72"/>
is eleven; ten, and two more, twelve; and so of the rest, as we say one and twenty, two and twenty. When they come to ten and ten more, they have a new denomination, as we say a score; and by these scores they count till they get ten of them, when they have a denomination for two hundred; and we never could discover that they had any denomination to express a greater number: neither, indeed, do they seem to want any; for ten of these amount to two thousand, a greater number than they can ever apply.</p>
              <p>In measuring distance they are much more deficient than in computing numbers, having but one term which answers to fathom; when they speak of distances from place to place, they express it, like the Asiatics, by the time that is required to pass it.</p>
              <p>Their language is soft and melodious; it abounds with vowels, and we easily learned to pronounce it: but found it exceedingly difficult to teach them to pronounce a single word of ours; probably not only from its abounding in consonants, but from some peculiarity in its structure; for Spanish and Italian words, if ending in a vowel, they pronounced with great facility.</p>
              <p>Whether it is copious, we were not sufficiently acquainted with it to know; but it is certainly very imperfect, for it is almost totally without inflexion, both of nouns and verbs. Few of the nouns have more than one case, and few of the verbs more than one tense; yet we found no great difficulty in making ourselves mutually understood, however strange it may appear in speculation.</p>
              <p>They have, however, certain <hi rend="i">affixa</hi>, which, though but few in number, are very useful to them, and puzzled us extremely. One asks another, <hi rend="i">Harre hea</hi>? “Where are you going?” the other answers, <hi rend="i">Ivahinera</hi>, “To my wives;” upon which the first repeating the answer interrogatively, “To your wives?” is answered, <hi rend="i">Ivahinereira</hi>; “Yes, I am going to my wives.” Here the suffixa <hi rend="i">era</hi> and <hi rend="i">eira</hi> save several words to both parties.</p>
              <p>I have inserted a few of their words, from which perhaps, some idea may be formed of their language.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n85" n="73"/>
              <p>
                <table rows="46" cols="2">
                  <row>
                    <cell>Pupo, <hi rend="i">the bead</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Eraow, <hi rend="i">a tree</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Ahewh, <hi rend="i">the nose</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Ama, <hi rend="i">a branch</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Roourou, <hi rend="i">the hair</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Tiale, <hi rend="i">a flower</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Outou, <hi rend="i">the mouth</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Huero, <hi rend="i">fruit</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Niheo, <hi rend="i">the teeth</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Eturmmoo, <hi rend="i">the stem</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Arrero, <hi rend="i">the tongue</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Aaa, <hi rend="i">the root</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Meu-eumi, <hi rend="i">the beard</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Eiherre, <hi rend="i">berbaceous plants</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Tiaraboa, <hi rend="i">the threat</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Ooopa, <hi rend="i">a pigeon</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Tuamo, <hi rend="i">the shoulders</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Avigne, <hi rend="i">a paroquet</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Tuah, <hi rend="i">the back</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>A-a, <hi rend="i">another species</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Oama, <hi rend="i">the breast</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mannu, <hi rend="i">a bird</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Eu, <hi rend="i">the nipples</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mora, <hi rend="i">a duck</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Oboo, <hi rend="i">the belly</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mattow, <hi rend="i">a fish-book</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Rema, <hi rend="i">the arm</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Toura, <hi rend="i">a rope</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Oporema, <hi rend="i">the hand</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mow, <hi rend="i">a shark</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Manneo, <hi rend="i">the singers</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mahi-mahi, <hi rend="i">a dolphin</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Mieu, <hi rend="i">the nails</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mattera, <hi rend="i">a fishing-rod</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Touhe, <hi rend="i">the buttocks</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Eupea, <hi rend="i">a net</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Hoouhah, <hi rend="i">the thighs</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mahanna, <hi rend="i">the sun</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Avia, <hi rend="i">the legs</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Malama, <hi rend="i">the moon</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Tapoa, <hi rend="i">the feet</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Whettu, <hi rend="i">a star</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Booa, <hi rend="i">a hog</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Whettu -euphe, <hi rend="i">a comet</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Moa, <hi rend="i">a fowl</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Erai, <hi rend="i">the sky</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Euree, <hi rend="i">a dog</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Eatta, <hi rend="i">a cloud</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Eure-eure, <hi rend="i">iron</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Miti, <hi rend="i">good</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Ooroo, <hi rend="i">bread-fruit</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Eno, <hi rend="i">bad</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Hearee, <hi rend="i">cocoa-nuts</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>A, <hi rend="i">yes</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Mia, <hi rend="i">bananas</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Ima, <hi rend="i">no</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Vaee, <hi rend="i">wild plantains</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Paree, <hi rend="i">ugly</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Poe, <hi rend="i">beads</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Paroree, <hi rend="i">bungry</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Poe matawewwe, <hi rend="i">pearls</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Pia, <hi rend="i">full</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Ahou, <hi rend="i">a garment</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Timahah, <hi rend="i">beavy</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Avee, <hi rend="i">a fruit like apples</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mama, <hi rend="i">light</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Ahee, <hi rend="i">another like chestnuts</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Poto, <hi rend="i">short</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Ewharre, <hi rend="i">a house</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Roa, <hi rend="i">tall</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Whennua, <hi rend="i">a high island</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Nehenne, <hi rend="i">sweet</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Motu, <hi rend="i">a, low island</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Mala-mala, <hi rend="i">bitter</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Toto, <hi rend="i">blood</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Whanno, <hi rend="i">to go far</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Aeve, <hi rend="i">bone</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Harre, <hi rend="i">to go</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Aeo, <hi rend="i">flesh</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Arrea, <hi rend="i">to stay</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Mae, <hi rend="i">fat</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Enoho, <hi rend="i">to remain</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Tuea, <hi rend="i">lean</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Rohe-rohe, <hi rend="i">to be tired</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Huru-huru, <hi rend="i">hair</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Maa, <hi rend="i">to eat</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <pb xml:id="n86" n="74"/>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Inoo, <hi rend="i">to drink</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Worridde, <hi rend="i">to be angry</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Ete, <hi rend="i">to understand</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell>Teparahi, <hi rend="i">to beat</hi>.</cell>
                  </row>
                  <row>
                    <cell>Warrido, <hi rend="i">to steal</hi>.</cell>
                    <cell/>
                  </row>
                </table>
              </p>
              <p>Among people whose food is so simple, and who, in general, are seldom drunk, it is scarcely necessary to say, that there are but few diseases; we saw no critical disease during our stay upon the island, and but few instances of sickness, which were accidental fits of the cholic. The natives, however, are afflicted with the erysipelas, and cutaneous eruptions of the scaly kind, very nearly approaching to a leprosy. Those in whom this distemper was far advanced, lived in a state of seclusion from all society, each in a small house built upon some unfrequented spot, where they were supplied with provisions; but whether they had any hope of relief, or languished out the remainder of their lives in solitude and despair, we could not learn. We obseryed also a few who had ulcers upon different parts of their bodies, some of which had a very virulent appearance; yet they seemed not much to be regarded by those who were afflicted with them, for they were left intirely without application, even to keep off the flies.</p>
              <p>Where intemperance produces no diseases, there will be no physicians by profession; yet where there is sufferance, there will always be attempts to relieve; and where the cause of the mischief and the remedy are alike unknown, these will naturally be directed by superstition: thus it happens, that in this country, and in all others which are not surther injured by luxury, or improved by knowledge, the management of the sick falls to the lot of the priest. The method of cure that is practised by the priests of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, consists chiefly of prayers and ceremonies. When he visits his patient, he repeats certain sentences, which appear to be set forms contrived for the occasion, and at the same time plaits the leaves of the cocoa-nut into different figures very neatly; some of these he fastens to the fingers and toes of the sick, and often leaves behind him a few branches of the <hi rend="i">thespecia populnea</hi>, which they call <hi rend="i">E' midbo</hi>; these ceremonies are repeated till the patient recovers or dies. If he recovers, they say the remedies
<pb xml:id="n87" n="75"/>
cured him; if he dies, they say the disease was incurable; in which, perhaps, they do not much differ from the custom of other countries.</p>
              <p>If we had judged of their skill in surgery from the dreadful scars which we sometimes saw, we should have supposed it to be much superior to the art not only of their physicians, but of ours. We saw one man whose face was almost intirely destroyed: his nose, including the bone, was perfectly flat, and one cheek and one eye were so beaten in, that the hollow would almost receive a man's fist, yet no ulcer remained: and our companion, Tupia, had been pierced quite through his body by a spear, headed with the bone of a sting-ray, the weapon having entered his back, and come out just under his breast; but, except in reducing dislocations and fractures, the best surgeon can contribute very little to the cure of a wound; the blood itself is the best vulnerary balsam, and when the juices of the body are pure, and the patient is temperate, nothing more is necessary, as an aid to Nature, in the cure of the worst wound, than the keeping it clean.</p>
              <p>Their commerce with the inhabitants of Europe has, however, already entailed upon them that dreadful curse which avenged the inhumanities committed by the Spaniards in America, the venereal disease. As it is certain that no European vessel, besides our own, except the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>, and the two that were under the command of Mons. Bougainville, ever visited this island, it must either have been brought by one of them, or by us. That it was brought by the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>, <name key="name-150152" type="person">Captain Wallis</name> has demonstrated, in the account of her voyage, in the first volume, and nothing is more certain, than that when we arrived it had made most dreadful ravages in the island. One of our people contracted it within five days after we went on shore, and by the enquiries among the natives, which this occasioned, we learned, when we came to undcrstand a little of their language, that it had been brought by the vessels which had been there about fifteen months before us, and had lain on the east side of the island. They distinguished it by a name of the same import with <hi rend="i">rottenness</hi>, but of a more
<pb xml:id="n88" n="76"/>
extensive signification, and described, in the most pathetic terms, the sufferings of the first victims to it? rage, and told us, that it caused the hair and the nails to fall off, and the flesh to rot from the bones; that it spread a, universal terror and consternation among them, so that the sick were abandoned by their nearest relations, lest the calamity should spread by contagion, and left to perish alone in such misery as till then had never been known among them. We had some reason, however, to hope that they had found out a specific to cure it. During our stay upon the island we saw none in, whom it had made a great progress; and one who went from us infected, returned after a short time in perfect health; and by this it appeared, either that the disease had cured itself, or that they were not unacquainted with the virtues of simples, nor implicit dupes to the superstitious follies of their priests. We endeavoured to learn the medical qualities which they imputed to their plants, but our knowledge of their language was too imperfect for us to succeed. If we could have learned their specific for the venereal disease, if such they have it would have been of great advantage to us, for when we left the island it had been contracted by more than half the people on board the ship.</p>
              <p>It is impossible but that, in relating incidents, many particulars with respect to the customs, opinions, and works of these people should be anticipated; to avoid repetition, therefore, I shall only supply deficiencies. Of the manner of disposing of their dead, much has. been said arready. I must more explicitly observe, that there are two places in which the dead are deposited; one a kind of shed, where the flesh is suffered to putrify, the other an enclosure, with erctions of stone, where the bones are afterwards buried. The sheds are called <hi rend="sc">Tupapow</hi>, and the enclosures Morai. The Morais are also places of worship.</p>
              <p>As soon as a native of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> is known to be dead, the house is filled with relations, who deplore their loss, some by loud lamentations, and some by less clamorous, but more genuine expressions of gries. Those who are in the nearest degree of kindred, and are really affected by the event, are silent; the rest are one moment
<pb xml:id="n89" n="77"/>
uttering passionate exclamations in a chorus, and the next laughing and talking, without the least appearance of concern. In this manner the remainder of the day on which they assemble is spent, and all the succeeding night. On the next morning the body is shrouded in their cloth, and conveyed to the sea side upon a bier, which the bearers support upon their shoulders, attended by the priest, who having prayed over the body, repeats his sentences during the procession; when it arrives at the water's edge, it is set down upon the beach; the priest renews his prayers, and taking up some of the water in his hands, sprinkles it towards the body, but not upon it; it is then carried back forty or fifty yards, and soon after brought again to the beach, where the prayers and sprinkling are repeated. It is thus removed backwards and forwards several times; and while these ceremonies have been performing a house has been built, and a small space of ground railed in. In the centre of this house, or Tupapow, posts are set up to support the bier, which is at length conveyed thither, and placed upon it, and here the body remains to putrify till the flesh is wholly wasted from the bones.</p>
              <p>These houses of corruption are of a size proportioned to the rank of the person whose body they are to contain; those allotted to the lower class are just sufficient to cover the bier, and have no railing round them. The largest we ever saw was eleven yards long, and such as these are ornamented according to the abilities and inclination of the surviving kindred, who never sail to lay a profusion of good cloth about the body, and sometimes almost cover the outside of the house. Garlands of the fruit of the palm-nut, or <hi rend="i">pandanus</hi>, and cocoa leaves, twisted by the priests in mysterious knots, with a plant called by them <hi rend="i">Ethee no Morai</hi>, which is particularly consecrated to funeral solemnities, are deposited about the place; provision and water are also left at a little distance, of which, and of other decorations, a more particular description has been given already.</p>
              <p>As soon as the body is deposited in the Tupapow, the mourning is renewed. The women assemble, and are led to the door by the nearest relation, who strikes
<pb xml:id="n90" n="78"/>
a shark's tooth several times into the crown of her head: the blood copiously follows, and is carefully received upon pieces of linen, which are thrown under the bier. The rest of the women follow this example, and the ceremony is repeated at the interval of two or three days, as long as the zeal and sorrow of the parties hold out. The tears also which are shed upon these occasions, are received upon pieces of cloth, and offered as oblations to the dead: some of the young people cut off their hair, and that is thrown under the bier with other offerings. This custom is founded upon a notion that the soul of the deceased, which they believe to exist in a separate state, is hovering about the place where the body is deposited: that it observes the actions of the survivors, and is gratified by such testimonies of their affection and grief.</p>
              <p>Two or three days after these ceremonies have been commenced by the women, during which the men seem to be wholly insensible of their loss, they also be gin to perform their part. The nearest relations take it in turn to assume the dress, and perform the office which have already been particularly described in the account of Tubourai Tamaide's having acted as chief mourner to an old woman, his relation, who died while we were in the island. One part of the ceremony, however, which accounts for the running away of the people as soon as this procession is in sight, has not been mentioned. The chief mourner carries in his hand a long flat stick, the edge of which is set with shark's teeth, and in a phrenzy, which his grief is supposed to have inspired, he runs at all he sees, and if any of them happen to be overtaken, he strikes them most unmercifully with this indented cudgel, which cannot sail to wound them in a dangerous manner.</p>
              <p>These processions continue at certain intervals for five moons, but are less and less frequent, by a gradual diminution, as the end of that time approaches. When it is expired, what remains of the body is taken down from the bier, and the bones having been scraped and washed very clean, are buried, according to the rank of the person, either within or without a Morai: if the deceased was an Earee, or Chief, his skull is not buried with the rest of the bones, but is wrapped up in fine cloth, and put up in a kind of box made for
<pb xml:id="n91" n="79"/>
that purpose, which is also placed in the Morai. This coffer is called <hi rend="i">Ewbarre no te Orometua</hi>, the house of a teacher or master. After this the mourning ceases, except some of the women continue to be really afflicted for the loss, and in that case they will sometimes suddenly wound themselves with the shark's tooth wherever they happen to be: this perhaps will account for the passion of grief in which Terapo wounded herself at the fort; some accidental circumstance might forcibly revive the remembrance of a friend or relation whom she had lost, with a pungency of regret and tenderness which forced a vent by tears, and prompted her to a repetition of the funeral rite.</p>
              <p>The ceremonies, however, do not cease with the mourning: prayers are still said by the priest, who is well paid by the surviving relations, and offerings made at the Morai. Some of the things, which from time to time are deposited there, are emblematical: a young plantain represents the deceased, and the bunch of feathers the deity who is invoked. The priest places himself over-against the symbol of the God, accompanied by some of the relations, who are furnished with small offering, and repeats his oraison in a set form, consisting of separate sentences; at the same time weaving the leaves of the cocoa-nut into different forms, which he afterwards deposits upon the ground where the bones have been interred; the deity is then addressed by a shrill screech, which is used only upon that occasion. When the priest retires, the tuft of feathers is removed, and the provisions left to putrify, or be devoured by the rats.</p>
              <p>Of the religion of these people, we were not able to acquire any clear and consistent knowledge: we found it like the religion of most other countries, involved in mystery, and perplexed with apparent inconsistences. The religious language is also here, as it is in China, different from that which is used in common; so that Tupia, who took great pains to instruct us, having no words to express his meaning which we understood, gave us lectures to very little purpose: what we learnt, however, I will relate with as much perspicuity as I can.</p>
              <p>Nothing is more obvious to a rational being, however ignorant or stupid, than that the universe and its various parts, as far as they fall under his notice, were produced
<pb xml:id="n92" n="80"/>
by some agent inconceivably more powerful than himself; and nothing is more difficult to be conceived, even by the most sagacious and knowing, than the production of them from nothing, which among us is expressed by the word Creation. It is natural therefore, as no Being apparently capable of producing the universe is to be seen, that he sould be supposed to reside in some distant part of it, or to be in his nature invisible, and that he sould have originally produced all that now exists in a manner similar to that in which nature is renovated by the succession of one generation to another: but the idea of procreation includes in it that of two persons, and from the conjunction of two persons these people imagine every thing in the universe either originally or derivatively to proceed.</p>
              <p>The Supreme Deity, one of these two first beings, they call <hi rend="sc">Taroataihetoomoo</hi>, and the other, whom they suppose to have been a rock, <hi rend="sc">Tepapa</hi>. A daughter of these was <hi rend="sc">Tettowmatatayo</hi>, the year, or thirteen months collectively, which they never name but upon this occasion, and she, by the common father, produced the months, and the months, by conjunction with each other, the days: the stars they suppose partly to be the immediate offspring of the first pair, and partly to have increased among themselves: and they have the. same notion with respect to the different species of plants. Among other progeny of Taroataihetoomoo and Tepapa, they suppose an inferior race of deities whom they call <hi rend="sc">Eatuas</hi>. Two of these Eatuas, they say, at some remote period of time, inhabited the earth, and were the parents of the first man. When this man, their common ancestor, was born, they say that-he was round like a ball, but that his mother, with great care, drew out his limbs, and having at length moulded him into his present form, she called him <hi rend="sc">Eothe</hi>, which signifies <hi rend="i">finibed</hi>. That being prompted by the universal instinct to propagate his kind, and being able to find no female but his mother, he begot upon her a daughter, and upon the daughter other daughters for several generations, before there was a son: a son, however, being at length born, he, by the assistancc of his sisters, peopled the world.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n93" n="81"/>
              <p>Besides their daughter Tettowraatatayo, the first progenitors of nature had a son, whom they called <hi rend="sc">Tane</hi>. Taroataihetoomoo, the Supreme Deity, they emphatically style the Causer of Earthquakes; but their prayers are more generally addressed to Tane, whom they suppose to take a greater part in the affairs of mankind.</p>
              <p>The subordinate deities, or Eatuas, which are numerous, are of both sexes; the male are worshipped by the men, and the female by the women: and each have Morais to which the other sex are not admitted, though they have also Morais common to both. Men perform the office of pried to both sexes, but each sex has its priests, for those who officiate for one sex, do not officiate for the other.</p>
              <p>They believe the immortality of the soul, at least its existence in a separate state; and that there are two situations of different degrees of happiness, somewhat analogous to our heaven and hell: the superior Situation they call Tavirua l'erai, the other Tiahoboo. They do not, however, consider them as places of reward and punishment, but as receptacles for different classes; the first, for their chiess and principal people, the other for those of inferior rank, for they do not suppose that their actions here in the least influence their future state, or indeed that they come under the cognizance of their deities at all. Their religion, therefore, if it has no influence upon their morals, is at least disinterested; and their expressions of adoration and reverence, whether by words or actions, arise only from an humble sense of their own inferiority, and the inessable excellence of divine perfection.</p>
              <p>The character of the priest or Tahowa is hereditary: the class is numerous, and consists of all ranks of people; the chief, however, is generally the younger brother of a good family, and is respected in a degree next to their kings. Of the little knowledge that is possessed in this country, the priests have the greatest share; but it confists principally in an acquaintance with the names and ranks of the different Eatuas or subordinate divinities, and the opinions concerning the origin of things, which have been traditionally preserved among the order in detached sentences, of which some will repeat an incredible
<pb xml:id="n94" n="82"/>
number, tho' but very few of the words that are used in their common dialed occur in them.</p>
              <p>The priests, however, are superior to the rest of the people in the knowledge of navigation and astronomy, and indeed the name Tahowa signifies nothing more than a man of knowledge. As there are priests of every class, they officiate only among that class to which they belong: the priest of the inferior class is never called upon by those of superior rank, nor will the priest of superior rank officiate for any of the inferior class.</p>
              <p>Marriage in this island, as appeared to us, is nothing more than an agreement between the man and woman, with which the priest has no concern. Where it is contraded it appears to be pretty well kept, tho' sometimes the parties separate by mutual consent, and in that case a divorce takes place with as little trouble as the marriage.</p>
              <p>But tho' the priesthood has laid the people under no tax for a nuptial benediction, there are two operations which it has appropriated, and from which it derives considerable advantages. One is tattowing, and the other circumcision, tho' neither of them have any connection with religion. The tattowing has been described already. Circumcision has been adopted merely from motives of cleanliness; it cannot indeed properly be called circumciston, because the prepuce is not mutilated by a circular wound, but only slit thro' the upper part, to prevent its contracting over the glans. As neither of these can be performed by any but a priest, and as to be without either is the greatest disgrace, they may be considered as a claim to surplice fees, live our marriages and christenings which are chearfully and liberally paid, not according to any settled stipend, but the rank and abilities of the parties or their friends.</p>
              <p>The Morai, as has been already observed, is at once a burying ground and a place of worship, and in this particular our churches too much resemble it. The Indian, however, approaches his Morai with a reverence and humility that disgraces the Christian, not because he holds any thing sacred that is there, but because he there worships an invisible, divinity, from whom, tho' he neither hopes for reward, nor fears punishment, at his hand, he always expresses the profoundest homage
<pb xml:id="n95" n="83"/>
and most humble adoration. I have already given a very particular description both of the Morais and the altars that are placed near them. When an Indian is about to worship at the Morai, or brings his offering to the altar, he always uncovers his body to the waist, and his looks and attitude are such as sufficiently express a corresponding disposition of mind.</p>
              <p>It did not appear to us that these people are, in any instance, guilty of idolatry; at least they do not worship any thing that is the work of their hands, nor any visible part of the creation. This island, indeed, and the rest that lie near it, have a particular bird, some a heron, and others a king's-fisher, to which they pay a peculiar regard, and concerning which they have some superstitious notions, with respect to good and bad fortune, as we have of the swallow and robin-red-breast, giving them the name of <hi rend="sc">Eatua</hi>, and by no means killing or molesting them; yet they never address a petition to them, or approach them with any act of adoration.</p>
              <p>Tho' I dare not assert that these people, to whom the art of writing, and consequently the recording of laws, are utterly unknown, live under a regular form of government; yet a subordination is established among them, that greatly resembles the early state of every nation in Europe under the feudal system, which secured liberty to the most licentious excess to a few, and entailed the most abject slavery upon the rest.</p>
              <p>Their orders are, Earee rahie, which answers to the king; Earee, baron; Manahouni, vassal; and Toutou, villain. The Earee rahie, of which there are two in this island, one being the sovereign of each of the peninsulas of which it consists, is treated with great respect by all ranks, but it did not appear to us to be invested with so much power as was exercised by the Earees in their own districts; nor indeed did we, as I have before observed, once see the sovereign of Obereonoo, while we were in the island. The Earees are lords of one or more of the districts into which each of the peninsulas is divided, of which there may be about an hundred in the whole island; and they parcel out their territories to the Manahounies, who cultivate each his part which he holds under the baron.
<pb xml:id="n96" n="84"/>
The lowest class, called Toutous, seem to be nearly under the same circumstances as the villains in feudal governments; these do all the laborious work, they cultivate the land under the Manahounies, who are only nominal cultivators for the lord; they fetch wood and water, and, under the direction of the mistress of the family, dress the victuals; they also catch the fish.</p>
              <p>Each of the Earees keeps a kind of court, and has a great number of attendants, chiefly the younger brothers of their own tribe; and among those some hold particular offices, but of what nature exactly we could not tell. One was called the Eowa no l'Earee, and another the Whanno no l'Earee, and these were frequently dispatched to us with messages. Of all the courts of these Earees, that of Tootahah was the most splendid, as indeed might reasonably be expected, because he administered the government for Outou, his nephew, who was Earee rahie of Obereonoo, and lived upon his estate. The child of the baron, or Earee, as well as of the sovereign, or Earee rahie, succeeds to the title and honours of the father, as soon as it is born; so that a baron, who was yesterday called Earee, and was approached with the ceremony of lowering the garments, so as to uncover the upper part of the body, is to-day, if his wife was last night delivered of a child, reduced to the rank of a private man, all marks of respect being transferred to the child, if it is suffered to live, though the father still continues possessor and administrator of his estate: probably this custom has its share, among other inducements, in forming the societies called Arreoy.</p>
              <p>If a general attack happens to be made upon the island, every district, under the command of an Earee, is obliged to furnish its proportion of soldiers for the common defence. The number furnished by the principal districts, which Tupia recollected, when added together, amounted, as I have observed before, to <gap reason="unclear"/>680.</p>
              <p>Upon such occasions, the united force of the whole island is commanded in chief by the Earee rahie. Private differences between two Earees, are decided by
<pb xml:id="n97" n="85"/>
their own people, without at all disturbing the general tranquillity.</p>
              <p>Their weapons are slings, which they use with great dexterity; pikes headed with the stings of sting-rays, and clubs of about six or seven feet long, made of a very hard heavy wood. Thus armed, they are said to fight with great obstinacy, which is the more likely to be true, as it is certain that they give no quarter to either man, woman, or child, who is so unfortunate as to fall into their hands during the battle, or for some hours afterwards, till their passion, which is always violent, though not lasting, has subsided.</p>
              <p>The Earee rahie of Obereonoo, while we were here, was in perfect amity with the Earee rahie of Tiarre boo, the other penisula, tho' he took to himself the title of king of the whole island; this, however, produced no more jealousy in the other sovereign, than the title of King of France, assumed by our Sovereign does in his Most Christian Majesty.</p>
              <p>In a government so rude, it cannot be expected that distributive justice should be regularly administered; and indeed where there is so little opposition of interest, in consequence of the facility with which every appetite and passion is gratified, there can be but few crimes. There is nothing like money, the common medium by which every want and every wish is supposed to be gratified, by those who do not possess it; there is no apparently permanent good, which either fraud or force can unlawfully obtain; and when all the crimes that are committed by the inhabitants of civilized countries to get money, are set out of the account, not many will remain; add to this, that where the commerce with women is restrained by no law, men will seldom be under any temptation to commit adultery, especially as one woman is always less preferred to another, where they are less distinguished by personal decorations, and the adventitious circumstances which are produced by the varieties of art, and the refinements of sentiment. That they are thieves is true; but as among these people no man can be much injured or benefitted by theft, it is not necessary to restrain it by such punishments, as in other countries,
<pb xml:id="n98" n="86"/>
are absolutely necessary to the very existence of civil society. Tupia, however, tells us, that adultery is sometimes committed as well as theft. In all cases where an injury has been committed, the punishment of the offender lies with the sufferer. Adultery, if the parties are caught in the fact, is sometimes punished with death, in the first ardour of resentment; but, without circumstances of immediate provocation, the female sinner seldom suffers more than a beating. As punishment, however, is enforced by no law, nor taken into the hand of any magistrate, it is not often inflicted, unless the injured party is the strongest; tho' the chiefs do sometimes punish their immediate dependents, for faults committed against each other, and even the dependents of others, if they are accused of any offence committed in their district.</p>
              <p>Having now given the best description that I can of the island in its present state, and of the people, with their customs and manners, language and arts, I shall only add a few general observations, which may be of use to future navigators, if any of the ships of Great Britain should receive orders to visit it. As it produces nothing that appears to be convertible into an article of trade, and can be useful only by affording refreshments to shipping in their passage thro' these seas, it might be made to answer this purpose in a much greater degree, by transporting thither sheep, goats, and horned cattle, with European garden-stuff, and other useful vegetables, which there is the greatest reason to suppose will flourish in so fine a climate, and so rich a soil.</p>
              <p>Though this and the neighbouring islands lie within the tropic of Capricorn, yet the heat is not troublesome, nor did the winds blow constantly from the east. We had frequently a fresh gale from the S. W. for two or three days, and sometimes, though very seldom, from the N. W. Tupia reported, that south-westerly winds prevail in October, November, and December, and we have no doubt of the fact. When the winds are variable, they are always accompanied by a swell from the S. W. or W. S. W. there is also a swell from the same points when it is calm, and the atmosphere loaded with clouds, which is a sure indication
<pb xml:id="n99" n="87"/>
that the winds are variable, or westerly out at sea; for with the settled trade-wind the weather is clear.</p>
              <p>The meeting with westerly winds, within the general limits of the eastern trade, has induced some navigators to suppose that they were near some large tract of land, of which, however, I think they are no indication.</p>
              <p>It has been found, both by us and the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>, that the trade-wind, in these parts, does not extend farther to the south than twenty degrees, beyond which, we generally found a gale from the westward; and it is reasonable to suppose, that when these winds blow strong they will drive back the easterly wind, and consequently incroach upon the limits within which they constantly blow, and thus necessarily produce variable winds, as either happens to prevail, and a south westerly swell. This supposition is the more probable, as it is well known that the trade-winds blow but faintly for some distance within their limits, and therefore may be more easily stopped or repelled by a wind in the contrary direction: it is also well known, that the limits of the trade winds vary, not only at different seasons of the year, but sometimes at the same season in different years.</p>
              <p>There is therefore no reason to suppose, that south westerly winds, within these limits, are caused by the vicinity of large tracts of land, especially as they are always accompanied with a large swell, in the same direction in which they blow; and we find a much greater surf beating upon the shores of the south-west side of the islands that are situated just within the limits of the trade-wind, than upon any other part of them.</p>
              <p>The tides about these islands are perhaps as inconsiderable as in any part of the world. A south or S. by W. moon makes high water in the bay of Matavai, at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; but the water very seldom rises perpendicularly above ten or twelve inches.</p>
              <p>The variation of the compass I found to be 4° 46′ easterly, this being the result of a great number of trials made with four of Dr. Knight's needles, adapted
<pb xml:id="n100" n="88"/>
to azimuth compasses. These compasses I thought the best that could be produced, yet, when applied to the meridian line, I found them to differ, not only one from another, sometimes a degree and an half, but the same needle, half a degree from itself, in different trials made on the same day; and I do not remember that I have ever found two needles which exactly agreed at the same time and place, though I have often found the same needle agree with itself, in several trials made one after the other. This imperfection of the needle, however, is of no consequence to navigation, as the variation can always be found to a degree of accuracy more than sufficient for all nautical purposes.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d1-d7" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. VII</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">A Description of several other Islands in the Neighbourhood of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, with various Incidents; a dramatic Entertainment; and many Particulars relative to the Customs and Manners of the Inbabitants</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">After</hi> parting with our friends, we made an easy sail, with gentle breezes and clear weather, and were informed by Tupia, that four of the neighbouring islands, which he distinguished by the names of <hi rend="sc">Huaheine, Ulietea, Otaha</hi>, and <hi rend="sc">Bolabola</hi>, lay at the distance of between one and two days sail from <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; and that hogs, fowls, and other refreshments, with which we had of late been but sparingly supplied, were there to be procured in great plenty; but having discovered, from the hills of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, an island lying to the northward, which he called <hi rend="sc">Tethuroa</hi>, I determined first to stand that way, to take a nearer view of it. It lies N. ½ W. distant eight leagues from the northern extremity of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, upon which we had observed the transit, and to which we had, for that reason, given the name of <hi rend="sc">Point Venus</hi>. We found it to be a small low island, and were told by Tupia, that it had no settled inhabitants, but was occasionally visited by the inhabitants of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>,
<pb xml:id="n101" n="89"/>
heite, who sometimes went thither for a few days to fish; we therefore determined to spend no more time in a farther examination of it, but to go in search of Huaheine and Ulietea, which he described to be well peopled, and as large as <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>.</p>
              <p>At six o'clock in the morning of the 14th, the westermost part of <hi rend="sc">Eimeo</hi>, or York Island, bore S. E. ½ S, and the body of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> E. ½ S. At noon, the body of York Island bore E. by S. ½ S. and Port-Royal bay, at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, S. 70° 45′ E. distant 61 miles, and an island which we took to be Saunders's Island, called by the natives <hi rend="sc">Tapoamanao</hi>, bore S. S. W. We also saw land bearing N. W. ½ N. which Tupia said was Huaheine.</p>
              <p>On the 15th, it was hazy, with light breezes and calms succeeding each other, so that we could see no land, and made but little way. Our Indian, Tupia, often prayed for a wind to his god, Tane, and as often boasted of his success, which indeed he took a very effectual method to secure; for he never began his address to Tane, till he saw a breeze so near that he knew it must reach the ship before his oraison was well over.</p>
              <p>On the 16th, we had a gentle breeze; and in the morning about eight o'clock; being close in with the north-west part of the island Huaheine, we sounded, but had no bottom with 80 fathom. Some canoes very soon came off; but the people seemed afraid, and kept at a distance till they discovered Tupia, and then they ventured nearer. In one of the canoes, that came up to the ship's side, was the king of the island and his wife. Upon assuranees of friendship, frequently and earnestly repeated, their majesties and some others came on board. At first they were struck with astonishment, and wondered at every thing that was shewn them, yet they made no enquiries; and seeming to be sutissed with what was offered to their notice, they made no search after other objects of curiosity, with which, it was natural to suppose, a building of such novelty and magnitude as the ship must abound. After some time they became more familiar. I was given to understand, that the name of the king was <hi rend="sc">Oree</hi>; and he proposed, as a mark
<pb xml:id="n102" n="90"/>
of amity, that we should exchange names. To this I readily consented; and he was Cookee, for so he pronounced my name, and I was Oree, for the rest of the time we were together. We found these people to be very nearly the same with those of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, in person, dress, language, and every other circumstance, except, if Tupia might be believed, that they would not steal.</p>
              <p>Soon after dinner we came to an anchor, in a small but excellent harbour on the west side of the island, which the natives call <hi rend="sc">Owharee</hi>, in eighteen fathom water, clear ground, and secure from all winds. I went immediately a shore, accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, Mr. Monkhouse, Tupia, King Cookee, and some other of the natives, who had been on board ever since the morning. The moment we landed, Tupia stripped himself as low as the waist, and desired Mr. Monkhouse to do the same; he then sat down before a great number of the natives, who were collected together in a large house or shed; for here, as well as at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, a house consists only of a roof supported upon poles; the rest of us, by his desire, standing behind. He then began a speech, or prayer, which lasted about a quarter of an hour, the king, who stood over-against him, every now and then answering, in what appeared to be set responses. In the course of this harangue, he delivered at different times two handkerchiess, a black silk neckoloth, some beads, two small bunches of seathers, and some plantains, as presents to their Eatua, or God. In return for these, he received for our Eatua, a hog, some young plantains, and two small bunches of feathers, which he ordered to be carried on board the ship. After these ceremonies, which we supposed to be the ratification of a treaty between us, every one was disimissed, to go whither he pleated; and Tupia immediately repaired to offer his oblations at one of the Morais.</p>
              <p>The next morning, we went on shore again, and walked up the hills, where the productions were exactly the same as those of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, except that the rocks and clay appeared to be more burnt. The houses
<pb xml:id="n103" n="91"/>
were near, and the boat-houses remarkably large; one that we measured was fifty paces long, ten broad, and twenty-four feet high; the whole formed a pointed arch, like those of our old cathedrals, which was supported on one side by twenty-six, and on the other by thirty pillars, or rather posts, about two feet high, and one thick, upon most of which were rudely carved the heads of men, and several fanciful devices, not altogether unlike those which we sometimes see printed from wooden blocks, at the beginning and end of old books, The plains, or flat part of the country, abounded in bread-fruit, and cocoa-nut trees; in some places, however, there were salt swamps and lagoons, which would produce neither.</p>
              <p>We went again a-shore on the 18th, and would have taken the advantage of Tupia's company, in our perambulation; but he was too much engaged with his friends: we took however his boy, whose name was <hi rend="sc">Tayeto</hi>, and Mr. Banks went to take a farther view of what had much engaged his attention before; it was a kind of chest or ark, the lid of which was nicely sewed on, and thatched very neatly with palm-nut leaves: it was fixed upon two poles, and supported on littte arches of wood, very neatly carved; the use of the poles seemed to be to remove it from place to place, in the manner of our sedan chairs: in one end of it was a square hole, in the middle of which was a ring touching the sides, and leaving the angles open so as to form a round hole within a square one. The first time Mr. Banks saw this coffer, the aperture at the end was stopped with a piece of cloth, which, left he should give offence, he left untouched; probably there was then something within, but now the cloth was taken away, and, upon looking into it, it was found empty. The general resemblance between this repoistory and the Ark of the Lord among the Jews is remarkable; but it is still more remarkable, that upon enquiring of the boy what it was called, he said, Ewharre no Eatua, the house of the God: he could however give no account of its signification or use. We had commenced a kind of trade with the natives, but it went on slowly; for when any thing was offered, not one of them would take it upon his own judgment,
<pb xml:id="n104" n="92"/>
but collected the opinions of twenty or thirty people, which could not be done without great loss of time. We got, however, eleven pigs, and determined to try for more the next day.</p>
              <p>The next day, therefore, we brought out some hatchets, for which we hoped we should have had no occasion, upon an island which no European had ever visited before. These procured us three very large hogs; and as we proposed to sail in the afternoon, King Oree and several others came on board to take their leave. To the King I gave a small plate of pewter, on which was stamped this insription, “His Bri “tannic Majesty's ship, Endeavour, Lieutonant Cook “Commander, 16th July, 1769, Huaheine.” I gave him also some medals or counters, resembling the coin of England, struck in the year 1761, with some other presents; and he promised that with none of these, particularly the plate, he would ever part. I thought it as lasting a testimony of our having first discovered this island, as any we could leave behind; and having dismissed our visitors well satisfied, and in great good humour, we set sail about half an hour after two in the afternoon.</p>
              <p>The island of Huaheine, or Huahene, is situated in the latitude of 16° 43′S. and longitude 150° 52′ W. from Greenwich; it is distant from <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> about thirty-one leagues, in the direction of N. 58 W. and is about seven leagues in compass. Its surface is hilly and uneven, and it has a safe and commodious harbour. The harbour, which is called by the natives <hi rend="sc">Owalle</hi>, or <hi rend="sc">Owharre</hi>, lies on the wesl side, under the northermost high land; and within the north end of the reef, which lies along that side of the island, there are two inlets, or openings, by which it may be entered through the reef, about a mile and a half distant from each other; the southermost is the widest, and on the south side of it lies a very small sandy island.</p>
              <p>Huaheine seems to be a month forwarder in its productions than <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, as we found the cocoa-nuts full of kernel, and some of the new bread-fruit fit to, eat. Of the cocoa-nuts the inhabitants make a food, which they call Poe, by mixing them with yams: they scrape both fine, and having incorporated the powder, they put it into a wooden trough, with a number of
<pb xml:id="n105" n="93"/>
hot stones; by which an oily kind of hasty pudding is made, that our people relished very well, especially when it was fried. Mr. Banks found not more than eleven or twelve new plants; but he observed some insect, and a species of scorpion which he had not seen before.</p>
              <p>The inhabitants seem to be larger made, and more stout, than those of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>. Mr. Banks measured one of the men, and found him to be six feet three inches and an half high; yet they are so lazy, that he could not persuade any of them to go up the hills with him; they said, if they were to attempt it, the fatigue would kill them. The women were very fair, more so than those of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; and in general we thought them more handsome, though none that were equal to some individuals. Both sexes seemed to be less timid, and less curious. It has been observed, that they made no enquiries on board the ship; and when we fired a gun, they were frighted indeed, but they did not fall down, as our friends at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> constantly did when we first came among them. For this difference, however, we can easily account upon other principles; the people at Huaheine had not seen the <name key="name-400642" type="ship">Dolphin</name>, those at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> had. In one, the report of a gun was connected with the idea of instant destruction; to the other, there was nothing dreadful ia it but the appearance and the sound, as they had never experienced its power of dispensing death.</p>
              <p>While we were on shore, we found that Tupia had commended them beyond their merit, when he said, that they would not steal; for one of them was detected in the fact. But when he was seized by the hair, the rest, instead of running away, as the people at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> would have done, gathered round, and enquired what provocation had been given; but this also may be accounted for, without giving them credit for their superior courage; they had no experience of the consequence of European resentment, which the people at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> had in many instances purchased with life. It must, however, be acknowledged, to their honour, that when they understood what had happened, they shewed strong signs of disapprobation, and
<pb xml:id="n106" n="94"/>
prescribed a good beating for the thief, which was immediately administered.</p>
              <p>We now made sail for the island of <hi rend="sc">Ulietea</hi>, which lies S.W. by W. distant seven or eight leagues from Huaheine, and at half an hour after six in the evening we were within three leagues of the shore, on the eastern side. We stood off and on all night, and when the day broke the next morning, we slood in for the shore. We soon after discovered an opening in the reef which lies before the island, within which, Tupia told us, there was a good harbour. I did not however, implicitly take hi word, but sent the master out in the pinnace to examine it: he soon made the signal for the ship to follow; we accordingly stood in, and anchored in two and twenty fathom, with soft ground.</p>
              <p>The natives soon came off to us in two canoes, each of which brought a woman and a pig. The woman, we supposed, was a mark of confidence, and the pig was a present; we received both with proper acknowledgments, and complimented each of the ladies with a spike nail and some beads, much to their satisfaction. We were told by Tupia, who had always expressed much fear of the men of Bolabola, that they had made a conquest of this island, and that, if we remained here, they would certainly come down to-miorrow and fight us. We determined, therefore, to go on shore without delay, while the day was our own.</p>
              <p>I landed, in company with Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and the other gentlemen, Tupia being also of the party. He introduced us, by repeating the ceremonies which he had performed at Huaheine; after which I hoisted an English Jack, and took possession of this and the three neighbouring islands, Huaheine, Otaha, and Bolabola, which were all in sight, in the name of his Britannic Majesty. After this, we took a walk to a great Morai, called <hi rend="sc">Tapodeboxtea</hi>. We found it very different from those of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, for it consisted only of four walls, about eight feet high, of coral stones, some of which were of an immense size, inclosing an area of about five and twenty yards square, which was filled up with smaller stones; upon the top of it many planks were set up on end, which were
<pb xml:id="n107" n="95"/>
carved in their whole length; at a little distance we found an altar, or Ewhatta, upon which lay the last oblation or sacrifice, a hog of about eighty pounds weight, which had been offered whole, and very nicely roasted. Here were also four or five Ewharre-no-Eatua, or houses of God, to which carriage poles were fitted, like that which we had seen at Huaheine. One of these Mr. Banks examined, by putting his hand into it, and found a parcel about five feet long and one thick, wrapped up in mats; he broke a way through several of these mats with his fingers, but at length came to one which was made of the fibres of the cocoanut, so firmly plaited together that he found it impossible to tear it, and therefore was forced to desist: especially as he perceived, that what he had done already gave great offence to our new friends. From hence we went to a long house, not far distant, where, among rolls of cloth and several other things, we saw the model of a canoe, about three feet long, to which were tied eight humanl jaw-bones: we had already learned that these, like scalps among the Indians of North America, were trophies of war. Tupia affirmed, that they were the jawbones of the natives of this island; if so, they might have been hung up, with the model of a canoe, as a symbol of invasion, by the warriors of Bolabola, as a memorial of their conquest.</p>
              <p>Night now came on apace, but Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander continued their walk along the more, and at a little distance saw another Ewharre-no-Ealua, and a tree of the fig kind, the same as that which Mr. Green had seen at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, in great perfection; the trunk, or rather congeries of the roots of which was forty-two paces in circumference.</p>
              <p>On the 21st, having dispatched the master in the long-boat, to examine the coast of the south part of the island, and one of the mates in the yawl, to sound the harbour where the ship lay, I went myself in the pinnace, to survey that part of the island which lies to the north. Mr. Banks and the gentlemen were again on shore, trading with the natives, and examining the products and curiosities of the country; they saw nothing, however, worthy notice, but some more jawbones,
<pb xml:id="n108" n="96"/>
of which they made no doubt but that the account they had heard was true.</p>
              <p>On the 22d and 23d, having strong gales and hazy weather, I did not think it safe to put to sea; but on the 24th, though the wind was still variable, I got under sail, and plied to the northward within the reef, with a view to go out at a wider opening than that by which I had entered: in doing this, however, I was unexpectedly in the most imminent danger of striking on the rock; the master, whom I had ordered to keep continually sounding in the chains, suddenly called out, “two fathom.” This aiarmed me; for though I knew the ship drew at least fourteen feet, and that therefore it was impossible such a shoal should be under her keel, yet the master was either mistaken, or she went along the edge of a coral rock, many of which, in the neighbourhood of these islands, are as steep as a wall.</p>
              <p>This harbour or bay is called by the natives <hi rend="sc">Oopoa</hi>, and, taken in its greatest extent, it is capable of holding any number of shipping. It extends almost the whole length of the east side of the island, and is defended from the sea by the reef of coral rocks. The southermost opening of this reef or channel into the harbour, by which we entered, is little more than a cable's length wide; it lies off the eastermost point of the island, and may be known by another small woody island, which lies a little to the south-east of it, called by the people here <hi rend="sc">Oatara</hi>. Between three and four miles north-west from this island lie two other islets, in the same direction as the reef, of which they are a part, called <hi rend="sc">Opururu</hi> and <hi rend="sc">Tamou</hi>; between these lies the other channel into the harbour, through which I went out, and which is a full quarter of a mile wide. Still farther to the north-west are some other small islands, near which, I am told, there is another small channel into the harbour: but this I knew only by report.</p>
              <p>The principal refreshments that are to be procured at this part of the island are plantains, cocoa-nuts, yams, hogs, and fowls; the hogs and fowls, however, are scarce, and the country, where we saw it, is neither so populous nor so rich in produce as <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>,
<pb xml:id="n109" n="97"/>
or even Huaheine. Wood and water may also be procured here, but the water cannot conveniently be got at.</p>
              <p>We were now again at sea, without having received any interruption from the hostile inhabitants of Bolabola, whom, notwithstanding the fears of Tupia, we intended to visit. At four o'clock in the afternoon of the 25th, we were within a league of Otaha, which bore N. 77 W. To the northward of the south end of that island, on the east side of it, and something more than a mile from the shore, lie two small islands, called <hi rend="sc">Toahoutu</hi> and <hi rend="sc">Whennuaia</hi>, between which, Tupia says, there is a channel into a very good harbour, which lies within the reef, and appearances confirmed his report.</p>
              <p>As I discovered a broad channel between Otaha and Bolabola, I determined rather to go through it, than run to the northward of all; but the wind being right a-head, I got no ground.</p>
              <p>Between five and six in the evening of the 26th, as I was standing to the northward, I discovered a small low island lying N. by W. or N. N. W. distant four or five leagues from Bolabola. We were told by Tupia, that the name of this island is <hi rend="sc">Tubai</hi>, that it produces nothing but cocoa-nuts, and is inhabited only by three families; though it is visited by the inhabitants of the nighbouring islands, who resort thither to catch fish, with which the coast abounds.</p>
              <p>On the 27th, about noon, the Peak of Bolabola bore-N. 25 W. and the north end of Otaha N. 80 W. distant three leagues. The wind continued contrary all this day, and the night following. On the 28th, at six in the morning, we were near the entrance of the harbour on the east side of <hi rend="sc">Otaha</hi>, which has been just mentioned; and finding that it might be examined without losing time, I sent away the master in the long boat, with orders to sound it; and, if the wind did not shift in our favour, to land upon the island, and traffic with the natives for such refreshments as were to be had. In this boat went Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, who landed upon the island, and before night purchased three hogs, twenty-one fowls, and as many yams and plantains as the boat would hold. Plantains
<pb xml:id="n110" n="98"/>
we thought a more useful refreshment even than pork, for they were boiled, and served to the ship's company as bread; and were now the more acceptable, as our bread was so full of vermin, that notwithstanding all possible care, we had sometimes twenty of them in our mouths at a time, every one of which tasted as hot as mustard. The island seemed to be more barren than Ulietea, but the produce was of the same kind. The people also exactly resembled those we had seen at the other islands; they were not numerous, but they flocked about the boat wherever she went, from all quarters, bringing with them whatever they had to sell. They paid the strangers, of whom they had received an account from Tupia, the same compliment which they used towards their own Kings, uncovering their shoulders, and wrapping their garments round their breasts; and were so solicitous to prevent its being neglected by any of their people, that a man was sent with them, who called out to every one he met, telling him what they were, and what he was to do.</p>
              <p>In the mean time, I kept plying off and on, waiting for the boat's return. At half an hour after five, not seeing any thing of her, I fired a gun, and after it was dark hoisted a light. At half an hour after eight we heard the report of a musquet, which we answered with a gun, and soon after the boat came on board. The master reported, that the harbour was safe and commodious, with good anchorage from twenty-five feet to sixteen fathom water, clear ground.</p>
              <p>As soon as the boat was hoisted in, I made sail to the northward, and at eight o'clock in the morning of the 29th, we were close under the Peak of Bolabola, which was high, rude, and craggy. As the island was altogether inaccessible in this part, and we found it impossible to weather it, we tacked and stood off, then tacked again, and after many trips did not weather the south end of it till twelve o'clock at night. At eight o'clock the next morning we discovered an island, which bore from us N. 63° W. distant about eight leagues: at the same time the Peak of Bolabola bore N. ½ E. distant three or four leagues. This island Tupia called <hi rend="sc">Maurua</hi>, and said that it was small, wholly surrounded by a reef, and without any harbour for shipping; but
<pb xml:id="n111" n="99"/>
inhabited, and bearing the same produce as the neighbouring islands. The middle of it rises in a high round hill, that may be seen at the distance of ten leagues.</p>
              <p>When we were off Bolabola we saw but few people on the shore, and were told by Tupia, that many of the inhabitants were gone to Ulietea. In the afternoon we found ourselves nearly the length of the south end of Ulietea, and to windward of some harbours that lay on the west side of this island. Into one of these harbours, though we had before been ashore on the other side of the island, I intended to put, in order to stop a leak which we had sprung in the powder-room, and to take in more ballast, as I found the ship too light to carry sail upon a wind. As the wind was right against I us, we plied off one of the harbours, and about three o'clock in the afternoon, on the 1st of August, we came to an anchor in the entrance of the channel leading into it, in fourteen fathom water, being prevented from working in by a tide which set very strong out. We then carried out the kedge-anchor, in order to warp into the harbour; but when this was done we could not trip the bower-anchor with all the purchase we could make; we were therefore obliged to lie still all night, and in the morning, when the tide turned, the ship going over the anchor, it tripped of itself, and we warped the ship into a proper birth with ease, and moored in twenty-eight fathom, with a sandy bottom. While this was doing, many of the natives came off to us with hogs, fowls, and plantains, which they parted with at an easy rate.</p>
              <p>When the ship was secured, I went on shore to look for a proper place to get ballast and water, both which I found in a very convenient situation.</p>
              <p>This day Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander spent on shore very much to their satisfaction; every body seemed to fear and respect them, placing in them, at the same time, the utmost confidence; behaving as if conscious that they possessed the power of doing them mischiefs without any propensity to make use of it. Men, women, and children crouded round them, and followed them wherever they went; but none of them were guilty of the least incivility; on the contrary, whenever
<pb xml:id="n112" n="100"/>
there happened to be dirt or water in the way, the men vied with each other to carry them over on their backs. They were conducted to the houses of the principal people, and were received in a manner altogether new: the people who followed them while they were on their way, rushed forward as soon as they came to a house, and went hastily in before them, leaving, however, a lane sufficiently wide for them to pass. When they entered, they found those who had preceded them ranged on each side of a long mat, which was spread upon the ground, and at the farther end of which sat the family. In the first house they entered they found some very young women, or children, dressed with the utmost neatness, who kept their station, expecting the strangers to come up to them and make them presents, which they did with the greatest pleasure; for prettier children or better dressed they had never seen. One of them was a girl about six years old; her gown, or upper garment, was red, a large quantity of plaited hair was wound round her head, the ornament to which they give the name of Tamou, and which they value more than any thing they possess. She sat at the upper end of a mat thirty feet long, upon which none of the sepectators presumed to set a foot, not withstanding the croud; and she leaned upon the arm of a well-looking woman about thirty, who was probably her nurse. Our gentlemen walked up to her, and, as soon as they approached, she stretched out her hand to receive the beads which they offered, and no princess in Europe could have done it with better grace.</p>
              <p>The people were so much gratified by the presents which were made to these girls, that when Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander returned, they seemed attentive to nothing but how to oblige them; and in one of the houses they were, by order of the master, entertained with a dance, different from any that they had seen It was performed by one man, who put upon his head a large cylindrical piece of wicker-work, or basket, about four feet long, and eight inches in diameter, which was faced with feathers, placed perpendicularly, with the tops bending forwards, and edged round with Shark's teeth, and the tail feathers of tropic
<pb xml:id="n113" n="101"/>
birds: when he had put on this head-dress, which is called a Whow, he began to dance, moving slowly, and often turning his head, so as that the top of his high wicker cap described a circle, and sometimes throwing it so near the faces of the spectators as to make them start back; this was held among them as a very good joke, and never sailed to produce a peal of laughter, especially when it was played off upon one of the strangers.</p>
              <p>On the 3d, we went along the shore to the north-ward, which was in a direction opposite to that of the route Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander had taken the day before, with a design to purchase stock, which we always found the people more ready to part with, and at a more easy price, at their houses than at the market. In the course of our walk we met with a company of dancers, who detained us two hours, and during all that time afforded us great entertainment. The company consisted of two women dancers, and six men, with three drums; we were informed by Tupia, that they were some of the most considerable people of the island, and that though they were continually going from place to place, they did not, like the little strolling companies of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, take any gratuity from the spectators. The women had upon their heads a considerable quantity of Tamou, or plaited hair, which was brought several times round the head, and adorned in many parts with the flowers of the cape jessamine, which were stuck in with much taste, and made a head-dress truly elegant. Their necks, shoulders, and arms were naked; so were their breasts also, as low as the parting of the arm; below that they were covered with black cloth, which set close to the body; at the side of each breast, next the arm, was placed a small plume of black feathers, much in the same manner as our ladies now wear their nosegays, or Bouquets; upon their hips rested a quantity of cloth, plaited very full, which reached up to the breast, and fell down below into long petticoats, which quite concealed their feet, and which they managed with as much dexterity as our opera dancers could have done; the plaits above the waist were brown and white alternately, the petticoats below were all white.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n114" n="102"/>
              <p>In this dress they advanced sideways in a measured step, keeping excellent time to the drums, which beat briskly and loud; soon after they began to shake their hips, giving the folds of cloth that lay upon them a very quick motion, which was in some degree continued through the whole dance, though the body was thrown into various postures, sometimes standing, sometimes sitting, and sometimes resting on their knees and elbows, the fingers also being moved at the same time with a quickness scarcely to be imagined. Much of the dexterity of the dancers, however, and the entertainment of the spectators, consisted in the wantonness of their attitudes and gestures, which was, indeed, such as exceeds all description.</p>
              <p>One of these girls had in her ear three pearls; one of them was very large, but so soul that it was of little value: the other two were as big as a middling pea; these were clear, and of a good colour and shape, though spoiled by the drilling. Mr. Banks would fain have purchased them, and offered the owner any thing she would ask for them, but she could not be persuaded to part with them at any price: he tempted her with the value of four hogs, and whatever else she should chuse, but without success; and indeed they set a value upon their pearls very nearly equal to what they would fetch among us, except they could be procured before they are drilled.</p>
              <p>Between the dances of the women, the men performed a kind of dramatic interlude, in which there was a dialogue as well as dancing; but we were not sufficiently acquainted with their language to understand the subject.</p>
              <p>On the 4th, some of our gentlemen saw a much more regular entertainment of the dramatic kind, which was divided into four acts.</p>
              <p>Tupia had often told us that he had large possessions in this island, which had been taken away from him by the inhabitants of Bolabola, and he now pointed them out in the very bay where the ship was at anchor. Upon our going on shore, this was confirmed by the inhabitants, who shewed us several districts or Whennuas, which they acknowledged to be his right.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n115" n="103"/>
              <p>On the 5th, I received a present of three hogs, some fowls, several pieces of cloth, the largest we had seen, being 50 yards long, which they unfolded and displayed so as to make the greatest show possible; and a considerable quantity of plantains, cocoa-nuts, and other refreshments, from Opoony, the formidable King, or, in the language of the country, Earee rahie of Bolabola, with a message that he was at this time upon the island, and that the next day he intended to pay me a visit.</p>
              <p>In the mean time Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander went upon the hills, accompanied by several of the Indians, who conducted them, by excellent paths, to such a height, that they plainly saw the other side of the island, and the passage through which the ship had passed the reef between the little islands of Opururu and Tamou, when we landed upon it the first time. As they were returning, they saw the Indians exercising themselves at what they call Erowhaw, which is nothing more than pitching a kind of lance, headed with a hard wood, at a mark: in this amusement, though they seem very fond of it, they do not excel, for not above one in twelve struck the mark, which was the bole of a plantain tree, at about twenty yards distance.</p>
              <p>On the 6th, we all staid at home, expecting the visit of the great King, but we were disappointed; we had, however, much more agreeable company, for he sent three very pretty girls to demand something in return for his present: perhaps he was unwilling to trust himself on board the ship, or perhaps he thought his messengers would procure a more valuable return for his hogs and poultry than he could himself; be that as it may, we did not regret his absence, nor his messengers their visit.</p>
              <p>In the afternoon, as the great King would not come to us, we determined to go to the great King. As he was lord of the Bolabola men, the conquerors of this, and the terror of all the other islands, we expected to see a Chief young and vigorous, with an intelligent countenance, and an enterprizing spirit: we found, however, a poor feeble wretch, withered and decrepid, half blind with age, and so sluggish and stupid,
<pb xml:id="n116" n="104"/>
that he appeared scarcely to have understanding enough left to know that it was probable we should be gratified either by hogs or women. He did not receive us sitting, or with any state or formality, as the other Chiefs had done: we made him our present, which he accepted, and gave a hog in return. We had learnt that his principal residence was at Otaha; and upon our telling him that we intended to go thither in our boats the next morning, and that we should be glad to have him along with us, he promised to be of the party.</p>
              <p>Early in the morning, therefore, I set out both with the pinnace and long-boat for Otaha, having some of the gentlemen with me, and in our way we called upon Opoony, who was in his canoe, ready to join us. As soon as we landed at Otaha, I made him a present of an axe, which I thought might induce him to encourage his subjects to bring us such provision as we wanted; but in this we found ourselves sadly disappointed, for after staying with him till noon, we left him without being able to procure a single article. I then proceeded to the north point of the island, in the pinnace, having sent the long-boat another way. As I went along I picked up half a dozen hogs, as many fowls, and some plantains and yams. Having viewed and sketched the harbour on this side of the island, I made the best of my way back, with the long-boat, which joined me soon after it was dark; and about ten o'clock at night we got on board the ship.</p>
              <p>In this excursion Mr. Banks was not with us; he spent the morning on board the ship, trading with the natives, who came off in their canoes, for provisions and curiosities; and in the afternoon he went on shore with his draughtsman, to sketch the dresses of the dancers which he had seen a day or two before. He found the company exactly the same, except that another woman had been added to it: the dancing also of the women was the same, but the interludes of the men were somewhat varied; he saw five or six performed, which were different from each other, and very much resembled the drama of our stage dances. The next day he went ashore again, with Dr. Solander, and they directed
<pb xml:id="n117" n="105"/>
directed their course towards the dancing company, which, from the time of our second landing, had gradually moved about two leagues in their courses round the island. They saw more dancing and more interludes, the interludes still varying from each other: in one of them the performers, who were all men, were divided into two parties, which were distinguished from each other by the colour of their clothes, one being brown, and the other white. The brown party represented a master and servants, and the white party a company of thieves: the master gave a basket of meat to the rest of his party, with a charge to take care of it: the dance of the white party consisted of several expedients to steal it, and that of the brown party in preventing their success. After some time, those who had charge of the basket placed themselves round it, upon the ground, and leaning upon it, appeared to go to sleep; the others, improving this opportunity, came gently upon them, and lifting them up from the basket, carried off their prize: the sleepers soon after awaking, missed their basket, but presently fell a dancing, without any farther regarding their loss; so that the dramatic action of this dance was, according to the severest laws of criticism, one, and our lovers of simplicity would here have been gratified with an entertainment perfectly suited to the chastity of their taste.</p>
              <p>On the 9th, having spent the morning in trading with the canoes, we took the opportunity of a breeze, which sprung up at east, and having stopped our leak, and got the fresh stock which we had purchased on board, we sailed out of the harbour. When we were sailing away, Tupia strongly urged me to fire a shot towards Bolabola, possibly as a mark of his resentment, and to shew the power of his new allies: in this I thought proper to gratify him, though we were seven leagues distant.</p>
              <p>While we were about these islands, we expended very little of the ship's provisions, and were plentifully supplied with hogs, fowls, plantains, and yams, which we hoped would have been of great use to us in our
<pb xml:id="n118" n="106"/>
course to the southward; but the hogs would not eat European grain of any kind, pulse, or bread-dust, so that we could not preserve them alive; and the fowls were all very soon seized with a disease that affected the head so, that they continued to hold it down between their legs till they died: much dependance therefore must not be placed in live stock taken on board at these places, at least not till a discovery is made of some food that the hogs will eat, and some remedy for the disease of the poultry.</p>
              <p>Having been necessarily detained at Ulietea so long, by the carpenters in stopping our leak, we determined to give up our design of going on shore at Bolabola, especially as it appeared to be difficult of access.</p>
              <p>To these six islands, Ulietea, Otaha, Bolabola, Huaheine, Tubai, and Maurua, as they lie contiguous to each other, I gave the names of <hi rend="sc">Society Islands</hi>, but did not think it proper to distinguish them separately by any other names than those by which they were known to the natives.</p>
              <p>They are situated between the latitude of 16° 10′ and 16° 55′ S. and between the longitude of 150° 17′ and 152° W. from the meridian of Greenwich. Ulietea and Otaha lie within about two miles of each other, and are both inclosed within one reef of coral rocks, so that there is no passage for shipping between them. This reef forms several excellent harbours; the entrances into them, indeed, are but narrow, yet when a ship is once in, nothing can hurt her. The harbours on the east side have been described already; and on the west side of Ulietea, which is the largest of the two, there are three. The northermost, in which we lay, is called <hi rend="sc">Ohamaneno</hi>: the channel leading into it is about a quarter of a mile wide, and lies between two low sandy islands, which are the northermost on this side; between, or just within the two islands, there is good anchorage in twenty-eight fathom, soft ground. This harbour, though small, is preferable to the others, because it is situated in the most fertile part of the island, and where fresh water is easily to be got. The other two harbours lie to the southward of this, and not far from the south end of the island: in both of them there is good anchorage, with ten, twelve,
<pb xml:id="n119" n="107"/>
and fourteen fathom. They are easily known by three small woody islands at their entrance. The southermost of these two harbours lies within, and to the southward of the southermost of these islands; and the other lies between the two northermost. I was told that there were more harbours at the south end of this island, but I did not examine whether the report was true.</p>
              <p>Otaha affords two very good harbours, one on the east side, and the other on the west. That on the east side is called Ohamene, and has been mentioned already; the other is called <hi rend="sc">Oherurua</hi>, and lies about the middle of the south-west side of the island; it is pretty large, and affords good anchorage in twenty and twenty-five fathom, nor is there any want of fresh water. The breach in the reef, that forms a channel into this harbour, is about a quarter of a mile broad, and like all the rest is very steep on both sides; in general there is no danger here but what is visible.</p>
              <p>The island of Bolabola lies N. W. and by W. from Otaha, distant about four leagues; it is surrounded by a reef of rocks, and several small islands, in compass together about eight leagues. I was told, that on the south-west side of the island there is a channel through the reef into a very good harbour, but I did not think it worth while to examine it, for the reasons that have been just assigned. This island is rendered very remarkable by a high craggy hill, which appears to be almost perpendicular, and terminates at the top in two peaks, one higher than the other.</p>
              <p>The land of Ulieta and Otaha is hilly, broken, and irregular, except on the sea coast, yet the hills look green and pleasant, and are in many places clothed with wood. The several particulars in which these islands and their inhabitants differ from what we had observed at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, have been mentioned in the course of the narrative.</p>
              <p>We pursued our course without any event worthy of note till the 13th, about noon, when we saw land bearing S. E. which Tupia told us was an island called <hi rend="sc">Oheteroa</hi>. About six in the evening, we were within two or three leagues of it, upon which I shortened sail, and stood off and on all night: the next
<pb xml:id="n120" n="108"/>
morning stood in for the land. We ran to the leeward of the island, keeping close in shore, and saw several of the natives, tho' in no great numbers, upon the beach. At nine o'clock I sent Mr. Gore, one of my lieutenants, in the pinnace, to endeavour to land upon the island, and learn from the natives whether there was anchorage in a bay then in sight, and what land lay further to the southward. Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander accompanied Mr. Gore in this expedition, and as they thought Tupia might be useful, they took him with them.</p>
              <p>As the boat approached the shore, those on board perceived the natives to be armed with long lances; as they did not intend to land until they got round a point which ran out a little distance, they stood along the coast, and the natives therefore very probably thought they were afraid of them. They had now got together to the number of about sixty, and all of them sat down upon the shore, except two, who were dispatched forward to observe the motions of those in the boat. These men, after walking a-breast of her for some time, at length leaped into the water, and swam towards her, but were soon left behind; two more then appeared, and attempted to board her in the same manner, but they also were soon left behind; a fifth man then ran forward alone, and having got a good way a-head of the boat, before he took to the water, easily reached her. Mr. Banks urged the officer to take him in, thinking it a good opportunity to get the confidence and good will of a people, who then certainly looked upon them as enemies, but he obstinately refused; this man therefore was left behind like the others, and so was a sixth, who followed him.</p>
              <p>When the boat had got round the point, she perceived that all her followers had desisted from the pursuit: she now opened a large bay, at the bottom of which appeared another body of men, armed with long lances like the first. Here our people prepared to land, and pushed towards the shore, a canoe at the same time putting off to meet them. As soon as it came near them, they lay upon their oars, and calling out to them, told them that they were friends, and that if they would come up they would give them nails, which were
<pb xml:id="n121" n="109"/>
were held up for them to see: after some hesitation they came up to the boat's stern, and took some nails, that were offered them, with great seeming satisfaction; but in less than a minute they appeared to have formed a design of boarding the boat, and making her their prize: three of them suddenly leaped into it, and the others brought up the canoe, which the motion in quitting her had thrown off a little, manifestly with a design to follow their associates, and support them in their attempt. The first that boarded the boat, entered close to Mr. Banks, and instantly snatched his powder-horn out of his pocket; Mr. Banks seized it, and with some difficulty wrenched it out of his hand, at the same time pressing against his breast, in order to force him over-board, but he was too strong for him, and kept his place; the officer then snapped his piece, but it missed fire, upon which he ordered some of the people to fire over their heads; two pieces were accordingly discharged, upon which they all instantly leaped into the water; one of the people, either from cowardice or cruelty, or both, levelled a third piece at one of them as he was swimming away, and the ball grazed his forehead; happily, however, the wound was very slight, for he recovered the canoe, and stood up in her, as active and vigorous as the rest. The canoe immediately stood in for the shore, where a great number of people, not less than two hundred, were now assembled. The boat also pushed in, but found the land guarded all round with a shoal, upon which the sea broke with a considerable surf; it was therefore thought advisable by the officer to proceed along the shore in search of a more convenient landing-place: in the mean time the people on board saw the canoe go on shore, and the natives gather eagerly round her to enquire the particulars of what had happened. Soon after, a single man ran along the shore, armed with his lance, and when he came a-breast of the boat, he began to dance, brandish his weapon, and call out in a very shrill tone, which Tupia said was a defiance from the people. The boat continued to row along the shore, and the champion followed it, repeating his defiance by his voice and his gestures; but no better landing-place being found than that where the canoe
<pb xml:id="n122" n="110"/>
had put the natives on shore, the officer turned back with a view to attempt it there, hoping, that if it should not be practicable, the people would come to a conference, either on the shoals or in their canoes, and that a treaty of peace might be concluded with them.</p>
              <p>As the boat rowed slowly along the shore back again, another champion came down, shouting defiance, and brandishing his lance; his appearance was more formidable than that of the other, for he wore a large cap made of the tail-feathers of the tropic bird, and his body was covered with stripes of different coloured cloth, yellow, red, and brown. This gentleman also danced, but with much more nimbleness and dexterity than the first; our people therefore, considering his agility and his dress, distinguished him by the name of <hi rend="sc">Harlequin</hi>. Soon after a more grave and elderly man came down to the beach, and haling the people in the boat, enquired who they were, and from whence they came? Tupia answered in their own language, “from <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>.” The three natives then walked peaceably along the shore till they came to a shoal, upon which a few people were collected; here they stopped, and after a short conference, they all began to pray very loud: Tupia made his responses, but continued to tell us that they were not our friends. When their prayer, or, as they call it, their Poorah, was over, our people entered into a parley with them, telling them, that if they would lay by their lances and their clubs, for some had one and some the other, they would come on shore, and trade with them for whatever they would bring: they agreed, but it was only upon condition that we would leave behind us our musquets: this was a condition which, however equitable it might appear, could not be complied with, nor indeed would it have put the two parties upon an equality, except their numbers had been equal. Here then the negociation seemed to be at an end; but in a little time they ventured to come nearer to the boat, and at last came near enough to trade, which they did very fairly, for a small quantity of their cloth, and some of their weapons; but as they gave our people no hope of provisions, nor indeed any thing else, except they would venture through a narrow channel to the shore,
<pb xml:id="n123" n="111"/>
which, all circumstances considered, they did not think it prudent to do, they put off the boat and left them.</p>
              <p>With the ship and the boat we had now made the circuit of the island, and finding that there was neither harbour nor anchorage about it, and that the hostile disposition of the people would render landing impracticable, without bloodshed, I determined not to attempt it, having no motive that could justify the risk of life.</p>
              <p>The bay which the boat entered lies on the west side of the island, the bottom was soul and rocky, but the water so clear that it could plainly be seen at the depth of five and twenty fathom, which is one hundred and fifty feet.</p>
              <p>This island is situated in the latitude of 22° 27′ S. and in the longitude of 150° 47′ W. from the meridian of Greenwich. It is thirteen miles in circuit, and rather high than low, but neither populous nor fertile, in proportion to the other islands that we had seen in these seas. The chief produce seems to be the tree of which they make their weapons, called in their language Etoa; many plantations of it were seen along the shore, which is not surrounded, like the neighbouring islands, by a reef.</p>
              <p>The people seemed to be lusty and well-made, rather browner than those we had left: under their arm-pits they had black marks about as broad as the hand, the edges of which formed not a strait but an indented line; they had also circles of the same colour, but not so broad, round their arms and legs, but were not marked on any other part of the body.</p>
              <p>Their dress was very different from any that we had seen before, as well as the cloth of which it was made. The cloth was of the same materials as that which is worn in the other islands, and most of that which was seen by our people was dyed of a bright but deep yellow, and covered on the outside with a composition like varnish, which was either red, or of a dark lead-colour; over this ground it was again painted in stripes of many different patterns, with wonderful regularity, in the manner of our striped silks in England; the cloth was painted red, and striped with black, and that which
<pb xml:id="n124" n="112"/>
was painted lead-colour with white. Their habit was a short jacket of this cloth, which reached about as low as their knees; it was of one piece, and had no other making than a hole in the middle of it, stitched round with long stitches, in which it differed from all that we had seen before; through this hole the head was put, and what hung down was confined to their bodies by a piece of yellow cloth or sash, which passing round the neck behind, was crossed upon the breast, and then collected round the waist like a belt, which passed over another belt of red cloth, so that they made a very gay and warlike appearance. Some had caps of the feathers of the tropic bird, which have been before described, and some had a piece of white or lead coloured cloth wound about the head, like a small turban, which our people thought more becoming.</p>
              <p>Their arms were long lances, made of the Etoa, the wood of which is very hard; they were well polished and sharpened at one end; some were near twenty feet long, though not more than three fingers thick. They had also a weapon which was both club and pike, made of the same wood, about seven feet long; this also was well polished, and sharpened at one end into a broad point. As a guard against these weapons, when they attack each other, they have mats folded up many times, which they place under their clothes from the neck to the waist; the weapons themselves indeed are capable of much less mischief than those of the same kind which we saw at the other islands, for the lances were there pointed with the sharp bone of the sting-ray that is called the sting, and the pikes were of much greater weight. The other things that we saw here were all superior in their kind to any we had seen before; the cloth was of a better colour in the dye, and painted with greater neatness and taste; the clubs were better cut and polished, and the canoe, though a small one, was very rich in ornament, and the carving was executed in a better manner; among other decorations peculiar to this canoe was a line of small white feathers, which hung from the head and stern on the outside, and which, when we saw them, were thoroughly wetted by the spray.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n125" n="113"/>
              <p>Tupia told us, that there were several islands lying at different distances and in different directions from this, between the south and the north-west; and that at the distance of three days sail to the north-east there was an island called <hi rend="sc">Manua</hi>, Bird-island: he seemed, however, most desirous that we should sail to the westward, and described several islands in that direction, which he said he had visited: he told us that he had been ten or twelve days in going thither, and thirty in coming back, and that the Pahie in which he had made the voyage, sailed much faster than the ship: reckoning his Pahie therefore to go at the rate of forty leagues a-day, which, from my own observation, I have great reason to think these boats will do, it would make four hundred leagues in ten days, which I compute to be the distance of Boscawen and Keppel's Islands, discovered by <name type="person" key="name-150152">Captain Wallis</name>, westward of Ulietea, and therefore think it very probable that they were the islands he had visited. The farthest island that he knew any thing of to the south ward, he said, lay at the distance of about two days sail from Oteroah, and was called <hi rend="sc">Moutou</hi>; but he said that his father had told him there were islands to the southward of that: upon the whole, I was determined to stand southward in search of a continent, but to spend no time in searching for islands, if we did not happen to fall in with them during our course.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <pb xml:id="n126"/>
          <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2" type="section">
            <head><hi rend="lsc">An</hi> <hi rend="c">Account</hi> <hi rend="sc">of a</hi> <hi rend="c">Voyage</hi> round the <hi rend="c">World</hi>. <hi rend="c">Book II</hi>.</head>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d1" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. I</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">The Passage from Oteroah to New Zealand; Incidents which happened on going a-sbore there, and while the Ship lay in Poverty-Bay</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="sc">We</hi> sailed from Oteroah on the 15th of August, and on Friday the 25th we celebrated the anniversary of our leaving England, by taking a Cheshire cheese from a locker, where it had been carefully treasured up for this occasion, and tapping a cask of porter, which proved to be very good, and in excellent order. On the 29th, one of the sailors got so drunk, that the next morning he died: we thought at first that he could not have come honestly by the liquor, but we afterwards leardned that the boatswain, whose mate he was, had, in mere good-nature, given him part of a bottle of rum.</p>
              <p>On the 30th we saw the comet; at one o'clock in the morning it was a little above the horizon in the eastern part of the heavens; at about half an hour after four it passed the meridian, and its tail subtended an
<pb xml:id="n127" n="115"/>
angle of forty-two degrees. Our latitude was 38° 20′ S. our longitude, by log, 147° 6′ W. and the variation of the needle, by the azimuth, 7° 9′ E. Among others that observed the comet was Tupia, who instantly cried out, that as soon as it should be seen by the people of Bolabola, they would kill the inhabitants of Ulietea, who would with the ulmost precipitation fly to the, mountains.</p>
              <p>On the Ist of September, being in the latitude of 40° 22′ S. and longitude 174° 29′ W. and there not being any signs of land, with a heavy sea from the westward, and strong gales, I wore, and stood back to the northward, fearing that we might receive such damage in our sails and rigging, as would hinder the prosecution of the voyage.</p>
              <p>On the next day, there being strong gales to the westward, I brought to, with the ship's head to the northward; but in the morning of the 3d, the wind being, more moderate, we loosened the reef of the main-sail, set the top-sails, and plied to the westward.</p>
              <p>We continued our course till the 19th, when our latitude being 29° and our longitude 159° 29′, we observed the variation to be 8° 32′ E. On the 24th, being in latitude 33° 18′, longitude 162° 51′, we observed a small piece of sea-weed, and a piece of wood covered with barnacles: the variation here was 10° 48′ E.</p>
              <p>On the 27th, being in latitude 28° 59′, longitude 169° 5, we saw a seal asleep upon the water and several bunches of sea-weed. The next day we saw more sea-weed in bunches, and on the 29th, a bird, which we thought a land-bird; it somewhat resembled a snipe, but had a short bill. On the Ist of October, we saw birds innumerable, and another seal asleep upon the water; it is a general opinion that seals never go out of soundings, or far from land, but those that we saw in these seas prove the contrary. Rock-weed is, however, a certain indication that land is not far distant. The next day, it being calm, we hoisted out the boat, to try whether there was a current, but found none. Our latitude was 37° 10′, longitude 172° 54′ W. On the 3d, being in latitude 36° 56′, longitude 173° 27′, we took up more sea-weed, and another piece of wood costvered
<pb xml:id="n128" n="116"/>
with barnacles. The next day we saw two more seals, and a brown bird, about as big as a raven, with some white feathers under the wing. Mr. Gore told us, that birds of this kind were seen in great numbers about Falklnd's Islands, and our people gave them the name of Port-Egmont hens.</p>
              <p>On the 5th, we thought the water changed colour, but, upon casting the lead, had no ground with 180 fathom. In the evening of this day, the variation was 12° 50′ E. nd while we were going nine leagues it encreased to 14° 2′.</p>
              <p>On the next day, Friday, October 6th, we saw land from the mast-head, bearing W. by N. and stood directly for it; in the evening it could just be discerned from the deck, and appeared large. The variation this day was, by azimuth and amplitude, 15° 4′ ½ E. and, by observation made of the sun and moon, the longitude of the ship appeared to be 180° 55′ W. and by the medium of this and subsequent observations, there appeared to be an error in the ship's account of longitude, during her run from <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, of 3° 16, she being so much to the westward of the longitude resulting from the log. At midnight, I brought to and sounded, but had no ground with one hundred and seventy fathom.</p>
              <p>On the 7th, it sell calm, we therefore approached the land slowly; and in the afternoon, when a breeze sprung up, we were still distant seven or eight leagues. It appeared still larger as it was more distinctly seen, with four or five ranges of hills rising one over the other, and chain of mountains above all, which appeared to be of an enormous height. This land became the subject of much eager conversation; but the general opinion seemed to be, that we had found the Terra australis incognitia. About five o'clock, we saw the opening of a bay, which seemed to run pretty far inland, upon which we hauled our wind and stood in for it; we also saw smoke ascending from different places on shore. When night came on, however, we kept plying off and on till day-light, when we found ourselves to the leeward of the bay, the wind being at north. We could now perceive that the hills were
<pb xml:id="n129" n="117"/>
clothed with wood, and that some of the trees in the vallies were very large. By noon, we fetched in with the south-west point, but not being able to weather it, tacked and stood off: at this time we saw several canoes standing cross the bay, which, in a little time, made to shore, without seeming to take the least notice of the ship; we also saw some houses, which appeared to be small, but neat; and near one of them a considerable number of the people collected together, who were sitting upon the beach, and who, we thought, were the same that we had seen in the canoes. Upon a small peninsula, at the north-east head, we could plainly perceive a pretty high and regular paling, which inclosed the whole top of a hill; this was also the subject of much speculation, some supposing it to be a park of deer, others an inclosure for oxen and sheep. About four o'clock in the afternoon, we anchored on the northwest side of the bay, before the entrance of a small river, in ten fathom water, with a fine sandy bottom, and at about half a league from the shore. The sides of the bay are white cliffs, of a great height; the middle is low land, with hills gradually rising behind, one towering above another, and terminating in the chain of mountains, which appeared to be far inland.</p>
              <p>In the evening I went on shore, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, with the pinnace and yawl, and a party of men. We landed a-breast of the ship, on the east side of the river, which was here about forty yards broad; but seeing some natives on the west side, whom I wished to speak with, and finding the river not fordable, I ordered the yawl in to carry us over, and left the pinnace at the entrance. When we came near the place where the people were assembled, they all ran away; however, we landed, and leaving four boys to take care of the yawl, we walked up to some huts which were about two or three hundred yards from the water-side. When we had got some distance from the boat, four men, armed with long lances, rushed out of the woods, and running up to attack the boat, would certainly have cut her off, if the people in the pinnace had not discovered them, and called to the boys to drop down the
<pb xml:id="n130" n="118"/>
stream: the boys instantly obeyed; but being closely pursued by the Indians, the cockswain of the pinnace, who had the charge of the boats, fired a musquet over their heads; at this they stopped and looked round them, but in a few minutes renewed the pursuit, brandishing their lances in a threatening manner; the cockswain then fired a second musquet over their heads, but of this they took no notice; and one of them listing up his spear to dart it at the boat, another piece was fired, which shot him dead. When he fell, the other three stood motionless for some minutes, as if petrified with astonishment; as soon as they recovered they went back, dragging after them the dead body, which, however, they soon left, that it might not incumber their flight. At the report of the first musquet we drew together, having straggled to a little distance from each other, and made the best of our way back to the boat, and, crossing the river, we soon saw the Indian lying dead upon the ground. Upon examining the body we found that he had been shot through the heart. He was a man of middle, size and stature, his complexion was brown, but not very dark, and one side of his face was tattowed in spiral lines of a very regular figure; he was covered with a fine cloth, of a manufacture altogether new to us, and it was tied on exactly according to the representation in Valentyn's account of <name type="person" key="name-034630">Abel Tasman</name>'s Voyage, hereafter given; his hair also was tied in a knot on the top of his head, but had no feather in it. We returned immediately to the ship, where we could hear the people on shore talking with great earnestness, and in a very loud tone, probably about what had happened, and what should be done.</p>
              <p>In the morning, we saw several of the natives where they had been seen the night before, and some walking with a quick pace towards the place where we had landed, most of them unarmed, but three or four with long pikes in their hands. As I was desirous to establish an intercourse with them, I ordered three boats to be manned with seamen and marines, and proceeded towards the shore, accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, the other gentlemen, and Tupia; about fifty of them seemed to wait for our landing, on the
<pb xml:id="n131" n="119"/>
opposite side of the river, which we thought a sign of fear, and seated themselves upon the ground. At first, therefore, myself, with only Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Tupia, landed from the little boat, and advanced towards them; but we had not proceeded many paces before they all started up, and every man produced either a long pike, or a small weapon of green talc, extremely well polished, about a foot long, and thick enough to weigh four or five pounds. Tupia called to them in the language of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, but they answered only by flourishing their weapons, and making signs to us to depart. A musquet was then fired wide of them, and the ball struk the water, the river being still between us; they saw the effect, and desisted from their threats, but we thought it prudent to retreat till the marines could be landed: this was soon done, and they marched, with a jack carried before them, to a little bank, about fifty yards from the water side; here they were drawn up, and I again advanced, with Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander; Tupia, Mr. Green, and Mr. Monkhouse being with us. Tupia was again directed to speak with them, and it was with great pleasure that we perceived he was perfectly understood, he and the natives speaking only different dialects of the same language. He told them that we wanted provision and water, and would give them iron in exchange, the properties of which he explained as well as he was able. They were willing to trade, and desired that we would come over to them for that purpose; to this we consented, provided they would lay by their arms, which, however, they could by no means be persuaded to do. During this conversation, Tupia warned us to be upon our guard, for that they were not our friends. We then pressed them, in our turn, to come over to us; and at last one of them stripped himself, and swam over without his arms; he was almost immediately followed by two more, and soon after by most of the rest, to the number of twenty or thirty; but these brought their arms with them. We made them all presents of iron and beads, but they seemed to set little value upon either, particularly the iron, not having the lead idea of its use; so that we got nothing in return but a few feathers. They offered,
<pb xml:id="n132" n="120"/>
indeed, to exchange their arms for ours, and, when we refused, made many attempts to snatch them out of our hands. As soon as they came over, Tupia repeated his declaration, that they were not our friends, and again warned us to be upon our guard. Their attempts to snatch our weapons, therefore, did not succeed; and we gave them to understand by Tupia, that we should be obliged to kill them if they offered any farther violence. In a few minutes, however, Mr. Green happening to turn about, one of them snatched away his hanger, and, retiring to a little distance, waved it round his head, with a shout of exultation: the rest now began to be extremely insolent, and we saw more coming to join them from the opposite side of the river. It was therefore become necessary to repress them, and Mr. Banks fired at the man who had taken the hanger with small shot, at the distance of about fifteen yards: when the shot struck him he ceased his cry; but, instead of returning the hanger, continued to flourish it over his head, at the same time slowly retreating to a greater distance. Mr. Monkhouse seeing this, fired at him with ball, and he instantly dropped. Upon this the main body, who had retired to a rock in the middle of the river upon the first discharge, began to return; two that were near to the man who had been killed, ran up to the body, one seized his weapon of green talc, and the other endeavoured to secure the hanger, which Mr. Monkhouse had but just time to prevent. As all that had retired to the rock were now advancing, three of us discharged our pieces, loaded only with small shot, upon which they swam back for the shore; and we perceived, upon their landing, that two or three of' them were wounded. They retired slowly up the country, and we re-embarked in our boats.</p>
              <p>As we had unhappily experienced that nothing was to be done with these people at this place, and finding the water in the river to be salt, I proceeded in the boats round the head of the bay, in search of fresh water, and with a design, if possible, to surprise some of the natives, and take them on board, where, by kind treatment and presents, I might obtain their friendship,
<pb xml:id="n133" n="121"/>
and by their means establish an amicable correspondence with their countrymen.</p>
              <p>To my great regret, I found no place where I could land, a dangerous surf every where beating upon the shore; but I saw two canoes coming in from the sea, one under sail, and the other worked with paddles. I thought this a favourable opportunity to get some of the people into my possession without mischief, as those in the canoes were probably fishermen, and without arms, and I had three boats full of men. I therefore disposed the boats so, as most effectually to intercept them in their way to the shore. The people in the canoe that was paddled perceived us so soon, that by making to the nearest land with their utmost strength, they escaped us; the other sailed on till she was in the midst of us, without discerning what we were; but the moment she discovered us, the people on board struck their sail, and took to their paddles, which they plied so briskly that she out-ran the boat. They were, however, within hearing, and Tupia called out to them to come along side, and promised for us that they should come to no hurt; they chose, however, rather to trust to their paddles than our promises, and continued to make from us with all their power. I then ordered a musquet to be fired over their heads, as the least exceptionable expedient to accomplish my design, hoping it would either make them surrender or leap into the water. Upon the discharge of the piece they ceased paddling, and all of them, being seven in number, began to strip, as we imagined to jump over board; but it happened otherwise. They immediately formed a resolution not to fly, but to fight; and, when the boat came up, they began the attack with their paddles, and with stones and other offensive weapons that were in the canoe, so vigoroufly, that we were obliged to fire upon them in our own defence; four were unhappily killed, and the other three, who were boys, the eldest about nineteen, and the youngest about eleven, instantly leaped into the water; the eldest swam with great vigour, and resisted the attempts of our people to take him into the boat, by every effort that he could make; he was, however, at last
<pb xml:id="n134" n="122"/>
overpowered, and the other two were taken up with less difficulty. I am conscious that the feeling of every reader of humanity will censure me, for having fired upon these unhappy people; and it is impossible that, upon a calm review, I should approve it myself. They certainly did not deserve death, for not choosing to conside in my promises, or not consenting to come on board my boat, even if they had apprehended no danger; but the nature of my service required me to obtain a knowledge of their country, which I could no otherwise effect than by forcing my way into it in a hostile manner, or gaining admission through the considence and goodwill of the people. I had already tried the power of presents without effect; and I was now prompted, by my desire to avoid further hostilities, to get some of them on board, as the only method left of convincing them that we intended them no harm, and had it in our power to contribute to their gratification and convenience. Thus far my intentions certainly were not crimnal; and though in the contest, which I had not the least reason to expect, our victory might have been complete without so great an expense of life, yet in such situations, when the command to fire has been given, no man can restrain its excess, or prescribe its effect.</p>
              <p>As soon as the poor wretches whom we had taken out of the water were in the boat, they squatted down, expecting, no doubt, instantly to be put to death: we made haste to convince them of the countrary, by every method in our power; we furnished them with clothes, and gave them every other testimony of kindness, that could remove their fears and engage their good-will. Those who are acquainted with human nature will not wonder, that the sudden joy of these young savages, at being unexpectly delivered from the fear of death, and kindly treated by those whom they supposed would have been their instant executioners, surmounted their concern for their friends they had lost, and was strongly expressed in their countenances and behaviour. Before we reached the ship, their suspicious and fears being wholly removed, they appeared to be not only reconciled to their situation but in high spirits; and upon being offered some bread when they came on
<pb xml:id="n135" n="123"/>
board, they devoured it with a voracious appetite. They answered and asked many questions, with great appearance of pleasure and curiosity, and when our dinner came, they expressed an inclination to taste every thing that they saw; they seemed best pleased with the salt pork, though we had other provisions upon the table. At sun-set they eat another meal with great eagerness, each devouring a large quantity of bread, and drinking above a quart of water. We then made them beds upon the lockers, and they went to sleep with great seeming content. In the night, however, the tumult of their minds having subsided, and given way to reflection, they sighed often and loud. Tupia, who was always upon the watch to comfort them, got up, and, by soothing and encouragement, made them not only easy but cheerful; their cheerfulness was encouraged so that they sung a song with a degree of taste that surprised us; the tune was solemn and slow, like those of our Psalms, containing many notes and semitones. Their countenances were intelligent and expressive, and the middlemost, who seemed to be about fifteen, had an openness in his aspect, and an ease in his deportment, which were very striking: we found that the two eldest were brothers, and that their names were <hi rend="sc">Taahourange</hi> and <hi rend="sc">Koikerange</hi>; the name of the youngest was <hi rend="sc">Maragovete</hi>. As we were returning to the ship, after having taken these boys into the boat, we picked up a large piece of pumice-stone floating upon the water; a sure sign that there either is or has been a volcano in this neighbourhood.</p>
              <p>In the morning, they all seemed to be cheerful, and eat another enormous meal; after this we dressed them, and adorned them with bracelets, anclets, and necklaces, after their own fashion, and the boat being hoisted out, they were told that we were going to set them a-shore; this produced a transport of joy; but upon perceiving that we made towards our first landing place, near the river, their countenances changed, and they entreated with great earnestness that they might not be set a-shore at that place, because, they said, it was inhabited by their enemies, who would kill them and eat them. This was a great disappointment
<pb xml:id="n136" n="124"/>
to me, because I hoped the report and appearance of the boys would procure a favourable reception for ourselves. I had already sent an officer on shore with the marines and a party of men to cut wood, and I was determined to land near the place; not, however, to abandon the boys, if when we got ashore they should be unwilling to leave us, but to send a boat with them in the evening to that part of the bay to which they pointed, and which they called their home. Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Tupia were with me, and upon our landing with the boys, and crossing the river, they seemed at first to be unwilling to leave us; but at length they suddenly changed their minds, and, though not without a manifest struggle and some tears, they took their leave. When they were gone, we proceeded along a swamp, with a design to shoot some ducks, of which we saw great plenty, and four of the marines attended us, walking a-breast of us upon a bank that overlooked the country. After we had advanced about a mile, these men called out to us, and told us, that a large body of the Indians was in sight, and advancing at a great rate. Upon receiving this intelligence, we drew together, and resolved to make the best of our way to the boats. We had scarcely begun to put this into execution when the three Indian boys started suddenly from some bushes, where they had concealed themselves, and again claimed our protection; we readily received them, and repairing to the beach as the clearest place, we walked briskly towards the boats. The Indians were in two bodies, one ran along the bank, which had been quitted by the marines, the other setched a compass by the swamp, so that we could not see them. When they perceived that we had formed into one body they slackened their pace, but still followed us in a gentle walk. That they slackened their pace, was for us, as well as for them, a fortunate circumstance; for when we came to the side of the river, where we expected to find the boats that were to carry us over to the wooders, we found the pinnace at least a mile from her station, having been sent to pick up a bird, which had been shot by the officer on shore; and the little boat was obliged to make three trips before we could all get over to the
<pb xml:id="n137" n="125"/>
rest of the party. As soon as we were drawn up on the other side, the Indians came down, not in a body as we expected, but by two or three at a time, all armed, and in a short time their number increased to about two hundred. As we now despaired of making peace with them, seeing that the dread of our small arms did not keep them at a distance, and that the ship was too far off to reach the place with a shot, we resolved to re-embark, lest our stay should embroil us in another quarrel, and cost more of the Indians their lives; we therefore advanced towards the pinnace, which was now returning, when one of the boys suddenly cried out, that his uncle was among the people who had marched down to us, and desired us to stay and talk with them. We complied, and a parley immediately commenced between them and Tupia; during which the boys held up every thing we had given them, as tokens of our kindness and liberality; but neither would either of the boys swim over to them, or any of them to the boys. The body of the man, who had been killed the day before, still lay exposed upon the beach; the boys seeing it lie very near us, went up to it, and covered it with some of the clothes that we had given them; and soon after a single man, unarmed, who proved to be the uncle of Maragovete, the youngest of the boys, swam over to us, bringing in his hand a green branch, which we supposed, as well here as at Qtaheite, to be an emblem of peace. We received his, branch by the hands of Tupia, to whom he gave it, and made him many presents; we also invited him to go on board the ship, but he declined it; we therefore left him, and expected that his nephew and the two other young Indians would have stayed with him, but, to our great surprize, they chose rather to go with us. As soon as we had returned, he went and gathered another green branch, and with this in his hand he approached the dead body which the youth had covered with part of his clothes, walking sideways, with many ceremonies, and then throwing it towards him; when this was done, he returned to his companions, who had sat down upon the sand to observe the issue of his negociation. They immediately gathered round him, and continued in a body
<pb xml:id="n138" n="126"/>
above an hour, without seeming to take any farther notice of us. We were more curious than they, and observing them with our glasses from on board the ship, we saw some of them cross the river upon a kind of raft, or catamarine, and four of them carry off the dead body which had been covered by the boy, and over which his uncle had performed the ceremony of the branch, upon a kind of bier, between four men; the other body was still suffered to remain where it had been first left.</p>
              <p>After dinner, I directed Tupia to ask the boys, if they had now any objection to going ashore where we had left their uncle, the body having been carried off which we understood was a ratification of peace? They said they had not: and the boat being ordered, they went into it with great alacrity. When the boat, in which I had sent two midshipmen, came to land, they went willingly ashore; but soon after she put off they returned to the rocks, and, wading into the water, earnestly entreated to be taken on board again; but the people in the boat, having positive orders to leave them, could not comply. We were very attentive to what happened on shore, and keeping a constant watch with our glasses, we saw a man pass the river upon another raft, and fetch them to a place where forty or fifty of the natives were assembled, who closed round them, and continued in the same place till sun-set: upon looking again, when we saw them in motion, we could plainly distinguish our three prisoners, who separated themselves from the rest, came down to the beach, having waved their hands three times towards the ship, ran nimbly back and joined their companions, who walked leisurely away towards that part which the boys had pointed to as their dwelling-place; we had therefore the greatest reason to believe that no mischief would-happen to them, especially as we perceived that they went off in the clothes we had given them.</p>
              <p>After it was dark, loud voices were heard on shore in the bottom of the bay, as usual, of which we could never learn the meaning.</p>
            </div>
            <pb xml:id="n139" n="127"/>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d2" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. II</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">A Description of Poverty Bay, and the Face of the adjacent Country. The Range from thence to Cape Turn-again, and back to Tolaga; with some Account of the People and the Country, and several Incidents that bappened on that Part of the Coast</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="c">The</hi> next morning, at six o'clock, we weighed, and stood away from this unfortunate and inhospitable place, to which I gave the name of <hi rend="sc">Poverty-Bay</hi>, and which by the natives is called <hi rend="sc">Taoneroa</hi>, or Long Sand, as it did not afford us a single article that we wanted, except a little wood. It lies in latitude 38° 42′ S. and longitude 181° 36′ W. it is in the form of an horse shoe, and is known by an island lying close under the north-east point. The two points which form the entrance are high, with steep white cliffs, and lie a league and a half or two leagues from each other, N. E. by E. and S. W. by W. the depth of water in the bay is from twelve to five fathom, with a sandy bottom and good anchorage; but the situation is open to the wind between the south and east; boats can go in and out of the river at any time of the tide in fine weather; but as there is a bar at the entrance, no boat can go either in or out when the sea runs high. The best place to attempt it is on the north-east side, and it is there practicable when it is not so in any other part. The shore of the bay, a little within its entrance, is a low flat sand, behind which, at a small distance, the face of the country is finely diversified by hills and vallies, all clothed with wood and covered with verdure. The country also appears to be well inhabited, especially in the vallies leading up from the bay, where we daily saw smoke rising in clouds one behind another to a great distance, till the view terminated in mountains of a stupendous height.</p>
              <p>The south-west point of the bay I named <hi rend="sc">Young Nick's Head</hi>, after Nicholas Young, the boy who first saw the land: at noon it bore N. W. by W. distant about three or four leagues, and we were then about three miles from the shore. The main land
<pb xml:id="n140" n="128"/>
extended from N. E. by N. to S. and I proposed to follow the direction of the coast to the southward as far as the latitude of 40 or 41, and then, if I met with no encouragement to proceed farther, to return to the northward.</p>
              <p>In the afternoon we lay becalmed, which the people on shore perceiving, several canoes put off, and came within less than a quarter of a mile of the vessel, but could not be persuaded to come nearer, though Tupia exerted all the powers of his lungs and his eloquence upon the occasion, shouting, and promising that they should not be hurt. Another canoe was now seen coming from Poverty-Bay, with only four people on board, one of whom we well remembered to have seen in our first interview upon the rock. This canoe, without stopping, or taking the least notice of the others, came directly along side of the ship, and with very little persuasion we got the Indians on board. Their example was soon followed by the rest, and we had about us seven canoes, and about fifty men. We made them all presents with a liberal hand, notwithstanding which they were so desirous to have more of our commodities, that they sold us every thing they had, even the clothes from their backs, and the paddles from their boats. There were but two weapons among them, these were the instruments of green tale, which were shaped somewhat like a pointed battledore, with a short handle and sharp edges; they were called Patoo-Patoo, and were well contrived for close fighting, as they would certainly split the thickest scull at a single blow.</p>
              <p>When these people had recovered from the first impressions of fear, which notwithstanding their resolution in coming on board, had manifestly thrown them into some confusion, we enquired after our poor boys. The man who first came on board immediately answered, that they were unhurt and at home; adding, that he had been induced to venture on board, by the account which they had given him of the kindness with which they had been treated, and the wonders that were in the ship.</p>
              <p>While they were on board they shewed every sign of friendship, and invited us very cordially to go back
<pb xml:id="n141" n="129"/>
back to our old bay, or to a small cove which they pointed out, that was not quite so far off; but I chose rather to prosecute my discoveries than go back, having reason to hope that I should find a better harbour than any I had yet seen.</p>
              <p>About an hour before sun-set, the canoes put off from the ship with the few paddles they had reserved, which were scarcely sufficient to set them on shore; but by some means or other three of their people were left behind. As soon as we discovered it we hailed them, but not one of them would return to take them on board; this greatly surprized us; but we were surprized still more to observe, that the deserted Indians did not seem at all uneasy at their situation, but entertained us with dancing and singing after their manner, eat their suppers, and went quietly to bed.</p>
              <p>A light breeze springing up soon after it was dark, we steered along the shore under an easy sail till midnight, and then brought to, soon after which it fell calm. We were now some leagues distant from the place where the canoes had left us, and at day-break, when the Indians perceived it, they were seized with consternation and terror, and lamented their situation in loud complaints, with gestures of despair and many tears. Tupia, with great difficulty, pacified them; and about seven o'clock in the morning, a light breeze springing up, we continued to stand south-west along the shore. Fortunately for our poor Indians, two canoes came off about this time, and made towards the ship; they stopped, however, at a little distance, and seemed unwilling to trust themselves nearer. Our Indians were greatly agitated in this state of uncertainty, and urged their fellows to come along-side of the ship, both by their voice and gestures, with the utmost eagerness and impatience. Tupia interpreted what they said, and we were much surprized to find, that, among other arguments, they assured the people in the canoe, we did not eat men. We now began seriously to believe, that this horrid custom prevailed among them; for what the boys had said, we considered as a mere hyperbolical expression of their fear. One of the canoes, at length, ventured to come under the ship's side; and an old man came on board, who seemed to be a
<pb xml:id="n142" n="130"/>
Chief, from the finery of his garment, and the superiority of his weapon, which was a Patoo-Patoo made of bone, that, as he said, had belonged to a whale. He stayed on board but a short time, and when he went away he took with him our guests, very much to the satisfaction both of them and us.</p>
              <p>At the time when we sailed we were a-breast of a point, from which the land trends S. S. W. and which, on account of its figure, I called <hi rend="sc">Cape Table</hi>. This point lies seven leagues to the southward of Poverty-Bay, in latitude 39° 7 S. and longitude 181° 36′ W. It is of a considerable height, makes in a sharp angle, and appears to be quite flat at the top.</p>
              <p>In steering along the shore to the southward of the Cape, at the distance of two or three miles, our soundings were from twenty to thirty fathom, having a chain of rocks between us and the shore, which appeared at different heights above the water.</p>
              <p>At noon, Cape Table bore N. 20 E. distant about four leagues, and a small island, which was the southermost land in sight, bore S. 70 W. at the distance of about three miles. This island, which the natives call <hi rend="sc">Teahowary</hi>, I named the <hi rend="sc">Island of Portland</hi>, from its very great resemblance to Portland in the English channel; it lies about a mile from a point on the main, but there appears to be a ridge of rocks, extending nearly, if not quite, from one to the other. N. 57 E. two miles from the south point of Portland, lies a sunken rock, upon which the sea breaks with great violence. We passed between this rock and the land, having from seventeen to twenty fathom.</p>
              <p>In sailing along the shore, we saw the natives assembled in great numbers, as well upon Portland Island as the main. We could also distinguish several spots of ground that were cultivated; some seemed to be fresh turned up, and lay in furrows like ploughed land, and some had plants upon them in different stages of their growth. We saw also, in two places, high rails upon the ridges of hills, like what we had seen upon the peninsula at the north-east head of Poverty-Bay; as they were ranged in lines only, and not so as to inclose an area, we could not guess at their use, and therefore supposed they might be the work of superstition.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n143" n="131"/>
              <p>About noon, another canoe appeared, in which were four men; she came within about a quarter of a mile of us, where the people on board seemed to perform divers ceremonies. One of them, who was in the bow, sometimes seemed to ask and to offer peace, and sometimes to threaten war, by brandishing a weapon that he held in his hand; sometimes also he danced, and sometimes he sung. Tupia talked much to him, but could not persuade him to come to the ship.</p>
              <p>Between one and two o'clock, we discovered land to the westward of Portland, extending to the southward as far as we could see; and as the ship was hauling round the south end of the island, she suddenly fell into shoal water and broken ground; we had indeed always seven fathom or more, but the soundings were never twice the same, jumping at once from seven fathom to eleven; in a short time, however, we got clear of all danger, and had again deep water under us.</p>
              <p>At this time the island lay within a mile of us, making in white cliffs, and a long spit of low land running from it towards the main. On the sides of these cliffs sat great numbers of people, looking at us with a fixed attention; and, it is probable, that they perceived some appearance of hurry and confusion on board, and some irregularity in the working of the ship, while we were getting clear of the shallow water and broken ground, from which they might infer that we were alarmed or in distress; we thought that they wished to take advantage of our situation, for five canoes were put off with the utmost expedition, full of men, and well armed; they came so near, and shewed so hostile a disposition, by shouting, brandishing their lances, and using threatening gestures, that we were in some pain for our small boat, which was still employed in sounding; a musket was therefore fired over them, but finding it did them no harm, they seemed rather to be provoked than intimidated, and I therefore fired a four pounder, charged with grape-shot, wide of them. This had a better effect. Upon the report of the piece, they all rose up and shouted; but instead of continuing the chace, drew all together, and after a short consultation went quietly away.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n144" n="132"/>
              <p>Having got round Portland, we hauled in for the land N. W. having a gentle breeze at N. E. which about five o'clock died away, and obliged us to anchor. We had one and twenty fathom, with a fine sandy bottom: the south point of Portland bore S. E. ½ S. distant about two leagues; and a low point on the main bore N. ½ E. In the same direction with this low point, there runs a deep bay, behind the land of which Cape Table is the extremity, so as to make this land a peninsula, leaving only a low narrow neck between that and the main. Of this peninsula, which the natives call <hi rend="sc">Terakako</hi>, Cape Table is the north point, and Portland the south.</p>
              <p>While we lay at anchor, two more canoes came off to us, one armed, and the other a small fishing-boat, with only four men in her. They came so near that they entered into conversation with Tupia. They answered all the questions that he asked them with great civility, but could not be persuaded to come on board; they came near enough, however, to receive several presents that were thrown to them from the ship, with which they seemed much pleased, and went away. During the night many fires were kept on shore, probably to shew us that the inhabitants were too much upon their guard to be surprized.</p>
              <p>About five o'clock in the morning of the 13th, a breeze springing up northerly, we weighed, and steered in for the land. The shore here forms a large bay, of which Portland is the north-east point, and the bay that runs behind Cape Table an arm. This arm I had a great inclination to examine, because there appeared to be safe anchorage in it; but not being sure of that, and the wind being right an end, I was unwilling to spare the time. Four and twenty fathom was the greatest depth with Portland, but the ground was every where clear. The land near the shore is of a moderate height, with white cliffs and sandy beaches; within it rises into mountains; and, upon the whole, the surface is hilly, for the most part covered with wood, and to appearance pleasant and fertile. In the morning nine canoes came after the ship,
<pb xml:id="n145" n="133"/>
ship, but whether with peaceable or hostile intentions we could not tell, for we soon left them behind us.</p>
              <p>In the evening we stood in for a place that had the appearance of an opening, but found no harbour; we therefore stood out again, and were soon followed by a large canoe, with eighteen or twenty men all armed, who, though they could not reach us, shouted defiance, and brandished their weapons, with many gestures of menace and insult.</p>
              <p>In the morning, we had a view of the mountains inland, upon which the snow was still lying: the country near the shore was low and unfit for culture, but in one place we perceived a patch of somewhat yellow, which had greatly the appearance of a corn field, yet was probably nothing more than some dead flags, which are not uncommon in swampy places: at some distance we saw groves of trees, which appeared high and tapering, and being not above two leagues from the south-west cod of the great bay, in which we had been coasting for the two last days, I hoisted out the pinnace and long-boat to search for fresh water; but just as they were about to put off, we saw several boats full of people coming from the shore, and therefore I did not think it safe for them to leave the ship. About ten o'clock, five of these boats having drawn together, as if to hold a consultation, made towards the ship, having on board between eighty and ninety men, and four more followed at some distance, as if to sustain the attack. When the first five came within about a hundred yards of the ship, they began to sing their war song, and, brandishing their pikes, prepared for an engagement. We had now no time to lose, for if we could not prevent the attack, we should come under the unhappy necessity of using our fire arms against them, which we were very desirous to avoid. Tupia was therefore ordered to acquaint them, that we had weapons which, like thunder, would destroy them in a moment; that we would immediately convince them of their power, by directing their effect so that they should not be hurt; but that if they persisted in any hostile attempts, we should be obliged to use them for our defence. A four pounder, loaded with grape-shot
<pb xml:id="n146" n="134"/>
was then discharged wide of them, which produced the desired effect; the report, the flash, and above all, the shot, which spread very far in the water, so intimidated them, that they began to paddle away with all their might: Tupia, however, calling after them, and assuring them that if they would come un-armed, they should be kindly received, the people in one of the boats put their arms on board of another, and came under the ship's stern: we made them several presents, and should certainly have prevailed upon them to come on board, if the other canoes had not come up, and again threatened us, by shouting and brandishing their weapons: at this the people who had come to the ship unarmed, expressed great displeasure, and soon after they all went away.</p>
              <p>In the afternoon we stood over to the south point of the bay, but not reaching it before it was dark, we stood off and on all night. At eight the next morning, being a-breast of the point, several fishing boats came off to us, and sold us some stinking fish: it was the best they had, and we were willing to trade with them upon any terms: these people behaved very well and should have parted good friends if it had not been for a large canoe, with two and twenty armed men on board, which came boldly up along-side of the ship. We soon saw that this boat had nothing for traffick, yet we gave them two or three pieces of cloth, an article which they seemed very fond of. I observed that one man had a black skin thrown over him, somewhat resembling that of a bear, and being desirous to know what animal was its first owner, I offered him for it a piece of red baize, and he seemed greatly pleased with the bargain, immediately pulling off the skin, and holding it up in the boat; he would not, however, part with it till he had the cloth in his possession, and as there could be no transfer of property, if with equal caution I had insisted upon the same condition, I ordered the cloth to be handed down to him, upon which, with amazing coolness, instead of sending up the skin, he began to pack up both that and the baize, which he had received as the purchase of it, in a basket, without paying the least regard to my demand or remonstrances, and soon after, with the fishing boats, put
<pb xml:id="n147" n="135"/>
off from the ship; when they were at some distance, they drew together, and after a short consultation returned; the fishermen offered more fish, which, though good for nothing, was purchased, and trade was again renewed. Among others who were placed over the ship's side to hand up what we bought, was little Tayeto, Tupia's boy; and one of the Indians, watching his opportunity, suddenly seized him, and dragged him down into the canoe; two of them held him down in the fore-part of it, and the others, with great activity, paddled her off, the rest of the canoes following as fast as they could: upon this the marines who were under arms upon deck, were ordered to fire. The shot was directed to that part of the canoe which was farthest from the boy, and rather wide of her, being willing rather to miss the rowers than to hurt him: it happened, however, that one man dropped, upon which the others quitted their hold of the boy, who instantly leaped into the water, and swam towards the ship; the large canoe immediately pulled round and followed him, but some musquets, and a great gun being fired at her, she desisted from the pursuit. The ship being brought to, a boat was lowered, and the poor boy taken up unhurt, though so terrified that for a time be seemed to be deprived of his senses. Some of the gentlemen who traced the canoes to shore with their glasses, said, that they saw three men carried up the beach, who appeared to be either dead or wholly disabled by their wounds.</p>
              <p>To the cape off which this unhappy transaction happened, I gave the name of <hi rend="sc">Cape Kidnappers</hi>. It lies in latitude 39° 43′, and longitude 182° 24′ W. and is rendered remarkable by two white rocks like hay stacks, and the high white cliffs on each side. It lies S. W. by W. distant thirteen leagues from the isle of Portland; and between them is the bay of which it is the south point, and which, in honour of <name type="person" key="name-400658">Sir Edward Hawke</name>, then first Lord of the Admiralty, I called <hi rend="sc">Hawke's Bay</hi>. We found in it from twenty-four to seven fathom, and good anchorage. From Cape Kidnappers the land trends S. S. W. and in this direction we made our run along the shore, keeping at
<pb xml:id="n148" n="136"/>
about a league distance, with a steady breeze and clear weather.</p>
              <p>As soon as Tayeto recovered from his fright, he brought a fish to Tupia, and told him, that he intended it as an offering to his Eatua, or god, in gratitude for his escape. Tupia commended his piety, and ordered him to throw the fish into the sea, which was accordingly done.</p>
              <p>About two o'clock in the afternoon, we passed a small but high white island, lying close to the shore, upon which we saw many houses, boats, and people. The people were concluded to be fishers, because the island was totally barren; we saw several people also on shore, in a small bay upon the main, within the island. At eleven, we brought to till day light, and then made sail to the southward, along the shore. About seven o'clock we past a high point of land, which lies S. S.W. twelve leagues from Cape Kidnappers: from this point the land trends three fourths of a point more to the westward: at ten, we saw more land open to the southward, and at noon, the southermost land that was in sight bore S. 39 W. distant eight or ten leagues, and a high bluff head, with yellowish cliffs, bore W. distant about two miles: the depth of water was thirty-two fathom.</p>
              <p>In the afternoon we had a fresh breeze at west, and during the night variable light airs and calms: in the morning a gentle breeze sprung up between the N. W. and N. E. and having till now stood to the southward, without seeing any probability of meeting with a harbour, and the country manifestly altering for the worse, I thought that standing farther in that direction would be attended with no advantage, but on the contrary would be a loss of time that might be employed with a better prospect of success in examining the coast to the northward; about one, therefore, in the afternoon, I tacked, and stood north, with a fresh breeze at west. The high bluff head, with yellowish cliffs, which we were a-breast of at noon, I called <hi rend="sc">Cape Turnagain</hi>, because here we turned back. It lies in latitude 40° 34′ S. longitude 182° 55 W. distant eighteen leagues S. S. W. ½ W. from Cape Kidnappers. The land between them is of a very unequal height; in some places
<pb xml:id="n149" n="137"/>
places it is lofty next the sea with white cliffs, in others low, with sandy beaches: the face of the country is not so well clothed with wood as it is about Hawke's bay, but looks more like our high downs in England: it is, however, to all appearance, well inhabited, for as we stood along the shore, we saw several villages, not only in the vallies, but on the tops and sides of the hills, and smoke in many other places. The ridge of mountains, which has been mentioned before, extends to the southward farther than we could see, and was then every where chequered with snow. At night we saw two fires inland, so very large, that we concluded they must have been made to clear the land for tillage; but however that be, they are a demonstration that the part of the country where they appeared is inhabited.</p>
              <p>On the 18th, at four o'clock in the morning, Cape Kidnappers bore N. 32 W. distant two leagues: in this situation we had sixty-two fathom, and when the Cape bore W. by N. distant three or four leagues, we had forty five fathom: in the mid-way between the isle of Portland and the Cape we had sixty-five fathom. In the evening, being a-breast of the peninsula within Portland island, called <hi rend="sc">Terakako</hi>, a canoe came off from that shore, and with much difficulty overtook the ship; there were on board five people, two of whom appeared to be Chiefs, and the other three servants: the Chiefs, with very little invitation, came on board, and ordered the rest to remain in their canoe. We treated them with great kindness, and they were not backward in expressing their satisfaction; they went down into the cabin, and after a short time told us that they had determined not to go on shore till the next morning. As the sleeping on board was an honour which we neither expected nor desired, I remonstrated strongly against it, and told them, that on their account it would not be proper, as the ship would probably be at a great distance from where she was then, the next morning: they persisted, however, in their resolution, and as I found it impossible to get rid of them without turning them by force out of the ship, I complied: as a proper precaution, however, I proposed to take their servants also on board, and hoist their
<pb xml:id="n150" n="138"/>
canoe into the ship; they made no objection, and this was accordingly done. The countenance of one of these Chiefs was the most open and ingenuous of all I have ever seen, and I very soon gave up every suspicion of his having any sinister design: they both examined every thing they saw with great curiosity and attention, and received very thankfully such little presents as we made them; neither of them, however, could be persuaded, either to eat or drink, but their servants devoured every thing they could get with great voracity. We found that these men had heard of our kindness and liberality to the natives who had been on board before, yet we thought the confidence they placed in us, an extraordinary instance of their fortitude. At night I brought to till day-light, and then made sail; at seven in the morning, I brought to again under Cape Table, and sent away our guests with their canoe, who expressed some surprise at seeing themselves so far from home, but landed a-breast of the ship. At this time I saw other canoes putting off from the shore, but I stood away to the northward without waiting for their coming up.</p>
              <p>About three I passed a remarkable head-land, which I called <hi rend="sc">Gable-End Foreland</hi>, from the very great likeness of the white cliff at the point to the gable-end of a house: it is not more remarkable for its figure, than for a rock which aises like a spire at a little distance. It lies from Cape Table N. 24 E. distant about twelve leagues. The shore between them forms a bay, within which lies Poverty Bay, at the distance of four leagues from the head-land, and eight from the Cape. At this place three canoes came off to us, and one man came on board; we gave him some trifles, and he soon returned to his boat, which, with all the rest, dropped a-stern.</p>
              <p>In the morning I made sail in shore, in order to look into two bays, which appeared about two leagues to the northward of the Foreland; the southermost I could not fetch, but I anchored in the other about eleven o'clock.</p>
              <p>Into this bay we were invited by the people on board many canoes, who pointed to a place where they said there was plenty of fresh water: I did not find so
<pb xml:id="n151" n="139"/>
good a shelter from the sea as I expected, but the natives who came about us, appearing to be of a friendly disposition, I was determined to try whether I could not get some knowledge of the country here before I proceeded farther to the northward.</p>
              <p>In one of the canoes that came about us as soon as we anchored, we saw two men, who, by their habits, appeared to be Chiefs: one of them was dressed in a jacket, which was ornamented, after their manner, with dog's skin; the jacket of the other was almost covered with small tufts of red feathers. These men I invited on board, and they entered the ship with very little hesitation: I gave each of them about four yards of linen and a spike-nail; with the linen they were much pleased, but seemed to set no value upon the nail. We perceived that they knew what had happened in Poverty-bay, and we had therefore no reason to doubt but that they would behave peaceably; however, for further security, Tupia was ordered to tell them for what purpose we came thither, and to assure them that we would offer them no injury, if they offered none to us. In the mean time those who remained in the canoes traded with our people very fairly for what they happened to have with them: the Chiefs, who were old men, staid with us till we had dined, and about two o'clock I put off with the boats, manned and armed, in order to go on shore in search of water, and the two Chiefs went into the boat with me. The afternoon was tempestuous, with much rain, and the surf every where ran so high, that altho' we rowed almost round the bay, we found no place where we could land: I determined therefore to return to the ship, which being intimated to the Chiefs, they called to the people on shore, and ordered a canoe to be sent off for themselves; this was accordingly done, and they left us, promising to come on board again in the morning, and bring us some fish and sweet potatoes.</p>
              <p>In the evening, the weather having become fair and moderate, the boats were again ordered out, and I landed, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander. We were received with great expressions of friendship by the natives, who behaved with a scrupulous attention not to give offence. In particular, they took care not to appear
<pb xml:id="n152" n="140"/>
in great bodies: one family, or the inhabitants of two or three houses only, were generally placed together, to the number of fifteen or twenty, consisting of men, women, and children. These little companies sat upon the ground, not advancing towards us, but inviting us to them, by a kind of beckon, moving one hand towards the breast. We made them several little presents; and in our walk round the bay found two small streams of fresh water. This convenience, and the friendly behaviour of the people, determined me to stay at least a day, that I might fill some of my empty casks, and give Mr. Banks an opportunity of examining the natural produce of the country.</p>
              <p>In the morning of the 21 st, I sent Lieutenant Gore on shore, to superintend the watering, with a strong party of men; and they were soon followed by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, with Tupia, Tayeto, and four others.</p>
              <p>The natives sat by our people, and seemed pleased to observe them; but did not intermix with them: they traded, however, chiefly for cloth, and after a short time applied to their ordinary occupations, as if no stranger had been among them. In the forenoon several of their boats went out a-fishing, and at dinner-time every one repaired to his respective dwelling; from which, after a certain time, he returned. These fair appearances encouraged Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander to range the bay with very little precaution, where they found many plants, and shot some birds of exquisite beauty. In their walk, they visited several houses of the natives, and saw something of their manner of life; for they shewed, without any reserve, every thing which the gentlemen desired to see. They were sometimes found at their meals, which the approach of the strangers never interrupted. Their food at this season consisted of fish, with which, instead of bread, they eat the root of a kind of fern, very like that which grows upon our commons in England. These roots they scorch over the fire, and then beat with a stick, till the bark and dry outside fall off, what remains is a soft substance, somewhat clammy and sweet, not unpleasing to the taste, but mixed with three or four times its quantity of strings and fibres, which are very disagreeable; these were
<pb xml:id="n153" n="141"/>
were swallowed by some, but spit out by the far greater number, who had baskets under them to receive the rejected part of what had been chewed, which had an appearance very like that of tobacco in the same state. In other seasons they have certainly plenty of excellent vegetables; but no tame animals were seen among them, except dogs, which were very small and ugly. Mr. Banks saw some of their plantations, where the ground was as well broken down and tilled as even in the gardens of the most curious people among us: in these spots were sweet potatoes, coccos or eddas, which are well known and much esteemed both in the East and West-Indies, and some gourds: the sweet potatoes were planted in small hills, some ranged in rows, and others in quincunx, all laid by a line with the greatest regularity: the coccos were planted upon flat land, but none of them yet appeared above ground; and the gourds were set in small hollows, or dishes, much as in England. These plantations were of different extent, from one or two acres to ten: taken together, there appeared to be from 150 to 200 acres in cultivation in the whole bay, tho' we never saw an hundred people. Each district was fenced in, generally with reeds, which were placed so close together, that there was scarcely room for a mouse to creep between.</p>
              <p>The women were plain, and made themselves more so by painting their faces with red ocre and oil, which being generally fresh, and wet upon their cheeks and foreheads, was easily transferred to the noses of those who thought fit to salute them; and that they were not wholly averse to such familiarity, the noses of several of our people strongly testified: they were, however, as great coquets as any of the most fashionable ladies in Europe, and the young ones as skittish as any unbroken filly: each of them wore a petticoat, under which there was a girdle, made of the blades of grass, highly perfumed, and to the girdle was fastened a small bunch of the leaves of some fragrant plant, which served their modesty as its innermost veil. The faces of the men were not so generally painted, yet we saw one whose whole body, and even his garments, were rubbed over with dry ocre, of which he kept a piece constantly in
<pb xml:id="n154" n="142"/>
his hand, and was every minute renewing the decoration in one part or another, where he supposed it was become deficient. In personal delicacy they were not equal to our friends at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, for the coldness of the climate did not invite them so often to bathe; but we saw among them one instance of cleanliness in which they exceeded them, and of which perhaps there is no example in any other Indian nation. Every house, or every little cluster of three or four houses, was furnished with a privy, so that the ground was every where clean. The offals of their food, and other litter, were also piled up in regular dunghills, which probably they made use of at a proper time for manure.</p>
              <p>In this decent article of civil oeconomy they were beforehand with one of the most considerable nations of Europe; for I am credibly informed, that, till the year 1760, there was no such thing as a privy in Madrid, the metropolis of Spain, though it is plentifully supplied with water. Before that time it was the universal practice to throw the ordure out of the windows, during the night, into the street, where numbers of men were employed to remove it, with shovels, from the upper parts of the city to the lower, where it lay till it was dry, and was then carried away in carts, and deposited without the gates. His present Catholic Majesty, having determined to free his capital from so gross a nuisance, ordered, by proclamation, that the proprietor of every house should build a privy, and that sinks, drains, and common-sewers should be made at the public expence. The Spaniards, tho' long acoustomed to an arbitrary government, resented this proclamation with great spirit, as an infringement of the common rights of mankind, and made a vigorous struggle against its being carried into execution. Every class devised some objection against it; but the physicians bid the fairest to interest the king in the preservation of the ancient privileges of his people; for they remonstrated that if the filth was not, as usual, thrown into the streets, a fatal sickness would probably ensue, because the putrescent particles of the air, which such filth attracted, would then be imbibed by the human body. But this expedient, with every other that could be thought of,
<pb xml:id="n155" n="143"/>
proved unsuccessful, and the popular discontent then ran so high, that it was very near producing an insurrection; his Majesty, however, at length prevailed, and Madrid is now as clear as most of the considerable cities in Europe. But many of the citizens, probably upon the principles advanced by their physicians, that heaps of filth prevent deleterious particles of air from fixing upon neighbouring substances, have, to keep their food wholesome, constructed their privies by the kitchen fire.</p>
              <p>In the evening, all our boats being employed in carrying the water on board, and Mr. Banks and his company finding it probable that they should be lest on shore after it was dark, by which much time would be lost, which they were impatient to employ in putting the plants they had gathered in order, they applied to the Indians for a passage in one of their canoes: they immediately consented, and a canoe was launched for their use. They went all on board, being eight in number, but not being used to a vessel that required so even a balance, they unfortunately overset her in the surf: no life however was lost, and it was thought advisable that half of them should wait for another turn. Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, Tupia, and Tayeto embarked again, and without any further accident arrived safely at the ship, well pleased with the good-nature of their Indian friends, who chearfully undertook to carry them a second time, after having experienced how unfit a freight they were for such a vessel.</p>
              <p>While these gentlemen were on shore, several of the natives went off to the ship, and trafficked, by exchanging their cloth for that of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>: of this barter they were for some time very fond, preferring the Indian, cloth to that of Europe; but before night it decreased in its value five hundred per cent. Many of these Indians I took on board, and shewed them the ship and her apparatus, at which they expressed equal satisfaction and astonishment.</p>
              <p>As I found it exceedingly difficult to get water on board, on account of the surf, I determined to stay no longer at this place; on the next morning therefore, about five o'clock, I weighed anchor and put to sea.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n156" n="144"/>
              <p>This bay, which is called by the natives <hi rend="sc">Tegadoo</hi>, lies in the latitude of 38° 10′ S. but as it has nothing to recommend it, a description of it is unnecessary.</p>
              <p>From this bay I intended to stand on to the northward, but the wind being hard against me, I could make no way. While I was beating about to windward, some of the natives came on board, and told me, that in a bay which lay a little to the southward, being the same that I could not fetch the day I put into Tegadoo, there was excellent water, where the boats might land without a surf. I thought it better therefore to put into this bay, where I might compleat my water, and form farther connections with the Indians, than to keep the sea. With this view I bore up for it, and sent in two boats, manned and armed, to examine the watering-place, who confirming the report of the Indians at their return, I came to an anchor about one o'clock, in eleven fathom water, with a fine sandy bottom, the north point of the bay N. by E. and the south point S. E. The watering-place which was in a small cove a little within the south point of the bay, bore S. by E. distant about a mile. Many canoes came immediately off from the shore, and all traded very honestly for <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name> cloth and glass bottles, of which they were immoderately fond.</p>
              <p>In the afternoon of the 23d, as soon as the ship was moored, I went on shore to examine the wateringplace, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander: the boat landed in the cove, without the least surf; the water was excellent, and conveniently situated; there was plenty of wood close to high-water mark, and the disposition of the people was in every respect such as we could wish.</p>
              <p>Having, with Mr. Green, taken several observations of the sun and moon, the mean result of them gave 180° 47′W. longitude; but, as all the observations made before exceeded these, I have laid down the coast from the mean of the whole. At noon, I took the sun's meridian altitude with an astronomical quadrant, which was set up at the watering-place, and found the latitude to be 38° 22′ 14″.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n157" n="145"/>
              <p>On the 24th, early in the morning, I sent lieutenant Gore on shore, to superintend the cutting of wood and filling of water, with a sufficient number of men for both purposes, and all the marines as a guard. After breakfast, I went on shore myself, and continued there the whole day.</p>
              <p>Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander also went on shore to gather plants, and in their walks saw several things worthy of notice. They met with many houses in the vallies that seemed to be wholly deserted, the people living on the ridges of the hills in a kind of sheds very slightly built. As they were advancing in one of these vallies, the hills on each side of which were very steep, they were suddenly struck with the sight of a very extraordinary natural curiosity. It was a rock, perforated through its whole substance, so as to form a rude but stupendous arch or cavern, opening directly to the sea; this aperture was seventy-five feet long, twenty-seven broad, and five-and-forty high, commanding a view of the bay and the hills on the other side, which were seen through it, and, opening at once upon the view, produced an effect far superior to any of the contrivances of art.</p>
              <p>As they Were returning to the watering-place in the evening, they met an old man, who detained them some time by shewing them the military exercises of the country with the lance and Patoo-Patoo, which are all the weapons in use. The lance is from ten to fourteen feet long, made of a very hard wood, and sharp at both ends: the Patoo-Patoo has been described already; it is about a foot long, made of talc or bone, with sharp edges, and used as a battle-axe. A post or stake was set up as his enemy, to which he advanced with a most surious aspect, brandishing his lance, which he grasped with great firmness; when it was supposed to have been pierced by his lance, he ran at it with his Patoo-Patoo, and falling upon the upper end of it, which was to represent his adversary's head, he laid on with great vehemence, striking many blows, any one of which would probably have split the scull of an ox. From our champion's falling upon his mock enemy with the Patoo-Patoo, after he was supposed to have been piereed
<pb xml:id="n158" n="146"/>
with the lance, our gentlemen inferred, that in the battles of this country there is no quarter.</p>
              <p>This afternoon, we set up the armourer's forge, to repair the braces of the tiller which had been broken, and went on getting our wood and water, without suffering the least molestation from the natives; who came down with different forts of fish, which we purchased with cloth, beads, and glass bottles, as usual.</p>
              <p>On the 25th, Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander went again on shore; and while they were searching for plants, Tupia staid with the waterers: among other Indians who came down to them, was a priest, with whom Tupia entered into a very learned conversation. In their notions of religion they seemed to agree very well, which is not often the case between learned divines on our side of the ocean: Tupia, however, seemed to have the most knowledge, and was listened to with great deference and attention by the other. In the course of this conversation, after the important points of divinity had been settled, Tupia enquired if it was their practice to eat men, to which they answered in the affirmative; but said that they eat only their enemies who were slain in battle.</p>
              <p>On the 26th, it rained all day, so that none of us could go a-shore; and very few of the Indians came either to the watering-place or the ship.</p>
              <p>On the 27th, I went with Dr. Solander to examine the bottom of the bay; but though we went a-shore at two places, we met with little worth notice. The people behaved very civilly, shewing us every thing that we expressed a desire to see. Among other trifling curiosities which Dr. Solander purchased of them, was a boy's top, shaped exactly like those which children play with in England; and they made signs that to make it spin it was to be whipped. Mr. Banks in the mean time went ashore at the watering-place, and climbed a hill which stood at a little distance to see a fence of poles, which we had observed from the ship, and which had been much the subject of speculation. The hill was extremely steep, and rendered almost inaccessible by wood; yet he reached the place, near which he found many houses that for some reason had been deserted by their inhabitants. The poles appeared
<pb xml:id="n159" n="147"/>
to be about sixteen feet high; they were placed in two rows, with a space of about six feet between them, and the poles in each row were about ten feet distant from each other. The lane between them was covered by sticks, that were set up sloping towards each other from the top of the poles on each side, like the roof of a house. This rail-work, with a ditch that was parallel to it, was carried about a hundred yards down the hill in a kind of curve; but for what purpose we could not guess.</p>
              <p>The Indians, at the watering-place, at our request, entertained us with their war-song, in which the women joined, with the most horrid distortions of countenance, rolling their eyes, thrusting out their tongues, and often heaving loud and deep sighs; though all was done in very good time.</p>
              <p>On the 28th we went ashore upon an island that lies to the left hand of the entrance of the bay, where we saw the largest canoe that we had yet met with: she was sixty eight feet and a half long, five broad, and three feet six high; the had a sharp bottom, consisting of three trunks of trees hollowed, of which that in the middle was the longest: the side planks were sixty-two feet long in one piece, and were not despicably carved in bass relief: the head also was adorned with carving still more richly. Upon this island there was a larger house than any we had yet seen; but it seemed unfinished and was full of chips. The wood work was squared so even and smooth, that we made no doubt of their having among them very sharp tools. The sides of the posts were carved in a masterly stile, though after their whimsical taste, which seems to prefer spiral lines and distorted faces: as these carved posts appeared to have been brought from some other place, such work is probably of great value among them.</p>
              <p>At four o'clock in the morning of the 29th, having got on board our wood and water, and a large supply of excellent celery, with which the country abounds, and which proved a powerful antiscorbutic, I unmoored and put to sea.</p>
              <p>This bay is called by the natives <hi rend="sc">Tolaga</hi>; it is moderately large, and has from seven to thirteen fathom,
<pb xml:id="n160" n="148"/>
with a clean sandy bottom and good anchorage; and is sheltered from all winds except the north-east. It lies in latitude 38° 22′ S. and sour leagues and an half to the north of Gable-end Foreland. On the south point lies a small but high island, so near the main as not to be distinguished from it. Close to the north end of the island, at the entrance into the bay, are two high rocks; one is round like a corn-stack, but the other is long, and perforated in several places, so that the openings appear like the arches of a bridge. Within these rocks is the cove where we cut wood, and filled our water casks. Off the north point of the bay is a pretty high rocky island; and about a mile without it, are some rocks and breakers. The variation of the compass here is 14° 31 E. and the tide flows at the full and change of the moon, about six o'clock, and rises and falls perpendicularly from five to six feet: whether the flood comes from the southward or the northward, I have not been able to determine.</p>
              <p>We got nothing here by traffic bat a few fish, and some sweet potatoes, except a few trifles, which we considered merely as curiosities. We saw no four-footed animals, nor the appearance of any, either tame or wild, except dogs and rats, and these were very scarce; the people eat the dogs, like our friends at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>; and adorn their garments with the skins, as we do ours with fur and ermine. I climbed many of the hills, hoping to get a view of the country, but I could see nothing from the top except higher hills, in a boundlets succession. The ridges of these hills produce little besides fern; but the sides are most luxuriantly clothed with wood, and verdure of various kinds, with little plantations intermixed; in the woods we found trees of above twenty different forts, and carried specimens of each on board; but there was no body among us to whom they were not altogether unknown. The tree which we cut for firing was somewhat like our maple, and yielded a whitish gum. We found another sort of it of a deep yellow, which we thought might be used in dying. We found also one cabbage-tree, which we cut down for the cabbages. The country abounds with plants, and the woods with birds, in an endless variety, exquisitely beautiful, and of which none of us had the
<pb xml:id="n161" n="149"/>
least knowledge. The soil both of the hills and vallies is light and sandy, and very fit for the production of all kinds of roots; though we saw none except sweet potatoes and yams.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d3" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. III</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">The Range from Tolaga to Mercury-Bay, with an Account of many Incidents that happened both on board and a-shore. A Description of several Views exhibited by the Country, and of the Heppahs, or forfeited Villages of the Inbatitants</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="sc">On</hi> Monday the 30th, about half an hour after one o'clock, having made sail again to the northward for about ten hours, with a light breeze, I hauled round a small island, which lay east one mile from the north-east point of the land: from this place I found the land trend away N. W. by W. and W. N. W. as far as I could see. This point being the eastermost land on the whole coast, I gave it the name of <hi rend="sc">East Cape</hi>, and I called the island that lies off it the <hi rend="sc">East Island</hi>; it is of a small circuit, high and round, and appears white and barren; the Cape is high with white cliffs, and lies in latitude 37° 42′ 30″ S. and longitude 181°W. The land from Tolaga Bay to East Cape is of a moderate, but unequal height, forming several small bays, in which are sandy beaches: of the inland country we could not see much, the weather being cloudy and hazy. The soundings were from twenty to thirty fathom at the distance of about a league from the shore. After we had rounded the Cape, we saw in our run along the shore a great number of villages, and much cultivated land; the country in general appeared more fertile than before, and was low near the sea, but hilly within. At six in the evening, being four leagues to the westward of East Cape, we passed a bay which was first discovered by Lieutenant Hicks, and which therefore I called <hi rend="sc">Hicks's Bay</hi>. At eight in the evening, being eight leagues to the westward of the Cape, and three or four miles from the shore, I shortened sail and brought to for the night, having at this time
<pb xml:id="n162" n="150"/>
a fresh gale at S. S. E. and squally; but it soon became moderate, and at two in the morning, we made sail again to the S. W. as the land now trended; and at eight o'clock in the morning saw land, which made like an island, bearing west, the south-westermost part of the main bearing south-west; and about nine no less than five canoes came off, in which were more than forty men, all armed with their country pikes and battle-axes, shouting, and threatening an attack: this gave us great uneasiness, and was indeed what we did not expect; for we hoped, that the report both of our power and clemency had spread to a greater extent. When one of these canoes had almost reached the ship, another, of an immense size, the largest we had yet seen, crowded with people who were also armed, put off from the shore, and came up at a great rate; as it approached it received signals from the canoe that was nearest to the ship, and we could see that it had sixteen, paddles on a side, beside people that sat, and others that stood in a row from stem to stern, being in all about sixty men: as they made directly to the ship, we were desirous of preventing an attack, by shewing what we could do; and therefore fired a gun, loaded with grape shot, a-head of them; this made them stop, but not retreat; a round shot was then fired over them, and upon seesing it fall, they seized their paddles and made towards the shore with such precipitation, that they seemed scarcely to allow themselves time to breathe. In the evening, three or four more canoes came off unarmed; but they would not venture within a musquet shot of the vessel. The cape, off which we had been threatened with hostilities, I called, from the hasty retreat of the enemy, <hi rend="sc">Cape Runaway</hi>. It lies in latitude 37° 32′; longitude 181° 48′. In this day's run, we found that the land, which made like an island in the morning, bearing west, was so; and we gave it the name of <hi rend="sc">White Island</hi>.</p>
              <p>At day-break, on the first of Nov. we counted no less than five and forty canoes that were coming from the shore towards the ship: seven of them came up with us, and after some conversation with Tupia, sold us some lobsters and muscles, and two conger-eels. These people traded pretty fairly: but when they were gone,
<pb xml:id="n163" n="151"/>
some others came off from another place, who began also to trade fairly; but after some time they took what was handed down to them, without making any return; one of them who had done so, upon being threatened, began to laugh, and with many marks of derision set us at defiance, at the same time putting off the canoe from the ship: a musquet was then fired over his head, which brought him back in a more serious mood, and trade went on with great regularity. At length, when the cabin and gun room had got as much as they wanted, the men were allowed to come to the gang-way, and trade for themselves. Unhappily the same care was not taken to prevent frauds as had been taken before, so that the Indians, finding that they could cheat with impunity, grew insolent again, and proceeded to take greater liberties. One of the canoes, having sold every thing on board, pulled forward, and the people that were in her seeing some linen hang over the ship's side to dry, one of them, without any ceremony, untied it, and put it up in his bundle: he was immediately called to, and required to return it; instead of which, he let his canoe drop a-stern, and laughed at us: a musquet was fired over his head, which did not put a stop to his mirth; another was then fired at him with small shot, which struck him upon the back; he shrunk a little when the shot hit him, but did not regard it more than one of our menwould have done the stroke of a rattan; he continued with great composure to pack up the linen that he had stolen. All the canoes now dropped a-stern about a hundred yards, and all set up their song of defiance, which they continued till the ship was distant from them about four hundred yards. As they seemed to have no design to attack us, I was not willing to do them any hurt; yet I thought their going off in a bravado might have a bad effect when it should be reported a-shore. To shew them therefore that they were still in our power, though very much beyond the reach of any missile weapon with which they were acquainted, I gave the ship a yaw, and fired a four pounder so as to pass near them. The shot happened to strike the water, and rise several times at a great distance beyond the canoes: this struck them with terror,
<pb xml:id="n164" n="152"/>
and they paddled away without once looking behind them.</p>
              <p>About two in the afternoon, we saw a pretty high island, bearing west from us; and at five, saw more islands and rocks to the westward of that. We hauled our wind in order to go with them, but could not weather them before it was dark. I therefore bore up, and ran between them and the main. At seven, I was close under the first, from which a large double canoe, or rather two canoes lashed together at the distance of about a foot, and covered with boards so as to make a deck, put off, and made sail for the ship: this was the first vessel of the kind that we had seen since we left the South Sea islands. When she came near, the people on board entered very freely into conversation with Tupia, and we thought shewed a friendly disposition; but when it was just dark, they ran their canoe close to the ship's side, and threw in a volley of stones, after which they paddled a-shore.</p>
              <p>We learnt from Tupia, that the people in the canoe called the ill and which we were under <hi rend="sc">Mowtohora</hi>: it is but of a small circuit, though high, and lies six miles from the main: on the south side is anchorage in fourteen fathom water. Upon the main land S. W. by W. of this island, and apparently at nogreat distance from the sea, is a high, round mountain, which I called <hi rend="sc">Mount Edgecombe</hi>: it stands in the middle of a large plain, and is therefore the more conspicuous; latitude 37° 59′, longitude 193′ 7′.</p>
              <p>In standing westward, we suddenly shoaled our water from seventeen to ten fathom; and knowing that we were not far from the small islands and rocks which we had seen before dark, and which I intended to have passed before I brought to for the night, I thought it more prudent to tack, and spend the night under Mowtohora, where I knew there was no danger. It was indeed happy for us that we did so; for in the morning, after we had made sail to the westward, we discovered, a-head of us, several rocks, some of which were level with the surface of the water, and some below it: they lay N. N. E. from Mount Edgecombe, one league and a half distant from the island Mowtohora, and about nine miles from the main. We passed between
<pb xml:id="n165" n="153"/>
these rocks and the main, having from ten to seven fathom water.</p>
              <p>This morning, many canoes and much people were seen along the shore; several of the canoes followed us, but none of them could reach us, except one with a sail, which proved to be the same that had pelted us the night before. The people on board again entered into a conversation with Tupia; but we expected another volley of their ammunition, which was not indeed dangerous to any thing but the cabin windows. They continued a-breast of the ship about an hour, and behaved very peaceably; but at last the salute which we expected was given; we returned it by firing a musquet over them, and they immediately dropped a-stern and left us, perhaps rather satisfied with having given a test of their courage, by twice insulting a vessel so much superior to their own, than intimidated by the shot.</p>
              <p>At half an hour after ten, we passed between a low flat island and the main: the distance from one to the other was about four miles, and the depth of water from ten to twelve fathom. The main land between this flat island and Mowtohora is of a moderate height, but level, pretty clear of wood, and full of plantations and villages. The villages, which were larger than any we had yet seen, were built upon eminences near the sea, and fortified on the land side by a bank and ditch, with a high paling within it, which was carried all round; beside a bank, ditch, and pallisadoes, some of them appeared to have out-works. Tupia had a notion that the small inclosures of pallisadoes, and a ditch that we had seen before, were Morais, or places of worship; but were of opinion that they were forts, and concluded that these people had neighbouring enemies, and were always exposed to hostile attacks.</p>
              <p>At two o'clock, we passed a small high island, lying four miles from a high round head upon the main. From this head the land trends N. W. as far as can be seen, and has a rugged and hilly appearance. As the weather was hazy, and the wind blew fresh on the shore, we hauled off for the weathermost island in
<pb xml:id="n166" n="154"/>
sight, which bore from us N. N. E. distant about six or seven leagues.</p>
              <p>Under this island, which I have called the <hi rend="sc">Mayor</hi>, we spent the night. At seven in the morning it bore S. 47 E. distant six leagues, and a cluster of small islands and rocks bore N. ½ E. distant one league, to which I gave the name of the <hi rend="sc">Court of Aldermen</hi>. They lie in the compass of about half a league every way, and five leagues from the main, between which and them lie other islands, most of them barren rocks, of which there is great variety; some of them are as small in compass as the Monument of London, but rise to a much greater height, and some of them are inhabited. They lie in latitude 36° 57′, and at noon bore S. 60 E. distant three or four leagues, and a rock, like a castle, lying not fat from the main, bore N. 40 W. at the distance of one league, The country, that we passed the night before, appeared to be well inhabited, many towns were in sight, and some hundreds of large canoes lay under them upon the beach; but this day, after having failed about fifteen leagues, it appeared to be barren and desolate. As far as we had yet coasted this country, from Cape Turnagain, the people acknowledge one Chief, whom they call <hi rend="sc">Teratu</hi>, and to whose residence they pointed, in a direction that we thought to be very far inland, but afterwards found to be otherwise.</p>
              <p>About one o'clock, three canoes came off to us from the main, with one and-twenty men on board. The construction of these vessels appeared to be more simple than that of any we had seen, they being nothing more than trunks of a single tree hollowed by fire, without any convenience or ornament. The people on board were almost naked, and appeared to be of a browner complexion; yet, naked and despicable as they were, they sung their song of defiance, and seemed to denounce against us inevitable destruction. They remained, however, some time out of stones-throw, and then venturing nearer, with less appearance of hostility, one of our men went to the ship's side, and was about to hand them a rope; this courtesy, however, they thought fit to return by throwing a lance at him, which
<pb xml:id="n167" n="155"/>
having missed him, they immediately threw another into the ship; upon this a musquet was fired over them, which at once sent them away.</p>
              <p>About two, we saw a large opening, or inlet, for which we bore up: we had now forty-one fathom water, which gradually decreased to nine, at which time we were one mile and an half distant from a high towered rock, which lay near the south point of the inlet; this rock, and the northermost of the Court of Aldermen being in one, bearing S. 61 E.</p>
              <p>About seven in the evening, we anchored in seven fathom, a little within the south entrance of the bay. To this place we were accompanied by several canoes, and the people like those we had seen last, and for some time they behaved very civilly. While they were hovering about us, a bird was shot from the ship, as it was swimming upon the water: at this they shewed less surprize than we expected, and taking up the bird they tied it to a fishing-line, that was towing a-stern; as an acknowledgment for this favour we gave them a piece of cloth. But notwithstanding this effect of our fire-arms, and this interchange of civilities, as soon as it grew dark they sung their war song, and attempted to tow away the buoy of the anchor. Two or three muskets were then fired over them, but this seemed rather to make them angry than afraid, and they went away, threatening that to-morrow they would return with more force, and be the death of us all; at the same time sending off a boat, which they told us was going to another part of the bay for assistance.</p>
              <p>There was some appearance of generosity, as well as courage, in acquainting us with the time when they intended to make their attack; but they forfeited all credit which this procured them, by coming secretly upon us in the night, when they certainly hoped to find us asleep: upon approaching the ship they found themselves mistaken, and therefore retired without speaking a word, supposing that they were too early; after some time they came a second time, and being again disappointed, they retired as silently as before.</p>
              <p>In the morning, at day-break, they prepared to effect by force what they had in vain attempted by stealth and artifice; no less than twelve canoes came against
<pb xml:id="n168" n="156"/>
us, with about a hundred and fifty men, all armed with pikes, lances, and stones. As they could do nothing till they came very near the ship, Tupia was ordered to expostulate with them, and, if possible, divert them from their purpose. During the conversation, they appeared to be sometimes friendly, and sometimes other-wise; at length, however, they began to trade, and we offered to purchase their weapons, which some of them consented to sell. They sold two very fairly, but having received what had been agreed upon for the purchase of a third, they refused to send it up, but offered it for a second price; a second was sent down, but the weapon was still detained, and a demand made of a third; this being refused, with some expressions of displeasure and resentment, the offender, with many ludicrous tokens of contempt and defiance, paddled his canoe off a few yards from the ship. As I intended to continue in this place five or six days, in order to make an observation of the transit of Mercury, it was absolutely necessary, in order to prevent future mischief, to shew these people that we were not to be treated ill with impunity; some small shot were therefore fired at the thief, and a musket ball through the bottom of his boat; upon this it was paddled to about a hundred yards distance, and, to our great surprize, the people in the other canoes took not the least notice of their wounded companion, though he bled very much, but returned to the ship, and continued to trade with the most perfect indifference and unconcern. They sold us many more of their weapons, without making any other attempt to defraud us for a considerable time; at last, however, one of them thought fit to paddle away with two different pieces of cloth, which had been given for the same weapon; when he had got about an hundred yards distance, and thought himself secure of his prize, a musket was fired after him, which fortunately struck the boat just at the water's edge, and made two holes in her side; this only incited them to ply their paddles with greater activity, and the rest of the canoes also made off with the utmost expedition. As the last proof of our superiority, therefore, we fired a round shot over them, and not a boat stopped till they got on shore.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n169" n="157"/>
              <p>About ten o'clock, I went with two boats to sound the bay, and look out for a more convenient anchoring place, the master being in one boat, and myself in the other. We pulled first over to the north shore, from which some canoes came out to meet us; as we advanced, however, they retired, inviting us to follow them; but, feeing them well armed, I did not think it proper to comply, but went towards the head of the bay, where I observed a village upon a very high point, fortified in the manner that has been already described, and having fixed upon an anchoring-place not far from where the ship lay, I returned on board.</p>
              <p>At three o'clock in the afternoon I weighed, run in nearer to the shore, and anchored in four fathom and an half water, with a soft sandy bottom, the south point of the bay bearing E. distant one mile, and a river which the boats can enter at low-water S. S .E. distant one mile and an half.</p>
              <p>In the morning, the natives came off again to the ship, and we had the satisfaction to observe that their behaviour was very different from what it had been yesterday. Among them was an old man, whom we had before remarked for his prudence and honesty; his name was <hi rend="sc">Toiava</hi>, and he seemed to be a person of a superior rank. In the transactions of yesterday morning he had behaved with greater propriety and good sense, lying in a small canoe, always near the ship, and treating those on board as if he neither intended a fraud nor suspected an injury: with some persuasion this man and another came on board, and ventured into the cabin, where I presented each of them with a piece of English cloth and some spike-nails. They told us, that the Indians were now very much afraid of us; and, on our part, we promised friendship if they would behave peaceably, desiring only to purchase what they had to sell upon their own terms.</p>
              <p>After the natives had left us, I went with the pinnace and long-boat into the river with a design to haul the seine, and sent the master in the yawl to sound the bay, and dredge for fish. The Indians who were on one side of the river, expressed their friendship by all the signs they could devise, beckoning us to land among them; but we chose to go a-shore on the other side, as the
<pb xml:id="n170" n="158"/>
situation was more convenient for hauling the seine and shooting birds, of which they saw great numbers of various kinds. The Indians, with much persuasion about noon ventured over to us. With the seine we had very little success, catching only a few mullets; neither did we get any thing by the trawl or the dredge, except a few shells; but we shot several birds, most of them resembling sea-pies, except that they had black plumage and red bills and feet. While we were absent with our guns, the people who slayed with the boats saw two of the Indians quarrel and fight; they began the battle with their lances, but some old men interposed and took them away, leaving them to decide the difference, like Englishmen, with their fists. They boxed with great vigour and obstinacy for some time, but by degrees all retired behind a little hill, so that our people could not see the event of the combat.</p>
              <p>In the morning, the long-boat was sent again to trawl in the bay, and an officer, with the marines and a party of men, to cut wood and haul the seine. The Indians on shore appeared very peaceable and submissive, and we had reason to believe that their habitations were at a considerable distance, for we saw no houses, and found that they slept under the bushes. The bay is probably a place to which they frequently resort in parties to gather shell-fish, of which it affords incredible plenty; for wherever we went, whether upon the hills or in the vallies, the woods or the plains, we saw vast heaps of shells, often many waggon-loads together, some appearing to be very old, and others recent. We saw no cultivation in this place, which had a desolate and barren appearance; the tops of the hills were green, but nothing grew there except a large kind of fern, the roots of which the natives had got together in large quantities, in order to carry away with them. In the evening Mr. Banks walked up the river, which at the mouth looked fine and broad, but at the distance of about two miles was not broad enough to cover the foot, and the country inland was still more barren than at the sea-side. The seine and dredge were not more successful to-day than yesterday; but the Indians in some measure compensated for the disappointment, by bringing
<pb xml:id="n171" n="159"/>
us several baskets of fish, some dry, and some fresh dressed; it was not indeed of the best, but I ordered it all to be bought, for the encouragement of trade.</p>
              <p>On the 7th, the weather was so bad that none of us left the ship, nor did any of the Indians come on board.</p>
              <p>On the 8th, I sent a party of men on shore to wood and water; and in the mean time many canoes came off, in one of which was our friend Toiava; soon after he was along-side of the ship, he saw two canoes coming from the opposite side of the bay, upon which he hasted back again to the shore with all his canoes, telling us that he was afraid of the people who were coming. This was a further proof that the people of this country were continually committing hostilities against each other. In a short time, however, he returned, having discovered that the people who had alarmed him were not the same that he had supposed. The natives that came to the ship this morning sold us, for a few pieces of cloth, as much fish, of the mackerel kind, as served the whole ship's company, and they were as good as ever were eaten. At noon, this day, I observed the sun's meridional zenith distance by an astronomical quadrant, which gave the latitude 36° 47′ 43″ within the south entrance of the bay.</p>
              <p>Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander went on shore and collected a great variety of plants, altogether unknown, and, not returning till the evening, had an opportunity of observing in what manner the Indians disposed themselves to pass the night. They had no shelter but a few shrubs; the women and the children were ranged innermost, or farthest from the sea; the men lay in a kind of half circle round them, and their arms were set up against the trees close by them, in a manner which shewed that they were afraid of an attack by some enemy not far distant. It was also discovered, that they acknowledged neither Teratu, nor any other person as their king. As in this particular they differed from all the people that we had seen upon other parts of the coast, we thought it possible that they might be a set of outlaws, in a state of rebellion against Teratu, and in that case they might have no settled habitations, or cultivated land in any part of the country.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n172" n="160"/>
              <p>On the 9th, at day-break, a great number of canoes came on board, loaded with mackerel of two sorts, one exactly the same with those caught in England, and the other somewhat different. We imagined the people had taken a large shoal, and brought us an overplus which they could not consume, for they sold them at a very low rate. They were, however, very welcome to us,; at eight o'clock the ship had more fish on board than all her people could eat in three days, and before night the quantity was so much increased, that every man who could get salt cured as many as would last him a month.</p>
              <p>After an early breakfast, I went a-shore, with Mr. Green and proper instruments, to observe the transit of Mercury, Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander being of the party. The weather had for some time been very thick, with much rain; but this day was so favourable, that not a cloud intervened during the whole transit. The observation of the ingress was made by Mr. Green alone, while I was employed in taking the sun's altitude to ascertain the time. It came on at 7° 20′ 58″ apparent time; according to Mr. Green's observation, the internal contact was at 12° 8′ 58″, the external at 129° 9 55″ P. M. and according to mine, the internal contact was at 12° 8′ 54′, and the external at 12° 9′ 48″; the latitude of the place of observation was 30° 48′ 5 ½″. The latitude observed at noon was 36° 48′ 28″. The mean of this and yesterday's observation gives 36° 48′ 5 ½″ S. the latitude of the place of observation; the variation of the compass was 11° 9′ E.</p>
              <p>About noon, we were alarmed by the firing of a great gun from the ship; Mr. Gore, my second lieutenant, was at this time commanding officer on board, and the account that he gave was this: While some small canoes were trading with the people, two very large ones came up, full of men, one of them having on board forty-seven, all armed with pikes, darts, and stones, and apparently with a hostile intention. They appeared to be strangers, and to be rather conscious of superiority over us by their numbers, than afraid of any weapons which could give us the superiority over them. No attack, however, was made, probably because they learned from the people in the other canoes,
<pb xml:id="n173" n="161"/>
with whom they immediately entered into conference, what kind of an enemy they had to deal with. After a little time they began to trade, some of them offering their arms, and one of them a square piece of cloth, which makes a part of their dress, called a Haahow; several of their weapons were purchased, and Mr. Gore having agreed for a Haahow, sent down the price, which was a piece of British cloth, and expected his purchase; but the Indian, as soon as he had got Mr. Gore's cloth in his possession, refused to part with his own, and put off the canoe: upon being threatened for this fraud, he and his companions began to sing their war song in defiance, and shook their paddles; still, however, they began no attack, only defying Mr. Gore to take any remedy in his power, which so provoked him, that he levelled a musquet, loaded with ball, at the offender, while he was holding the cloth in his hand, and shot him dead. It would have been happy if the effect of a few small shot had been tried upon this occasion, which upon some others had been successful.</p>
              <p>When the Indian dropped, all the canoes put off to some distance; but as they did not go away, it was thought they might still meditate an attack. To secure therefore a safe passage for the boat, which it was necessary to send on shore, a round shot was fired over their heads, which effectually answered their purpose, and put them all to flight. When an account of what had happened was brought a-shore, our Indians were alarmed, and drawing all together retreated in a body. After a short time, however, they returned, having heard a more particular account of the affair, and intimated, that they thought the man who had been killed deserved his fate.</p>
              <p>A little before sunset the Indians retired to eat their supper, and we went with them to be spectators of the repast: it consisted of fish of different kinds, among which were lobsters, and some birds of a species unknown to us; these were either roasted or baked. To roast them, they fastened them upon a small stick, which was stuck up in the ground, inclining towards their fire; and to bake them, they put them into a hole
<pb xml:id="n174" n="162"/>
in the ground with hot stones, in the same manner as the people of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>.</p>
              <p>Among the natives that were assembled upon this occasion, we saw a woman who, after their manner, was mourning for the death of her relation: she sat upon the ground near the rest, who, one only excepted, seemed not at all to regard her. The tears constantly trickled down her cheeks, and she repeated in a low, but very mournful voice, words which even Tupia did not at all understand: at the end of every sentence she cut her arms, her face, or her breaff, with a shell that she held in her hand, so that she was almost covered with blood, and was indeed one of the most affecting spectacles that can be conceived. The cuts, however, did not appear to be so deep as are sometimes made upon similar occasions, if we may judge by the scars which we saw upon the arms, thighs, breasts, and cheeks of many of them, which, we were told, were the remains of wounds which they had inflicted upon themselves, as testimonies of their affection and sorrow.</p>
              <p>The next day I went with two boats, accompanied by Mr. Banks and the other gentlemen, to examine a large river that empties itself into the head of the bay. We rowed about four or five miles up, and could have gone much farther if the weather had been favourable. It was here wider than at the mouth, and divided into many streams by small flat islands, which are covered with mangroves, and overflowed at high water. From these trees exudes a viscous substance, which very much resembles resin: we found it first in small lumps upon the sea beach, and now saw it sticking to the trees, by which we knew whence it came. We landed on the east side of the river, where we saw a tree upon which several shags had built their nests, and here therefore we determined to dine; twenty of the shags were soon killed, and, being broiled upon the spot, afforded us an excellent meal. We then went upon the hills, from whence I thought I saw the head of the river. The shore on each side, as well as the islands in the middle, were covered with mangroves, and the sand-banks abounded in cocklets and clams; in many places there were rock oysters, and every where plenty of wild fowl,
<pb xml:id="n175" n="163"/>
principally shags, ducks, curlieus, and the sea-pie, that has been described before. We also saw fish in the river, but of what kind we could not discover. The country on the east side of this river is for the most part barren, and destitute of wood; but on the west it has a better aspect, and in some places is adorned with trees, but has in no part the appearance of cultivation. In the entrance of the river, and for two or three miles up, there is good anchoring in four and five fathoms water, and places very convenient for laying a vessel on shore, where the tide rises and falls seven feet at the full and change of the moon. We could not determine whether any considerable stream of fresh water came into this river out of the country, but we saw a number of small rivulets issue from the adjacent hills. Near the mouth of this river, on the east side, we found a little Indian village, consisting of small temporary sheds, where we landed, and were received by the people with the utmost kindness and hospitality: they treated us with a flat shell-fish of a most delicious taste, somewhat like a cockle, which we eat hot from the coals. Near this place is a high point or peninsula, projecting into the river, and upon it are the remains of a fort, which they call Eppah or Heppah. The best engineer in Europe could not have chosen a situation better adapted to enable a small number to defend themselves against a greater. The steepness of the cliffs renders it wholly inaccessible from the water, which incloses it on three sides; and, to the land, it is fortified by a ditch, and a bank raised on the inside: from the top of the bank to the bottom of the ditch is two-and-twenty feet; the ditch on the outside is fourteen feet deep, and its breadth is in proportion. The whole seemed to have been executed with great judgment; and there had been a row of pickets, or pallisadoes, both on the top of the bank and along the brink of the ditch on the outside; those on the outside had been driven very deep into the ground, and were inclined towards the ditch, so as to project over it; but of these the thickest posts only were left, and upon them were evident marks of fire, so that the place had probably been taken and destroyed by an enemy. If any occasion should make it necessary for a ship to winter here, or stay any time,
<pb xml:id="n176" n="164"/>
tents might be built in this place, which is sufficiently spacious, with great convenience, and might easily be made impregnable to the whole country.</p>
              <p>On the eleventh, there was so much wind and rain that no canoe came off; but the long-boat was sent to fetch oysters from one of the beds which had been discovered the day before: the boat soon returned, deeply laden, and the oysters, which were as good as ever came from Colchester, and about the same size, were laid under the booms, and the ship's company did nothing but eat them from the time they came on board till night, when, as may reasonably be supposed, great part of them were expended; this, however, gave us no concern, as we knew that not the boat only, but the ship, might have been loaded almost in one tide, as the beds are dry at half ebb.</p>
              <p>In the morning of Sunday the 12th, two canoes came off full of people whom we had never seen before, but who appeared to have heard of us, by the caution which they used in approaching us. As we invited them to come along-side, with all the tokens of friendship that we could shew, they ventured up, and two of them came on board; the rest traded very fairly for what they had; a small canoe also came from the other side of the bay, and sold us some very large fish, which they gave us to understand, they would have brought yesterday, having caught them the day before, but that the wind was so high they could not venture to sea.</p>
              <p>After breakfast I went with the pinnace and yawl, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, over to the north side of the bay, to take a view of the country, and two fortified villages which we had discovered at a distance. We landed near the smallest of them, the situation of which was the most beautifully romantic that can be imagined; it was built upon a small rock, detached from the main, and surrounded at high water. The whole body of this rock was perforated by an hollower arch, which possessed much the largest part of it; the top of the arch was above sixty feet perpendicular above the sea, which at high water flowed through the bottom of it; the whole summit of the rock above the arch was fenced round, after their manner;
<pb xml:id="n177" n="165"/>
ner; but the area was not large enough to contain more than five or six houses: it was accessible only by one very narrow and steep path, by which the inhabitants, at our approach, came down, and invited us into the place; but we refused, intending to visit a much more considerable fort of the same kind at about a mile's distance. We made some presents, however, to the women, and in the mean time we saw the inhabitants of the town, which we were going to, coming towards us in a body, men, women, and children, to the number of about one hundred: when they came near enough to be heard, they waved their hands and called out Horomai, after which they sat down among the bushes near the beach. These ceremonies, we were told, were certain signs of their friendly disposition. We advanced to the place where they were sitting, and when we came up made them a few presents, and asked leave to visit their Heppah; they consented, with joy in their countenances, and immediately led the way. It is called <hi rend="sc">Wharretouwa</hi>, and is situated upon a high promontory, or point, which projects into the sea on the north side, and near the head of the bay. Two sides of it are washed by the sea, and these are altogether inaccessible; two other sides are to the land; up one of them, which is very steep, lies the avenue from the beach, the other is flat and open to the country upon the hill, which is a narrow ridge; the whole is inclosed by a pallisade about ten feet high, consisting of strong pales bound together with withes. The weak side next the land is also defended by a double ditch, the innermost of which has a bank and an additional pallisade; the inner pallisades are upon the bank next the town, but at such a distance from the top of the bank, as to leave room for men to walk and use their arms between them and the inner ditch. The outermost pallisades are between the two ditches, and driven obliquely into the ground, so that their upper ends incline over the inner ditch: the depth of this ditch, from the bottom to the top, or crown of the bank, is four-and-twenty feet. Close within the innermost pallisade is a stage twenty feet high, forty feet long, and six broad; it is supported by strong posts, and is intended as a station
<pb xml:id="n178" n="166"/>
for those who defend the place, from which they may annoy the assailants by darts and stones, heaps of which lay ready for use. Another stage of the same kind commands the steep avenue from the beach, and stands also within the pallisade: On this side of the hill there are some little out-works and huts, not intended as advanced posts, but as the habitations of people who for want of room could not be accommodated within the works, but who were, notwithstanding, desirous of placing themselves under their protection. The pallisades, as has been observed already, run round the whole brow of the hill, as well towards the sea as towards the land; but the ground within having originally been a mount, they have reduced it not to one level, but to several, rising in stages one above the other, like an amphitheatre, each of which is inclosed within its separate pallisade: they communicate with each other by narrow lanes, which might easily be stopped up; so that if an enemy should force the outward pallisade, he would have others to carry before the place could be wholly reduced, supposing these places to be obstinately defended one after the other. The only entrance is by a narrow passage, about twelve feet long, communicating with the steep ascent from the beach: it passes under one of the fighting stages, and though we saw nothing like a door or gateway, it may be easily barricaded in a manner that will make the forcing it a very dangerous and difficult undertaking. Upon the whole, this must be considered as a place of great strength, in which a small number of resolute men may defend themselves against all the force which a people with no other arms than those that are in use here could bring against it. It seemed to be well furnished for a siege with every thing but water; we saw great quantities of fern-root, which they eat as bread, and dried fish piled up in heaps; but we could not perceive that they had any fresh water nearer than a brook, which runs close under the foot of the hill: whether they have any means of getting it from this place during a siege, or whether they have any method of storing it within the works in gourds or other vessels, we could not learn; some resource they certainly have with respect to this article, an
<pb xml:id="n179" n="167"/>
indispensable necessary of life, for otherwise the laying up dry provisions could answer no purpose. Upon our expressing a desire to see their method of attack and defence, one of the young men mounted a fighting stage, which they call Porava, and another went into the ditch; both he that was to defend the place, and he that was to assault it, sung the war song, and danced with the same frightful gesticulations that we had seen used in more serious circumstances, to work themselves up into a degree of that mechanical fury, which, among all uncivilized nations, is the necessary prelude to a battle; for dispassionate courage, a strength of mind that can surmount the sense of danger, without a flow of animal spirits by which it is extinguished, seems to be the prerogative of those who have projects of more lasting importance, and a keener sense of honour and disgrace, than can be formed or felt by men who have few pains or pleasures besides those of mere animal life, and scarcely any purpose but to provide for the day that is passing over them, to obtain plunder, or revenge an insult: they will march against each other indeed in cool blood, though they find it necessary to work themselvs into passion before they engage; as among us there have been many instances of people who have deliberately made themselves drunk, that they might execute a project which they formed when they were sober, but which, while they continued so, they did not dare to undertake.</p>
              <p>On the side of the hill, near this inclosure, we saw about half an acre planted with gourds and sweet potatoes, which was the only cultivation in the bay: under the foot of the point upon which this fortification stands, are two rocks, one just broken off from the main, and the other not perfectly detached from it: they are both small, and seem more proper for the habitations of birds than men; yet there are houses and places of defence upon each of them. And we saw many other works of the same kind upon small islands, rocks, and ridges of hills, on different parts of the coast, besides many fortified towns, which appeared to he much superior to this.</p>
              <p>The perpetual hostility in which these poor savages, who have made every village a fort, must nccessarily
<pb xml:id="n180" n="168"/>
live, will account for there being so little of their land in a state of cultivation; and, as mischiefs very often reciprocally produce each other, it may perhaps appear, that there being so little land in a state of cultivation, will account for their living in perpetual hostility. But it is very strange, that the same invention and diligence which have been used in the construction of places so admirably adapted to defence, almost without tools, should not, when urged by the same necessity, have furnished them with a single missile weapon except the lance, which is thrown by hand: they have no contrivance like a bow to dicharge a dart, nor any thing like a sling to assist them in throwing a stone; which is the more surprising, as the invention of slings, and bows and arrows, is much more obvious than of the works which these people construct, and both these weapons are found among much ruder nations, and in almost every other part of the world. Besides the long lance and Patoo-Patoo, which have been mentioned already; they have a staff about five feet long, sometimes pointed, like a Serjeant's halberd, sometimes only tapering to a point at one end, and having the other end broad, and shaped somewhat like the blade of an oar. They have also another weapon, about a foot shorter than these, pointed at one end, and at the other shaped like an axe. The points of their long lances are barbed, and they handle them with such strength and agility, that we can match them with no weapon but a loaded musquet.</p>
              <p>After taking a slight view of the country, and loading both the boats with celery, which we found in great plenty near the beach, we returned from our excursion, and about five o'clock in the evening got on board the ship.</p>
              <p>On the 15th, I sailed out of the bay, and at the same time had several canoes on board, in one of which was our friend Toiava, who said, that as soon as we were gone he must repair to his Heppah or fort, because the friends of the man who had been shot by Mr. Gore on the 9th, had threatened to revenge his death upon him, whom they had reproached as being our friend. Off the north point of the bay, I saw a great number of islands, of various extent, which lay
<pb xml:id="n181" n="169"/>
scattered to the north-west, in a direction parallel with the main as far as I could sce. I steered north-east for the north-eastermost of these islands; but the wind coming to the north-west, I was obliged to stand out to sea.</p>
              <p>To the bay which we had now left I gave the name of <hi rend="sc">Mercury Bay</hi>, on account of the observation which we had made-there of the transit of that planet over the fun. It lies in latitude 36′ 4 S. and in the longitude of 184° 4 W. there are several islands lying both to the southward and northward of it, and a small island or rock in the middle of the entrance: within this island the depth of water no where exceeds nine fathom: the best anchoring is in a sandy bay, which lies just within the south head, in five and four fathom, bringing a high tower or rock, which lies without the head, in one with the head, or just shut in behind it. This place is very convenient both for wooding and watering, and in the river there is an immense quantity of oysters and other shell fish: I have for this reason given it the name of <hi rend="sc">Oyster River</hi>. But for a ship that wants to stay here any time, the best and safest place is in the river at the head of the bay; which, from the number of mangrove trees about it, I have called <hi rend="sc">Mangrove River</hi>. To fail into this river, the south shore must be kept all the way on board. The country on the east side of the river and bay is very barren, its only produce being fern, and a few other lants that will grow in a poor soil. The land on the north-west side is covered with wood, and the soil being much more fertile, would doubtless produce all the necessaries of life with proper cultivation: it is not however so sertile as the lands that we have seen to the southward; nor do the inhabitants, though numerous, make so good an appearance: they have no plantations; their canoes are mean and without ornament; they sleep in the open air; and say, that Teratu, whose sovereignty they do not acknowledge, if he was to come among them, would kill them. This favoured our opinion of their being outlaws; yet they told us, that they had Heppahs or strong holds, to which they retired in time of imminent danger.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n182" n="170"/>
              <p>We found, thrown upon the shore, in several parts of this bay, great quantities of iron sand, which is brought down by every little rivulet of fresh water that finds its way from the country; which is a demonstration that there is ore of that metal not far inland: yet neither the inhabitants of this place not any other part of the coast that we have seen, know the use of iron, or set the least value upon it; all of them preferring the most worthless and useless trifle, not only to a nail, but to any tool of that metal.</p>
              <p>Before we left the bay, we cut upon one of the trees near the watering-place the ship's name, and, that of the Commander, with the date of the year and month when we were there; and, after displaying the English colours, I took a formal possession of it in the name of his Britannic Majesty King George the Third.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d4" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. IV</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">The Range from Mercury Bay to the Bay of Istands. An Expedition up the River Thames: Some Account of the Indians who inhabit its Banks, and the fine Timber that grows there. Several interviews with the Natives on different Parts of the Coast, and a Skirmish with them upon an Island</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p>I Continued plying to windward two days to get under the land, and on the 18th, about seven in the morning, we were a-breast of a very conspicuous promontory, being then in latitude 36° 26, and in the direction of N. 48 W. from the north head of Mercury Bay or Point Mercury, which was distant nine leagues: upon this point stood many people, who seemed to take little notice of us, but talked together with great earnestness. In about half an hour, several canoes put off from different places, and came towards the ship; upon which the people on the point also launched a canoe, and about twenty of them came in her up with the others. When two of these canoes, in which there might be about sixty men, came near enough to make themselves heard, they sung their war-song; but seeing
<pb xml:id="n183" n="171"/>
ing that we took little notice of it, they threw a few stones at us, and then rowed off towards the shore. We hoped that we had now done with them, but in a short time they returned, as if with a fixed resolution to provoke us into a battle, animating themselves by their song as they had done before. Tupia, without any directions from us, went to the poop, and began to expostulate: he told them, that we had weapons which would destroy them in a moment: and that, if they ventured to attack us, we should be obliged to use them. Upon this, they flourished their weapons and cried out in their language, “Come on shore, and we “will kill you all:” Well, said Tupia, but why should you molest us while we are at sea? As we do not wish to fight, we shall not accept your challenge to come on shore; and here is no pretence for a quarrel, the sea being no more your property than the ship. This eloquence of Tupia, though it greatly surprized us, having given him no hints for the arguments he used, had no effect upon our enemies, who very soon renewed their battery: a musquet was then fired through one of their boats, and this was an argument of sufficient weight, for they immediately fell a-stern and left us.</p>
              <p>From the point, of which we were now a-breast, the land trends W. ½ S. near a league, and then S. S. E. as far as we could see; and, besides the islands that lay without us, we could see land round by the S. W. as far as the N. W. but whether this was the main or islands, we could not then determine: the fear of losing the main, however, made me resolve to follow its direction. With this view, I hauled round the point and steered to the southward, but there being light airs all round the compass, we made but little progress.</p>
              <p>About one o'clock, a breeze sprung up at east, which afterwards came to N. E. and we steered along the shore S. by E. and S. S. E. having from twenty-five to eighteen fathom.</p>
              <p>At about half an hour after seven in the evening, having run seven or eight leagues since noon, I anchored in twenty-three fathom, not chusing to run any farther in the dark, as I had now land on both sides, forming
<pb xml:id="n184" n="172"/>
the entrance of a streight, bay, or river, lying S. by E. for on that point we could see no land.</p>
              <p>At day-break, on the 19th, the wind being still favourable, we weighed and stood with an easy sail up the inlet, keeping ncarest to the east side. In a short time two large canoes came off to us from the shore; the people on board said, that they knew Toiava very well, and called Tupia by his name. I invited some of them on board; and as they knew they had nothing to sear from us, while they behaved honestly and peaceably, they immediately complied: I made each of them some presents, and dismissed them much gratified. Other canoes afterwards came up to us from a different side of the bay; and the people on board of these also mentioned the name of Toiava, and sent a young man into the ship, who told us he was his grandson, and he also was dismissed with a present.</p>
              <p>After having run about five leagues from the place where we had anchored the night before, our depth of water gradually decreased to six sathom; and not choosing to go into less, as it was tide of flood, and the wind blew right up the inlet, I came to an anchor about the middle of the channel, which is near eleven miles over; after which I sent two boats out to sound, one on one side, and the other on the other.</p>
              <p>The boats not having found above three feet more water than we were now in, I determined to go no farther with the ship, but to examine the head of the bay in the boats; for, as it appeared to run a good way inland, I thought this a favourable opportunity to examine the interior part of the country and its produce.</p>
              <p>At day-break, therefore, I set out in the pinnace and long-boat, accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Tupia; and we found the inlet end in a river, about nine miles above the ship: into this river we entered with the first of the flood, and within three miles sound the water perfectly fresh. Before we had proceeded more than one third of that distance, we found an Indian town, which was built upon a small bank of dry sand, but intirely surrounded by a deep mud, which possibly the inhabitants might consider as a defence. These people, as soon as they saw us, thronged
<pb xml:id="n185" n="173"/>
to the banks, and invited us on shore. We accepted the invitation, and made them a visit, notwithstanding the mud. They received us with open arms, having heard of us from our good old friend Toiava; but our stay could not be long, as we had other objects of curiosity in view. We proceeded up the river till near noon, when we were fourteen miles within its entrance; and then, finding the face of the country to continue nearly the same, without any alteration in the course of the stream, which we had no hopes of tracing to its source, we landed on the west side, to take a view of the lofty trees which every where adorned its banks. They were of a kind that we had seen before, though only at a distance, both in Poverty-Bay and Hawke's-Bay. Before we had walked an hundred yards into the wood, we met with one of them which was nineteen feet eight inches in the girt, at the height of six feet above the ground: having a quadrant with me, I measured its height from the root to the first branch, and found it to be eighty-nine feet: it was as strait as an arrow, and tapered but very little in proportion to its height, so that I judged there were three hundred and fifty-six feet of solid timber in it, exclusive of the branches. As we advanced, we saw many others that were still larger; we cut down a young one, and the wood proved heavy and solid, not fit for masts, but such as would make the finest plank in the world. Our carpenter, who was with us, said that the timber resembled that of the pitch-pine, which is lightened by tapping; and possibly some such method might be found to lighten these, and they would then be such masts as no country in Europe can produce. As the wood was swampy, we could not range far; but found many stout trees of other kinds, all of them utterly unknown to us, specimens of which we brought away.</p>
              <p>The river at this height is as broad as the Thames at Greenwich, and the tide of flood as strong; it is not indeed quite so deep, but has water enough for vessels of more than a middle size, and a bottom of mud, so soft that nothing could take damage by running a shore.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n186" n="174"/>
              <p>About three o'clock, we re-embarked, in order to return with the first of the ebb, and named the river the <hi rend="sc">Thames</hi>, it having some resemblance to our own river of that name. In our return, the inhabitants of the village where we had been ashore, seeing us take another channel, came off to us in their canoes, and trafficked with us in the most friendly manner, till they had disposed of the few trifles they had. The tide of ebb just carried us out of the narrow part of the river, into the channel that ran up from the sea, before it was dark; and we pulled hard to reach the ship, but meeting the flood, and a strong breeze at N. N. W. with showers of rain, we were obliged to desist; and about midnight, we ran under the land, and came to a grappling, where we took such rest as our situation would admit. At break of day, we set forward again, and it was past seven o'clock before we reached the ship. We were all extremely tired, but thought ourselves happy to be on board; for before nine it blew so hard that the boat could not have rowed a-head, and must therefore either have gone a-shore, or taken shelter under it.</p>
              <p>About three o'clock, having the tide of ebb, we took up our anchor, and made sail, and plied down the river till eight in the evening, when we came to an anchor again; early in the morning we made sail with the first ebb, and kept plying till the flood obliged us once more to come to an anchor. As we had now only a light breeze, I went in the pinnace, accompanied by Dr. Solander, to the western shore; but I saw nothing worthy of notice.</p>
              <p>When I left the ship, many canoes were about it; Mr. Banks therefore chose to stay on board, and traffic with the natives: they bartered their clothes and arms, chiefly for paper, and behaved with great friendship and honesty. But while some of them were below with Mr. Banks, a young man who was upon the deck stole a half-minute glass which was in the binacle, and was detected just as he was carrying it off. Mr. Hicks, who was commanding officer on board, took it into his head to punish him, by giving him twelve lashes with a cat-o'nine-tails; and accordingly ordered him to be taken to the gang-way, and tied up
<pb xml:id="n187" n="175"/>
to the shrouds. When the other Indians who were on board saw him seized, they attempted to rescue him; and being resisted, called for their arms, which were handed up from the canoes, and the people of one of them attempted to come up the ship's side. The tumult was heard by Mr. Banks, who, with Tupia, came hastily upon the deck to see what had happened. The Indians immediately ran up to Tupia, who, finding Mr. Hicks inexorable, could only assure them, that nothing was intended against the lite of their companion; but that it was necessary he should suffer some punishment for his offence, which being explained to them, they seemed to be satisfied. The punishment was then inflicted, and as soon as the criminal was unbound, an old man among the spectators, who was supposed to be his father, gave him a hearty beating, and sent him down into his canoe. All the canoes then dropped astern, and the people said that they were afraid to come any more near the ship: after much persuasion, however, they ventured back again: but their chearful confidence was at an end, and their stay was short; they promised indeed, at their departure, to return with some fish, but we saw no more of them.</p>
              <p>On the 23d, the wind being contrary, we kept plying down the river, and at seven in the evening, got without the N. W. point of the islands lying on the west side of it. The weather being bad, night coming on, and having land on every side of us, I thought it most advisable to tack, and stretch in under the point, where we anchored in nineteen fathom. At five in the morning of the 24th, we weighed, and made sail to the N. W. under our courses and double-reefed top-sails, the wind being at S. W. by W. and W. S. W. a strong gale and squally. As the gale would not permit us to come near the land, we had but a slight and distant view of it from the time when we got under sail till noon, during a run of twelve leagues, but we never once lost sight of it. At this time, our latitude, by observation, was 36° 15′ 20″, we were not above two miles from a point of land on the main, and three leagues and an half from a very high island, which bore N. E. by E. in this situation we had twenty-six fathom water: the farthest point on the main that we
<pb xml:id="n188" n="176"/>
could see bore N. W. but we could perceive several small islands lying to the north of that direction. The point of land of which we were now a-! reast, and which I called <hi rend="sc">Point Rondey</hi>, is the N. W. extremity of the river Thames; for under that name I comprehend the deep bay which terminates in the fresh-water stream, and the N. E. extremity is the promontory which we passed when we entered it, and which I called <hi rend="sc">Cape Colville</hi>, in honour of the Right Hon. Lord Colville.</p>
              <p>Cape Colville lies in latitude 36° 26′, longitude 194° 27; it rises directly from the sea to a considerable height, and is remarkable for a lofty rock, which stands to the pitch of the point, and may be distinguished at a very great distance. From the south point of this Cape the river runs in a direct line S. by E. and is no where less than three leagues broad for the distance of fourteen leagues above the Cape, and there it is contracted to a narrow stream, but continues the same course through a low flat country, or broad valley, which lies parallel with the sea-coast, and the end of which we could not see. On the east side of the broad part of this river the land is tolerably high and hilly; on the west side it is rather low, but the whole is covered with verdure and wood, and has the appearance of great fertility, though there were but a few small spots which had been cultivated. At the entrance of the narrow part of the river the land is covered with mangroves and other shrubs; but farther there are immense woods of perhaps the finest timber in the world, of which some account has already been given: in several places the wood extends to the very edge of the water, and where it is at a little distance, the intermediate space is marshy, like some part of the banks of the Thames in England: it is probable that the river contains plenty of fish, for we saw poles stuck up in many places to set nets for catching them, but of what kinds I do not know. The greatest depth of water that we found in this river was six-and-twenty fathom, which gradually decreased to one fathom and an half: in the mouth of the freshwater stream it is from four to three fathom, but there are large flats and sand banks lying before it. A
<pb xml:id="n189" n="177"/>
ship of moderate draught may, notwithstanding, go a long way up this river with a flowing tide, for it rises perpendicularly near ten feet, and at the full and change of the moon, it is high water about nine o'clock.</p>
              <p>Six leagues within Cape Colville, under the eastern shore, are several small islands, which, together with the main, seem to form good harbours; and opposite to these islands, under the western shore, lie other islands, by which it is also probable that good harbours may be formed: but if there are no harbours about this river, there is good anchoring in every part of it where the depth of water is sufficient, for it is defended from the sea by a chain of islands of different extent, which lie cross the mouth of it, and which I have, for that reason, called <hi rend="sc">Barrier Islands</hi>: they stretch N.W. and S.E. ten leagues. The south end of the chain lies N.E. between two and three leagues from Cape Colville; and the north end lies N.E. four leagues and a half from Point Rodney. Point Rodney lies W. N. W. nine leagues from Cape Colville, in latitude 36° 15′ S. longitude 184° 53′ W.</p>
              <p>The natives residing about this river do not appear to be numerous, considering the great extent of the country. But they are a strong, well-made, and active people, and all of them paint their bodies with red ochre and oil from head to foot, which we had not seen before. Their canoes were large and well-built, and adorned with carving, in as good a taste as any that we had seen upon the coast.</p>
              <p>We continued to stand along the shore till night, with the main land on one side, and the islands on the other, and then anchored in a bay, with fourteen fathoms and a sandy bottom. We had no sooner come to an anchor, than we tried our lines, and in a short time caught near one hundred fish, which the people called Sea-bream; they weighed from six to eight pounds a-piece, and consequently would supply the whole ship's company with food for two days. From the success of our lines here, we called the place <hi rend="sc">Bream Bay</hi>: the two point that form it lie north and south, five leagues from each other; it is every where of a good breadth, and between three and four leagues deep: at the bottom of it there appears to be a river of fresh water,
<pb xml:id="n190" n="178"/>
The north head of the bay called <hi rend="sc">Bream Head</hi>, is high land, and remarkable for several pointed rocks, which stand in a range upon the top of it: it may also be known by some small islands which lie before it, called the <hi rend="sc">Hen and Chickens</hi>, one of which is high and terminates in two peaks. It lies in latitude 35° 46′ S. and at the distance of seventeen leagues and an half from Cape Colville, in the diretion of N. 41 W.</p>
              <p>The land between Point Rodney and Bream Head, an extent of ten leagues, is low, and wooded in tufts, with white sand-banks between the sea and the firm land. We saw no inhabitans, but many fires in the night; and where there are fires, there are always people.</p>
              <p>At day-break, on the 25th, we left the bay, and fteered along shore to the northward: we found the variation of the compass to be 12° 42′ E. At noon, our latitude was 36° 36′ S. Bream Head bore south, distant ten miles; and we saw some small islands, to which I gave the name of the <hi rend="sc">Poor Knights</hi>, at N. E. by N. distant three leagues: the northermost land in sight bore N.N. W. we were in this place at the distance of two miles from the shore, and had twenty-six fathoms water.</p>
              <p>The country appeared low, but well covered with wood; we saw some straggling houses, three or four fortified towns, and near them a large quantity of cultivated land.</p>
              <p>In the evening, seven large canoes came off to us, with about two hundred men: some of them came on board, and said that they had heard of us. To two of them, who appeared to be Chiefs, I gave presents; but when these were gone out of the ship, the others became exceedingly troublesome. Some of those in the canoes began to trade, and, according to their custom, to cheat, by refusing to deliver what had been bought, after they had received the price: among these was one who had received an old pair of black breeches, which, upon a few small shot, being fired at him, he threw into the sea. All the boats soon after paddled off to some distance, and when they thought they were out of reach, they began to defy us, by singing their song and brandishing their weapons. We thought it adviseable
<pb xml:id="n191" n="179"/>
to intimidate them, as well for their sake as our own, and therefore fired first some small arms, and then round shot over their heads: the last put them in a terrible fright, though they received no damage, except by over-heating themselves in paddling away, which they did with astonishing expedition.</p>
              <p>In the night we had variable light airs; but towards the morning a breeze sprung up at S. and afterwards at S. E. with which we proceeded slowly to the northward, along the shore.</p>
              <p>Between six and seven o'clock two canoes came off, and told us that they had heard of yesterday's adventure; notwithstanding which the people came on board, and traded very quietly and honestly for whatever they had: soon after two canoes came off from a more distant part of the shore; these were of a much larger size, and full of people: when they came near, they called off the other canoes which were along-side of the ship, and after a short conference they all came up together. The strangers appeared to be persons of a superior rank; their canoes were well carved with many ornaments, and they had with them a great variety of weapons: they had patoo-patoos both of stone and whalebone, upon which they appeared to set a great value; they had also ribs of whale, of which we had before seen imitations in wood, carved and adorned with tufts of dog's hair. Their complexions were browner than those of the people we had seen to the southward, and their bodies and faces were more marked with the black stains which they call Amoco: they had a broad spiral on each buttock; and the thighs of many of them were almost intirely black, some narrow lines only being lest untouched, so that at first sight they appeared to wear striped breeches. With respect to the Amoco, every different tribe seemed to have a different custom; for all the men, in some canoes, seemed to be almost covered with it, and those in others had scarcely a stain except on the lips, which were black in all of them without a single exception. These gentlemen, for a long time, refused to part with any of their weapons, whatever was offered for them; as last, however, one of them produced a piece of
<pb xml:id="n192" n="180"/>
tale, wrought into the shape of an axe, and agreed to sell it for a piece of cloth: the cloth was handed over the ship's side, but his honour immediately put off his canoe with the axe. We had recourse to our usual expedient, and fired a musket ball over the canoe, upon which it put back to the ship, and the piece of cloth was returned; all the boats then went a-shore, without offering any further intercourse.</p>
              <p>At noon, the main land extended from S. by E. to N. W. by W. a remarkable point of land bearing W. distant four or five miles; at three we passed it, and I gave it the name of <hi rend="sc">Cape Bret</hi>, in honour of Sir Piercy. The land of this Cape is considerably higher than any part of the adjacent coast: at the point of it, is a high round hillock, and N. E. by N. at the distance of about a mile, is a small high island or rock, which, like several that have already been described, was perforated quite through, so as to appear like the arch of a bridge. This Cape, or at least some part of it, is by the natives called <hi rend="sc">Motugogogo</hi>, and it lies in latitude 35° 10′ 30′ S. longitude 185° 25′ W. On the west side of it is a large and pretty deep bay, lying in S. W. by W. in which there appeared to be several small islands: the point that forms the N. W. entrance lies W. ¼ N. at the distance of three or four leagues from Cape Bret, and I distinguished it by the name of <hi rend="sc">Point Pococke</hi>. On the west side of the bay we saw several villages, both upon islands and the main, and several very large canoes came off to us, full of people, who made a better appearance than any we had seen yet: they were all stout and well-made; their hair, which was black, was tied up in a bunch on the crown of their heads, and stuck with white seathers. In each of the canoes, were two or three Chiefs, whose habits were of the best fort of cloth, and covered with dog's skin, so as to make an agreeable appearance: most of these people were marked with the Amoco, like those who had been along-side of us before: their manner of trading was also equally fraudulent; and the officers neglecting either to punish or fright them, one of the midshipmen, who had been defrauded in his bargain, had recourse, for revenge, to an expedient which was equally
<pb xml:id="n193" n="181"/>
Iudicrous and severe; he got a fishing-line, and when the man who had cheated him was close under the ship's side in his canoe, he heaved the lead with so good an aim, that the hook caught him by the back-side, he then pulled the line, and the man holding back, the hook broke in the shank, and the beard was left sticking in the flesh.</p>
              <p>During the course of this day, though we did not range more than six or eight leagues of the coast, we had along-side and on board the ship between four and five hundred of the natives, which is a proof that this part of the country is well inhabited.</p>
              <p>At eight o'clock the next morning, we were within a mile of a group of islands, which lie close under the main, at the distance of two-and-twenty miles from Cape Bret, in the direction of N. W. by W. ½ W. At this place, having but little wind, we lay about two hours, during which time several canoes came off, and sold us some fish, which we called Cavalles, and for that reason I gave the same name to the islands. These people were very insolent, frequently threatening us, even while they were selling their fish; and when some more canoes came up, they began to pelt us with stones. Some small shot were then fired, and hit one of them while he had a stone in his hand, in the very action of throwing it into the ship; they did not, however, desist, till some others had been wounded, and then they went away, and we stood off to sea.</p>
              <p>The wind being directly against us, we kept plying to windward till the 29th, when we had rather lost than gained ground; I therefore bore up for a bay which lies to the westward of Cape Bret; at this time it was about two leagues to leeward of us; and at about eleven o'clock we anchored under the south-west side of one of the many islands which line it on the south-east, in four fathoms and a half water; we shoaled our water to this depth all at once, and if this had not happened, I should not have come to an anchor so soon. The master was immediately sent out with two boats to sound, and he soon discovered that we had got upon a bank, which runs out from the north-west end
<pb xml:id="n194" n="182"/>
of the island, and that on the outside of it there was from eight to ten fathoms.</p>
              <p>In the mean time the natives, to the number of near four hundred, crowded upon us in their canoes, and some of them were admitted on board: To one, who seemed to be a Chief, I gave a piece of broad-cloth, and distributed some trifling presents among the rest. I perceived that some of these people had been about the ship when she was off at sea, and that they knew the power of our fire-arms, for the very sight of a gun threw them into manifest confusion: under this impression they traded very fairly; but the people in one of the canoes took the opportunity of our being at dinner to tow away our buoy. A musquet was fired over them without effect; we then endeavoured to reach them with some small shot, but they were too far off. By this time they had got the buoy into their canoe, and we were obliged to fire a musket at them with ball; this hit one of them, and they immediately threw the buoy over-board; a round shot was then fired over them, which struck the water and went a-shore. Two or three of the canoes immediately landed their people, who ran about the beach, as we imagined, in search of the ball. Tupia called to them, and assured them, that while they were honest they should be safe, and with a little persuasion many of them returned to the ship, and their behaviour was such, as left us no reason to suspect that they intended to give us any farther trouble.</p>
              <p>After the ship was removed into deeper water, and properly secured, I went with the pinnace and yawl, manned and armed, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, and landed upon the island, which was about three quarters of a mile distant. We observed that the canoes which were about the ship, did not follow us upon our leaving her, which we thought a good sign; but we had no sooner landed than they crowded to different parts of the island, and came on shore. We were in a little cove, and in a few minutes were surrounded by two or three hundred people, some rushing from behind the heads of the cove, and others appearing on the tops of the hills: they
<pb xml:id="n195" n="183"/>
were all armed, but they came on in so confused and straggling a manner, that we scarcely suspected they meant us any harm, and we were determined that hostilities should not begin on our part. We marched towards them, and then drew a line upon the sand between them and us, which we gave them to understand they were not to pass. At first they continued quiet, but their weapons were held ready to strike, and they seemed to be rather irresolute than peaceable. While we remained in this state of suspense, another party of Indians came up, and now growing more bold as their number increased, they began the dance and song, which are their preludes to a battle; still, however, they delayed the attack, but a party ran to each of our boats, and attempted to draw them on shore: this seemed to be the signal, for the people about us at the same time began to press in upon our line. Our situation was now become too critical for us to remain longer inactive; I therefore discharged my musket, which was loaded with small shot, at one of the forwardest, and Mr. Banks and two of the men fired immediately afterwards. This made them fall back in some confusion; but one of the Chiefs, who was at the distance of about twenty yards, rallied them, and running forward waving his patoo-patoo, and calling loudly to his companions, led him to the charge. Dr. Solander, whose piece was not yet discharged, fired at this champion, who stopped short upon feeling the shot, and then ran away with the rest. They did not, however, disperse, but got together upon a rising ground, and seemed only to want some leader of resolution to renew their attack. As they were now beyond the reach of small-shot, we fired with ball; but as none of them took place, they still continued in a body, and in this situation we remained about a quarter of an hour. In the mean time the ship, from whence a much greater number of Indians were seen than could be discovered in our situation, brought her broad-side to bear, and intirely dispersed them, by firing a few shot over their heads. In this skirmish only two of the Indians were hurt with the small-shot, and not a single life was lost, which would not have been the case if I had not restrained the men, who, either from sear or a love of mischief,
<pb xml:id="n196" n="184"/>
shewed as much impatience to destroy them as a sportsman to kill his game. When we were in quiet possession of our cove we laid down our arms, and began to gather celery, which grew here in great plenty. After a little time, we recollected to have seen some of the people hide themselves in a cave of one of the rocks, we therefore went towards the place, when an old Indian, who proved to be the Chief that I had presented with a piece of broad-cloth in the morning, came out with his wife and his brother, and, in a supplicating posture, put themselves under our protection. We spoke kindly to them, and the old man then told us that he had another brother, who was one of those that had been wounded by the small-shot, and inquired, with much solicitude and concern, if he would die. We assured him that he would not, and at the same time put into his hand both a musket-ball and some small-shot, telling him, that those only who were wounded with the ball would die, and that the others would recover; at the same time assuring him, that if we were attacked again we should certainly defend ourselves with the ball, which would wound them mortally. Having now taken courage, they came and sat down by us; and, as tokens of our perfect amity, we made them presents of such trifles as we happened to have about us.</p>
              <p>Soon after we re-embarked in our boats, and having rowed to another cove in the same island, climbed a neighbouring hill, which commanded the country to a considerable distance. The prospect was very uncommon and romantic, consisting of innumerable islands, which formed as many harbours, where the water was as smooth as a mill-pool. We saw also many towns, scattered houses, and plantations, the country being much more populous than any we had seen. One of the towns was very near us, from which many of the Indians advanced, taking great pains to shew us that they were unarmed, and in their gestures and countenances expressing great meekness and humility. In the mean time some of our people, who, when the Indians were to be punished for a fraud, assumed the inexorable justice of a Lycurgus, thought fit to break into one of their plantations and dig up some potatoes.
<pb xml:id="n197" n="185"/>
For this offence I ordered each of them to be punished with twelve lathes, after which two of them were discharged; but the third, insisting that it was no crime in an Englishman to plunder an Indian plantation, though it was a crime in an Indian to defraud an Englishman of a nail, I ordered him back into his confinement, from which I would not release him till he had received six lashes more.</p>
              <p>On the 30th, there being a dead calm, and no probability of our getting to sea, I sent the master with two boats to sound the harbour; and all the forenoon had several canoes about the ship, who traded in a very fair and friendly manner. In the evening we went ashore upon the main, where the people received us very cordially; but we found nothing worthy of notice.</p>
              <p>In this bay we were detained by contrary winds and calms several days, during which time our intercourse with the natives was continued in the most peaceable and friendly manner, they being frequently about the ship, and we a-shore, both upon the islands and the main. In one of our visits to the continent, an old man shewed us the instrument they use in staining their bodies, which exactly resembled those that were employed for the same purpose at <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>. We saw also the man who was wounded in attempting to steal our buoy: the ball had passed through the fleshy part of his arm, and grazed his breast; but the wound, under the care of Nature, the best surgeon, and a simple diet, the best nurse, was in a good state, and seemed to give the patient neither pain nor apprehension. We saw also the brother of our old Chief, who had been wounded with small-shot in our skirmish: they had strack his thigh obliquely, and though several of them were still in the flesh, the wound seemed to be attended with neither danger nor pain. We found among their plantations the morus papyrifera, of which these people, as well as those of <name key="name-000007" type="place">Otaheite</name>, make cloth; but here the plant seems to be rare, and we saw no pieces of the cloth large enough for any use, but to wear by way of ornament in their ears.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n198" n="186"/>
              <p>Having one day landed in a very distant part of the bay, the people immediately fled, except one old man, who accompanied us wherever we went, and seemed much pleased with the little presents we made him. We came at last to a little fort, built upon a small rock, which at high water was surrounded by the sea, and accessible only by a ladder. We perceived that he eyed us with a kind of restless solicitude as we approached it, and upon our expressing a desire to enter it, he told us that his wife was there. He saw that our curiosity was not diminished by this intelligence, and, after some hesitation, he said, if we would promise to offer no indecency he would accompany us: our promise was readily given, and he immediately led the way. The ladder consisted of steps fastened to a pole, but we found the ascent both difficult and dangerous. When we entered we found three women, who, the moment they saw us, burst into tears of terror and surprize; some kind words, and a few presents, soon removed their apprehensions, and put them into good humour. We examined the house of our old friend, and by his interest two others, which were all that the fortification contained, and having distributed a few more presents, we parted with mutual satisfaction.</p>
              <p>At four o'clock in the morning of the 5th of December, we weighed with a light breeze; but it being variable, with frequent calms, we made little way. We kept turning out of the bay till the afternoon, and about ten o'clock we were suddenly becalmed, so that the ship would neither wear nor stay; and the tide or current setting strong, she drove towards land so fast, that before any measures could be taken for her security, she was within a cable's length of the breakers; we had thirteen fathoms water, but the ground was so foul that we did not dare to drop our anchor; the pinnace therefore was immediately hoisted out to take the ship in tow, and the men, sensible of their danger, exerting themselves to the utmost, and a saint breeze springing up off the land, we perceived with unspeakable joy that she made head way, after having been so near the shore that Tupia, who was not sensible of our hair's breadth escape, was at this very time conversing with the people upon the beach, whole
<pb xml:id="n199" n="187"/>
voices were distinctly heard, notwithstanding the roar of the breakers. We now thought all danger was over, but about an hour afterwards, just as the man in the chains had cried “seventeen fathom,” the ship struck. The shock threw us all into the utmost consternation; Mr. Banks, who had undressed himself and was stepping into bed, ran hastily up to the deck, and the man in the chains called out “five fathom;” by this time, the rock on which we had struck being to windward, the ship went off without having received the least damage, and the water very soon deepened to twenty fathom.</p>
              <p>This rock lies half a mile W. N. W. of the northermost or outermost island on the south-east side of the bay. We had light airs from the land, with calms, till nine o'clock the next morning, when we got out of the hay, and a breeze springing up at N.N. W. we stood out to sea.</p>
              <p>This bay, as I have before observed, lies on the west side of Cape Bret, and I named it the <hi rend="sc">Bay of Islands</hi>, from the great number of islands which line its shores, and form several harbours equally sase and commodious, where there is room and depth for any number of shipping. That in which we lay is on the south-west side of the south-westermost island, called <hi rend="sc">Matuaro</hi>, on the south-east side of the bay. I have made no accurate survey of this bay, being discouraged by the time it would cost me; I thought also that it was sufficient to be able to affirm that it afforded us good anchorage, and refreshment of every kind. It was not the season for roots, but we had plenty of fish, most of which, however, we purchased of the natives, for we could catch very little ourselves either with net or line. When we shewed the natives our seine, which is such as the King's ships are generally furnished with, they laughed at it, and in triumph produced their own, which was indeed of an enormous size, and made of a kind of grass, which is very strong: it was five fathoms deep, and by the room it took up, it could not be less than three or four hundred fathoms long. Fishing seems indeed to be the chief business of life in this part of the country; we saw about all their towns a great number of nets, laid in heaps like hay-cocks,
<pb xml:id="n200" n="188"/>
and covered with a thatch to keep them from the weather, and we scarcely entered a house where some of the people were not employed in making them. The fish we procured here were marks, sting-rays, sea-bream, mullet, mackrel, and some others.</p>
              <p>The inhabitants in this bay are far more numerous than in any other part of the country that we had before visited; it did not appear to us that they were united under one head, and tho' their towns were fortified, they seemed to live together in perfect amity.</p>
              <p>It is high-water in this bay, at the full and change of the moon, about eight o'clock, and the tide then rises from six to eight feet perpendicularly. It appears, from such observations as I was able to make of the tides upon the sea-coast, that the flood comes from the southward, and I have reason to think that there is a current which comes from the westward, and sets along the shore to S. E. or S. S. E. as the land happens to lie.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d5" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. V</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">Range from the Bay of Islands, round North-Cope to Queen Charlotte's Sound; and a Description of that Part of the Coast</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="sc">On</hi> Thursday the 7th of December, at noon, Cape Bret bore S. S. E. ½ E. distant ten miles, and our latitude, by observation, was 34° 59′ S. Soon after we made several observations of the sun and moon, the result of which made our longitude 185° 36′ W. The wind being against us, we had made but little way. In the afternoon we stood in-shore, and setched close under the Cavalles, from which islands the main trends W. by N. several canoes put off and followed us, but a light breeze springing up, I did not choose to wait for them. I kept standing to the W. N. W. and N. W. till the next morning ten o'clock, when I tacked and stood in for the shore, from which we were about five leagues distant. At noon, the westermost land in fight bore W. by S. and was about four leagues distant. In the afternoon, we had a gentle breeze to the west,
<pb xml:id="n201" n="189"/>
which in the evening came to the south, and continuing so all night, by day-light brought us pretty well in with the land, seven leagues to the westward of the Cavalles, where we found a deep bay running in S.W. by W. and W. S. W. the bottom of which we could but just see, and there the land appeared to be low and level. To this bay, which I called <hi rend="sc">Doubtless Bay</hi>, the entrance is formed by two points, which lie W.N. W. and E. S. E and are five miles distant from each other. The wind not permitting us to look in here, we steered for the westermost land in fight, which bore from us W. N. W. about three leagues, but before we got the length of it, it fell calm.</p>
              <p>While we lay becalmed, several canoes came off to us, but the people having heard of our guns, it was not without great difficulty that they were persuaded to come under our stern: after having bought some of their cloaths, as well as their fish, we began to make inquiries concerning their country, and learned, by the help of Tupia, that, at the distance of three days rowing in their canoes, at a place called <hi rend="sc">Moorewhennua</hi>, the land would take a short turn to the southward, and from thence extend more to the west. This place we concluded to be the land discovered by Tasman, which he called <hi rend="sc">Cape Maria van Diemen</hi>, and finding these people so intelligent, we inquired farther, if they knew of any country besides their own? They answered, that they never had visited any other, but that their ancestors had told them, that to the N. W. by N. or N. N. W. there was a country of great extent, called <hi rend="sc">Ulimaroa</hi>, to which some people had sailed in a very large canoe; that only part of them returned, and reported, that, after a passage of a month, they had seen a country where the people eat hogs. Tupia then inquired whether these adventurers brought any hogs with them when they returned? they said, No. Then, replied Tupia, your story is certainly false, for it cannot be believed that men who came back from an expedition without hogs, had ever visited a country where hogs were to be procured. It is however remarkable, notwithstanding the shrewdness of Tupia's objection, that when they mentioned
<pb xml:id="n202" n="190"/>
hogs, it was not by description but by name, calling them Booah, the name which is given them in the South-Sea islands; but if the animal had been wholly unknown to them, and they had had no communication with people to whom it was known, they could not possibly have been acquainted with the name.</p>
              <p>About ten o'clock at night, a breeze sprung up at W. N. W. with which we stood off north; and at noon the next day, the Cavalles bore S. E. by E. distant eight leagues; the entrance of Doubtless Bay S. by W. distant three leagues; and the north-west extremity of the land in sight, which we judged to be the main, bore N. W. by W. our latitude by observation was 34° 44′ S., In the evening, we found the variation to be 12° 41′ E. by the azimuth, and 12° 40′ by the amplitude.</p>
              <p>Early in the morning, we stood in with the land, seven leagues to the westward of Doubtless Bay, the bottom of which is not far distant from the bottom of another large bay, which the shore forms at this place, being separated only by a low neck of land, which juts out into a peninsula that I have called <hi rend="sc">Knuckle Point</hi>. About the middle of this bay, which we called <hi rend="sc">Sandy Bay</hi>, is a high mountain, standing upon a distant shore, to which I gave the name of <hi rend="sc">Mount Camei</hi>. The latitude here is 34° 51′ S. and longitude in 186° 50′. We had twenty-four and twenty-five′ fathom water, with a good bottom; but there seems to be nothing in this bay that can induce a ship to put into it; for the land about it is utterly barren and desolate, and, except Mount Camel, the situation is low: the soil appears to be nothing but white sand, thrown up in low irregular hills and narrow ridges, lying parallel with the shore. But barren and desolate as this place is, it is not without inhabitants: we saw one village on the west side of Mount Camel, and another on the east side; we saw also five canoes full of people, who pulled after the ship, but could not come up with us. At nine o'clock, we tacked and stood to the northward; and at noon the Cavalles bore S. E. by E. distant thirteen leagues; the north extremity of the land in sight making like an island, bore N. W. ½ N.
<pb xml:id="n203" n="191"/>
distant nine leagues, and Mount Camel bore S. W. by S. distance six leagues.</p>
              <p>The wind being contrary, we kept plying northward till five o'clock in the evening of the 12th, when having made very little way, we tacked and stood to the north-east; being two leagues to the northward of Mount Camel, and about a mile and an half from the shore, in which situation we had two and-twenty fathoms water.</p>
              <p>At ten it began to blow and rain, which brought us under double-reefed top-sails; at twelve we tacked, and stood to the westward till seven the next morning, when we tacked and stood again to the N. E. being about a mile to the windward of the place where we tacked last night. Soon after it blew very hard at N. N. W. with heavy squalls and much rain, which brought us under our courses, and split the main-top-fail, so that we were obliged to unbend it, and bend another. At ten it became more moderate, and we set the top-sails double reesed. At noon, having strong gales and heavy weather, we tacked and stood to the westward, and had no land in sight for the first time since we had been upon this coast.</p>
              <p>We had now strong gales at W. and W. S. W. and at half an hour past three we tacked and stood to the northward. Soon after a small island, lying off Knuckle Point, bore S. ½ W. distant half a league. In the evening, having split the fore and mizen top-sails, we brought the ship under her courses; and at midnight we wore, and stood to the southward till five in the morning, when we tacked and stood to the N. W. and saw land bearing south, at the distance of eight or nine leagues; by this we discovered that we had fallen much to the leeward since yesterday morning. At noon, our latitude by observation was 34° 6 S. and the same land which we had seen before to the N. W. now bore S. W. and appeared to be the northern extremity of the country. We had a large swell rolling in from the westward, and therefore concluded that we were not covered by any land in that quarter. At eight in the evening we tacked and stood to the westward, with as much sail as we could bear; and at noon the next day we were in latitude 134° 10′, longitude
<pb xml:id="n204" n="192"/>
185° 45′ W. and by estimation about seventeen leagues from the land, notwithstanding our utmost endeavours to keep in with it.</p>
              <p>On the 16th, at six in the morning, we saw land from the mast-head, bearing S. S. W. and at noon it bore S. by W. distant fourteen leagues. While we were standing in for the shore, we sounded several times, but had no ground with ninety fathoms. At eight we tacked in a hundred and eight fathoms, at about three or four miles from the shore, which was the same point of land that we had to N. W. before we were blown off. At noon it bore S. W. distant about three miles: Mount Camel bore S. by E. distant about eleven leagues, and the westermost land in sight bore S. 75 W. the latitude by observation was 34° 20′ S. At four o'clock we tacked and stood in shore, in doing which we met with a strong rippling, and the ship fell fast to leeward, which we imputed to a current setting east. At eight we tacked and stood off till eight the next morning, when we tacked and stood in, being about ten leagues from the land. At noon, the point of land which we were near the day before, bore S. S. W. distant five leagues. The wind still continued at west; and at seven o'clock we tacked in thirty-five fathoms, when the point of land which has been mentioned before bore N. W. by N. distant four or five miles; so that we had not gained one inch to windward the last twenty-four hours, which confirmed our opinion that there was a current to the eastward. The point of land I called <hi rend="sc">North Cape</hi>, it being the northern extremity of this country. It lies in latitude 34° 22′ S. longitude 186° 55′ W. and thirty-one leagues distant from Cape Bret, in the direction of N. 63 W. It forms the north point of Sandy Bay, and is a peninsula jetting out N. E. about two miles, and terminating in a bluff head that is flat at the top. The isthmus which joins this head to the main land is very low, and for that reason the land of the Cape, from several situations, has the appearance of an island. It is still more remarkable when it is seen from the southward, by the appearance of a high round island at the S. E. point of the Cape; but this is also a deception; for what appears to be an island is
<pb xml:id="n205" n="193"/>
a round hill, joined to the Cape by a low narrow neck of land. Upon the Cape we saw a Hippah, or village, and a few inhabitants; and en the south-east side of it there appears to be anchorage, and good shelter from the south-west and north-west winds.</p>
              <p>We continued to stand off and on, making N. W. till noon on the 21st, when North Cape bore S. 39 E. distant thirty-eight leagues. Our situation varied only a few leagues till the 23d, when, about seven o'clock in the evening, we saw land from the mast-head bearing S. ½ E. At eleven the next morning we saw it again, bearing S. S. E. at the distance of eight leagues. We now flood to the S. W. and at four o'clock the land bore S. E. by S. distant four leagues, and proved to be a small island, with other islands or rocks still smaller, lying off the south-west end of it, and another lying off the north-east end, which were discovered by Tasman, and called the Three Kings. The principal island lies in latitude 34° 12′ S. longitude 187° 48′ W. and distant fourteen or fifteen leagues from North Cape, in the direction of W. 14 N. At midnight we tacked, and stood to the N. E. till six the next morning, which was Christmas-day, when we tacked and stood to the southward. At noon, the Three Kings bore E. 8 N dillant five or six leagues. The variation this morning by the azimuth was 11° 25′ E.</p>
              <p>On the 26th, we stood to the southward close upon a wind, and at noon were in latitude 35° 10′ S. longitude 180° 20′ W. the Three Kings bearing N. 26 W. distant twenty-two leagues. In this situation we had no land in sight; and yet, by observation, we were in the latitude of the Bay of Islands, and by my reckoning but twenty leagues to the westward of North Cape; from whence it appears, that the northern part of this island is very narrow; for otherwise we must have seen some part of the west side of it. We stood to the southward till twelve at night, and then tacked and stood to the northward.</p>
              <p>At four o'clock in the morning the wind freshened, and at nine blew a storm, so that we were obliged to bring the ship to under her main-sail. Our course made good between noon this day and yesterday
<pb xml:id="n206" n="194"/>
was S. S. W. ½ W. distance eleven miles. The Three Kings bore N. 27 E. distant seventy-seven miles. The gale continued all this day, and till two the next morning, when it fell, and began to veer to the southward and S. W. where it fixed about four, when we made sail, and steered east in for the land, under the foresail and main-sail; but the wind then rising, and by eight o'clock being increased to a hurricane, with a prodigious sea, we were obliged to take in the mainsail; we then wore the ship, and brought her to with her head to the north-west. At noon the gale was somewhat abated, but we had still heavy squalls. Our course made good this day was north, a little easterly, twenty-nine miles; latitude by account 34° 50′S. longitude 188° 27′ W. the Three Kings bore N. 41 E. distant fifty-two miles. At seven o'clock in the evening, the wind being at S. W. and S. W. by W. with hard squalls, we wore and lay on the other tack, and at six the next morning spread more sail. Our course and distance since yesterday was E. by N. twenty-nine miles. In the afternoon we had hard squalls at S. W. and at eight in the evening wore and stood to the N. W. till five the next morning, and then wore and stood to the S. E. At six we saw the land bearing N. E. distant about six leagues, which we judged to be Cape Maria Van Diemen, and which corresponded with the account that had been given of it by the Indians. And on the next day, at noon, Cape Maria Van Diemen bore N. E. by N. distant about five leagues. At seven in the evening, we tacked and stood to the westward, with a moderate breeze at S. W. by S. and S. W. Mount Camel then bore N. 83 E. and the northermost land, or Cape Maria Van Diemen, N. by W. We were now distant from the nearest land about three leagues, where we had something more than forty fathoms water; and it must be remarked, that Mount Camel, which when seen on the other side did not seem to be more than one mile from the sea, seemed to be but little more when seen from this side; which is a demonstration that the land here cannot be more than two or three miles broad, or from sea to sea.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n207" n="195"/>
              <p>At six o'clock in the morning of January the 1st, 1970, being New-year's-day, we tacked and stood to the eastward, the Three Kings bearing N. W. by N. At noon we tacked again, and stood to the westward, being in latitude 34° 37′S. the Three Kings bearing N. W. by N. at the distance of ten or eleven leagues, and Cape Maria Van Diemen N. 31 E. distant about four leagues and an half; in this situation we had fifty-four fathoms water.</p>
              <p>During this part of our navigation two particulars are very remarkable; in latitude 35° S. and in the midst of summer, I met with a gale of wind, which for its strength and continuance was such as I had scarcely ever been in before, and we were three weeks in getting ten leagues to the westward, and five weeks in getting fifty leagues; for at this time it was so long since we passed Cape Bret. During the gale, we were happily at a great distance from the land, otherwise it is highly probable, that we should neve have returned to relate our adventures.</p>
              <p>At five o'clock in the evening, having a fresh breeze to the westward, we tacked and stood to southward: at this time North Cape bore E. ¾ N. and just open of a point that lies three leagues W. by N. from it.</p>
              <p>The Cape, as I have observed before, is the northermost extremity of this country, and the eastermost, point of a peninsula, which runs out N. W. and N. W. by N. seventeen or eighteen leagues, and of which Cape Maria Van Diemen is the westermost point. Cape Maria lies in latitude 34° 30′ S. longitude 187° 18′ W. and from this point the land trends away S. E. by S. and S. E. beyond Mount Camel, and is every where a barren shore, consisting of banks of white sand.</p>
              <p>On the 2d, at noon, we were in latitude 35° 17′ S and Cape Maria bore N. distant about sixteen leagues, as near as we could guess; for we had no land in sight, and did not dare to go nearer, as a fresh gale blew right on shore, with a rolling sea. The wind continued at W. S. W. with frequent squalls. In the evening we shortened sail, and at midnight tacked, and made a trip to the N. W. till two in the morning, when we wore
<pb xml:id="n208" n="196"/>
and stood to the southward. At break of day we made sail, and edged away, in order to make land: and at ten o'clock we saw it, bearing N. W. It appeared to be high, and at noon extended from N. to E. N. E. distant by estimation eight or ten leagues. Cape Maria then bore N. 2° 30′ W. distant thirty-three leagues: our latitude by observation was 36° 2′ S. About seven o'clock in the evening we were within six leagues of it; but having a fresh gale upon it, with a rolling sea, we hauled our wind to the S. E. and kept on that course close upon the wind all night, founding several times, but having no ground with one hundred and ten fathoms.</p>
              <p>At eight o'clock the next morning we were about five leagues from the land, and off a place which lies in latitude 36° 25′, and had the appearance of a bay or inlet. It bore east; and in order to see more of it, we kept on our course till eleven o'clock, when we were not more than three leagues from it, and then discovered that it was neither inlet nor bay, but a tract of low land, bounded by higher lands on each side, which produced the deception. At this time we tacked, and stood to the N. W. and at noon the land was not distant more than three or four leagues. We were now in latitude 36° 31′ S. longitude 185° 50′ W. Cape Maria bore N. 25 W. distant forty-four leagues and an half; so that the coast must be almost straight in the direction of S. S. E. ¾ E. and N. N. W. ¾ W. nearly. In about latitude 35° 45 is some high land adjoining to the sea; to the southward of which the more is also high, and has the most desolate and inhospitable appearance that can be imagined. Nothing is to be seen but hills of sand, on which there is scarcely a blade of verdure; and a vast sea, impelled by the westerly winds, breaking upon it in a dreadful surf, renders it not only forlorn but frightful; complicating the idea of danger with desolation, and impressing the mind at once with a sense of misery and death. From this place I steered to the northward, resolving never more to come within the same distance of the coast, except the wind mould be very favourable indeed. I stood under a fresh sail all the day, hoping to get an offing by
<pb xml:id="n209" n="197"/>
the next noon, and we made good a course of an hundred and two miles N. 38 W. Our latitude by observation was 35° 10′ S. and Cape Maria bore N. 10 E. distance forty-one miles. In the night, the wird shisted from S. W. by S. to S. and blew fresh. Our course to the noon of the 5th was N. 75 W. distance eight miles.</p>
              <p>At day-break, on the 6th, we saw land, which we took to be Cape Maria, bearing N. N. F. distant eight or nine leagues. And on the 7th, in the afternoon, the land bore east; and some time after we discovered a turtle upon the water, but, being awake, it dived instantly, so that we could not take it. At noon the high land, which has just been mentioned, extended from N. to E. at the distance of five or six leagues; and in two places, a flat gave it the appearance of a bay or inlet. The course that we made good the last four-and-twenty hours was S. 33 E. fifty-three miles, Cape Maria bearing N. 25 W. distant thirty leagues.</p>
              <p>We sailed within sight of land all this day, with gentle gales between the N. E. and N. W. and by the next noon had sailed sixty-nine miles, in the direction of S. 37 E. our latitude by observation was 36° 39′ S. The land which on the 4th we had taken for a bay, now bore N. E. by N. distant five leagues and an half, and Cape Maria N. 29 W. forty-seven-leagues.</p>
              <p>On the 9th, we continued a south-east course till eight o'clock in the evening, having run seven leagues since noon, with the wind at N. N. E. and N. and being within three or four leagues of the land, which appeared to be low and sandy. I then steered S. E. by S. in a direction parallel with the coast, having from forty-eight to thirty-four fathoms water, with a black sandy bottom. At day-break, the next morning, we found ourselves between two and three leagues from the land, which began to have a better appearance, rising in gentle slopes, and being covered with trees and herbage. We saw a smoke and a few houses, but it appeared to be but thinly inhabited. At seven o'clock we steered S. by E. and afterwards S.
<pb xml:id="n210" n="198"/>
by W. the land lying in that direction. At nine, we were a-breast of a point which rises with an easy ascent from the sea to a considerable height; this point, which lies in latitude 37° 43′, I named <hi rend="sc">Woody Head</hi>. About eleven miles from this head, in the direction of S. W. ½ W. lies a very small island, upon which we saw a great number of gannets, and which we therefore called <hi rend="sc">Gannet Island</hi>. At noon, a high craggy point bore E. N. E. distant about a league and a half, to which I gave the name of <hi rend="sc">Albetress Point</hi>; it lies in latitude 38° 4′ S. longitude 184° 42′ W. and is distant seven leagues in the direction of S. 17 W. from Woody Head. On the north side of this point the shore forms a bay, in which there appears to be anchorage and shelter for shipping. Our course and distance for the last twenty-four hours was S. 37 E. sixty-nine miles; and at noon this day Cape Maria bore N. 30 W. distant eighty-two leagues. Between twelve and one, the wind shifted at once from N. N. E. to S. S. W. with which we stood to the westward till four o'clock in the afternoon, and then tacked, and stood again in shore till seven, when we tacked again and stood to the westward, having but little wind. At this time Albetross Point bore N. E. distant near two leagues, and the southermost land in sight bore S. S. W. ½ W. being a very high mountain, and in appearance greatly resembling the Peak of Teneriffe. In this situation we had thirty fathoms water, and having but little wind all night, we tacked about four in the morning, and stood in for the shore. Soon after it fell calm, and, being in forty-two fathoms water, the people caught a few sea-bream. At eleven a light breeze sprung up from the west, and we made sail to the southward. We continued to steer S. by W. and S. S. W. along the shore, at the distance of abour sour leagues, with gentle breezes from between N. W. and N. N. E. At seven in the evening, we saw the top of the Peak to the southward, above the clouds which concealed it below; and at this time the southermost land in sight bore S. by W. the variation, by several azimuths, which were taken both in the morning and the evening, appeared to be 14° 15′ easterly.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n211" n="199"/>
              <p>At noon, on the 12th, we were distant about three leagues from the shore which lies under the Peak, but the Peak itself was wholly concealed by clouds; we judged it to bear about S. S. E. and some very remarkable, peaked islands, which lay under the more, bore E. S. E. distant three or four leagues. At seven in the evening we sounded, and had forty-two fathoms, being distant from the shore between two and three leagues; we judged the Peak to bear east, and after it was dark we saw fires upon the shore.</p>
              <p>At five o'clock in the morning we saw, for a few minutes, the summit of the Peak, towering above the clouds, and covered with snow; it now bore N. E. It lies in latitude 39° 16′S. longitude 185° 15′ W. and I named it <hi rend="sc">Mount Egmont</hi>, in honour of the Earl; it seems to have a large base, and to rise with a gradual ascent. It lies near the sea, and is surrounded by a flat country of a pleasant appearance, being cloathed with verdure and wood, which renders it the more conspicuous, and the shore under it forms a large cape, which I have named <hi rend="sc">Cape Egmont</hi>. It lies S. S. W. W. ½ twenty-seven leagues distant from Albetross Point, and on the north side of it are two small islands, which lie near a remarkable point on the main, that rises to a considerable height in the form of a sugar-loaf. To the southward of the Cape, the land trends away S. E. by E. and S. S. E. and seems to be every where a bold shore. At noon Cape Egmont bore about N. E. and in this direction, at about four leagues from the shore, we had forty fathoms of water. The wind, during the rest of the day, was from W. to N. W. by W. and we continued to steer along the shore S. S. E. and S. E. by E. keeping at the distance of between two and three leagues. At half an hour after seven we had another transient view of Mount Egmont, which bore N. 17 W. distant about ten leagues.</p>
              <p>At five the next morning we steered S. E. by S, the coast inclining more southerly; and in about half an hour we saw land bearing S. W. by S. for which we hauled up. At noon the north-west extremity of the land in sight bore S. 63 W. and some high land, which had the appearance of an island lying under the
<pb xml:id="n212" n="200"/>
main, bore S. S. E. distant five leagues. We were now in a bay, the bottom of which bearing south we could not see, though it was clear in that quarter. Our latitude by observation was 40° 27′ S. longitude 184° 39′ W. At eight in the evening, we were within two leagues of the land which we had discovered in the morning, having run ten leagues since noon: the land which then bore S. 63 W. now bore N. 59 W. at the distance of seven or eight leagues, and had the appearance of an island. Between this land and <hi rend="sc">Cape Egmont</hi> lies the bay, the west side of which was our situation at this time, and the land here is of a considerable height, and diversified by hill and valley.</p>
            </div>
            <div xml:id="t1-g1-t1-body-d2-d6" type="section">
              <head><hi rend="c">Chap. VI</hi>.</head>
              <argument>
                <p><hi rend="i">Transactions in Queen Charlotte's Sound. Passage through the Streight which divides the two islands, end back to Cape Turnagain. Horrid Custom of the Inhabitants. Remarkable Melody of Birds. A Visit to a Hippah, and many other Particulars</hi>.</p>
              </argument>
              <p><hi rend="sc">The</hi> shore at this place seemed to form several bays, into one of which I proposed to carry the ship, which was very foul, in order to careen her, and at the same time repair some defects, and recruit our wood and water.</p>
              <p>With this view, I kept plying on and off all night, having from eighty to sixty-three sathoms. At daybreak, the next morning, I stood for an inlet which runs in S. W. and at eight I got within the entrance, which may be known by a reef of rocks, stretching from the north-west point, and some rocky islands which lie off the south-east point. At nine o'clock, there being little wind, and what there was being variable, we were carried by the tide or current within two cables length of the north-west shore, where we had fifty-four fathoms water, but by the help of our boats we got clear. Just at this time we saw a sea-lion rise twice near the shore, the head of which exactly resembled that of the male, which has been described in the Account of Lord Anson's Voyage. We also saw some of the natives in a canoe cross the bay, and a
<pb xml:id="n213" n="201"/>
village situated upon the point of an island which lies seven or eight miles within the entrance. At noon, we were the length of this island, but there being little wind, the boats were ordered a-head to row. About one o'clock, we hauled close round the south-west end of the island; and the inhabitants of the village which was built upon it, were immediately up in arms. About two, we anchored in a very safe and convenient cove, on the north-west side of the bay, and facing the south-west end of the island, in eleven fathoms water, with soft ground, and moored with the stream anchor.</p>
              <p>We were about four long cannon shot distant from the village or Hippah, from which four canoes were immediately dispatched, as we imagined, to reconnoitre, and if they should find themselves able, to take us. The men were all well armed, and dressed nearly as they are represented in the figure published by Tasman; two corners of the cloth which they wrapped round the body were passed over the shoulders from behind, and being brought down to the upper edge of it before, were made fast to it just under the breast; but few, or none, had feathers in their hair. They rowed round the ship several times, with their usual tokens of menace and defiance, and at last began the assault by throwing some stones. Tupia expostulated with them, but apparently to very little purpose; and we began to fear that they would oblige us to fire at them, when a very old man in one of the boats expressed a desire of coming on board. We gladly encouraged him in his design, a rope was thrown into his canoe, and she was immediately along-side of the ship: the old man rose up, and prepared to come up the ship's side, upon which all the rest expostulated with great vehemence against the attempt, and at last laid hold of him, and held him back: he adhered however to his purpose, with a calm but steady perseverance, and having at length disengaged himself, he came on board. We received him with all possible expressions of friendship and kindness, and after some time dismissed him, with many presents to his companions. As soon as he was returned on board his canoe, the people in all the rest began to dance, but
<pb xml:id="n214" n="202"/>
whether as a token of enmity or friendship, we could not certainly determine, for we had seen them dance in a disposition both for peace and war. In a short time, however, they retired to their sort, and soon after I went on shore, with most of the gentlemen, at the bottom of the cove, a-breast of the ship.</p>
              <p>We found a fine stream of excellent water, and wood in the greatest plenty, for the land here was one forest, of vast extent. As we brought the seine with us, we hauled it once or twice, and with such success that we caught near three hundred weight of fish of different sorts, which was equally distributed among the ship's company.</p>
              <p>At day-break, while we were busy in careening the ship, three canoes came off to us, having on board above an hundred men, besides several of their women, which we were pleased to see, as in general it is a sign of peace; but they soon afterwards became very troublesome, and gave us reason to apprehend some mischief from them to the people that were in our boats along-side the ship. While we were in this situation the long-boat was sent ashore with some water casks, and some of the canoes attempting to follow her, we found it necessary to intimidate them by firing some small shot; we were at such a distance that it was impossible to hurt them, yet our reproof had its effect, and they desisted from the pursuit. They had some fish in their canoes which they now offered to fell, and which, though it stunk, we consented to buy: for this purpose a man in a small boat was sent among them, and they traded for some time very fairly. At length however, one of them watching his opportunity, snatched at some paper which our marketman held in his hand, and missing it, immediately put himself in a posture of defence, flourishing his patoo-patoo, and making show as if he was about to strike; some small shot were then fired at him from the ship, a few of which struck him upon the knee: this put an end to our trade, but the Indians still continued near the ship, rowing round her many times, and conversing with Tupia, chiefly concerning the traditions they had among them with respect to the antiquities of their country. To this subject they were led by the
<pb xml:id="n215" n="203"/>
inquiries which Tupia had been directed to make, whether they had ever seen such a vessel as ours, or had heard that any such had been upon their coast? These inquiries were all answered in the negative, so that tradition has preserved among them no memorial of Tasman; though, by an observation made this day, we find that we are only fifteen miles south of Murderer's bay, our latitude being 41° 5′ 32″', and Murderer's bay, according to his account, being 40° 50″.</p>
              <p>The women in these canoes, and some of the men, had a head dress which we had not seen before. It consisted of a bunch of black feathers, made up in a round form, and tied upon the top of the head, which is entirely covered, and made it twice as high, to appearance, as it was in reality.</p>
              <p>After dinner I went in the pinnace with Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, Tupia, and some others, into another cove, about two miles distant from that in which the ship lay: in our way we saw something floating upon the water, which we took for a dead seal, but upon rowing up to it, found it to be the body of a woman, which to all appearance had been dead some days. We proceeded to our cove, where we went on shore, and found a small family of Indians, who appeared to be greatly terrified at our approach, and all ran away except one. A conversation between this person and Tupia soon brought back the rest, except an old man and a child, who still kept aloof, but stood peeping at us from the woods. Of these people, our curiosity naturally led us to enquire after the body of the woman which we had seen floating upon the water: and they acquainted us, by Tupia, that she was a relation, who had died a natural death; and that, according to their custom, they had tied a stone to the body, and thrown it into the sea, which stone, they supposed, had by some accident been disengaged.</p>
              <p>This family, when we came on shore, was employed in dressing some provisions: the body of a dog was at this time buried in their oven, and many provision baskets stood near it. Having cast our eyes carelessly into one of these, as we passed it, we saw two bones pretty nearly picked, which did not seem to be
<pb xml:id="n216" n="204"/>
the bones of a dog, and which, upon a nearer examination, we discovered to be those of a human body. At this sight we were struck with horror, though it was only a confirmation of what we had heard many times since we arrived upon this coast. As we could have no doubt but the bones were human, neither could we have any doubt but that the flesh which covered them had been eaten. They were found in a provision-basket; the flesh that remained appeared manifestly to have been dressed by fire, and in the gristles at the end, were the marks of the teeth which had gnawed them: to put an end however to conjecture, founded upon circumstances and appearances, we directed Tupia to ask what bones they were; and the Indians, without the least hesitation, answered, the bones of a man. They were then asked what was become of the flesh? and they replied that they had eaten it. But, said Tupia, why did you not eat the body of the woman which we saw floating upon the water? The woman, said they, died of disease; besides, she was our relation, and we eat only the bodies of our enemies, who are killed in battle. Upon enquiry who the man was whose bones we had found, they told us, that about five days before, a boat belonging to their enemies came into the bay, with many persons on board, and that this man was one of seven whom they had killed. Tho' stronger evidence of this horrid practice prevailing among the inhabitants of this coast will scarcely be required, we have still stronger to give. One of us asked if they had any human bones with the flesh remaining upon them, and upon their answering us that all had been eaten, we affected to disbelieve that the bones were human, and said that they were the bones of a dog; upon which one of the Indians with some eagerness took hold of his own fore-arm, and thrusting it towards us, said, that the bone which Mr. Banks held in his hand had belonged to that part of the human body; at the same time, to convince us that the flesh had been eaten, he took hold of his own arm with his teeth, and made shew of eating: he also bit and gnawed the bone which Mr. Banks had taken, drawing it through his mouth, and shewing, by signs, that it had afforded a delicious repast: the bone was then returned to Mr. Banks, and he brought
<pb xml:id="n217" n="205"/>
it away with him. Among the persons of this family, there was a woman who had her arms, legs, and thighs frightfully cut in several places; and we were told that she had inflicted the wounds upon herself, in token of her grief for the loss of her husband, who had been lately killed and eaten by their enemies, who had come from some place to the eastward, towards which the Indians pointed.</p>
              <p>The ship lay at the distance of somewhat less than a quarter of a mile from the shore, and in the morning we were awakened by the singing of the birds: the number was incredible, and they seemed to strain their throats in emulation of each other. This wild melody was infinitely superior to any that we had ever heard of the same kind; it seemed to be like small bells, most exquisitely tuned, and perhaps the distance, and the water between, might be no small advantage to the sound. Upon inquiry, we were informed that the birds here always began to sing about two hours after midnight, and continuing their music till sun-rise, were, like our nightingales, silent the rest of the day. In the forenoon, a small canoe came off from the Indian village to the ship, and among those that were in it, was the old man who had first come on board at our arrival in the bay. As soon as it came along-side, Tupia renewed the conversation that had passed the day before, concerning their practice of eating human flesh, during which they repeated what they had told us already: but, said Tupia, where are the heads? do you eat them too? Of these heads, said the old man, we eat only the brains, and the next time I come I will bring some of them to convince you that what we have told you is truth. After some farther conversation between these people and Tupia, they told him that they expected their enemies to come very shortly, to revenge the death of the seven men whom they had killed and eaten.</p>
              <p>On the 18th, the Indians were more quiet than usual, no canoe came near the ship, nor did we see one of them moving on the shore, their fishing, and other usual occupations being totally suspended. We thought they expected an attack on this day, and therefore attended more diligently to what passed on shore; but we saw nothing to gratify our curiosity.</p>
              <pb xml:id="n218" n="206"/>
              <p>After breakfast we went out in the pinnce, to take a view of the bay, which was of vast extent, and consisted of numberless small harbours and coves in every direction. We confined our excursion, however, to the western side, and the country being an impenetrable forest where we landed, we could see nothing worthy of notice: we killed, however, a good number of shaggs, which we saw sitting upon their nests in the trees, which, whether roasted or stewed, we considered as very good provision. As we were returning, we saw a single man in a canoe fishing; we rowed up to him, and, to our great surprize, he took not the least notice of us, but, even when we were along-side of him, continued to follow his occupation, without adverting to us any more than if we had been invisible. He did not, however, appear to be either sullen or stupid. We requested him to draw up his net, that we might examine it, and he readily complied. It was of a circular form, extended by two hoops, and about seven or eight feet in diameter; the top was open, and sea-ears were fastened to the bottom as a bait; this he let down so low as to lie upon the ground, and when he thought fish enough were assembled over it, he drew it up by a very gentle and even motion, so that the fish rose with it, scarcely sensible that they were lifted, till they came very near the surface of the water, and then were brought out in the net by a sudden jerk. By this simple method he had caught abundance of fish, and indeed they are so plenty in this bay, that the catching them requires neither much labour nor art.</p>
              <p>This day, some of our people found in the skirts of the wood, near a hole or oven, three human hip-bones, which they brought on board; a farther proof that these people eat human flesh. Mr. Monkhouse, our Surgeon, also brought on board, from a place where he saw many deserted houses, the hair of a man's head, which he had found, among many other things, tied up to the branches of trees.</p>
              <p>In the morning of the 19th, we set up the armourer's forge, to repair the braces of the tiller, and other iron-work, all hands on board being still busy in careening, and other necessary operations about the vessel;
<pb xml:id="n219" n="207"/>
This day some Indians came on board from another part of the bay, where they said there was a town which we had not seen: they brought plenty of fish, which they sold for nails, having now acquired some notion of their use; and in this traffic no untair practice was attempted.</p>
              <p>In the morning of the 29th, our old man kept his promise, and brought on board four of the heads of the seven people who had been so much the subject of our inquiries: the hair and flesh were entire, but we perceived that the brains had been extracted; the flesh was soft, but had by some method been preserved from putrefaction, for it had no disagreeable smell. Mr. Banks purchased one of them, but they sold it with great reluctance, and could not by any means be prevailed upon to part with a second; probably they may be preserved as trophies, like the scalps in America, and the jaw-bones in the islands of the South-Seas. Upon examining the head which had been bought by Mr. Banks, we perceived that it had received a blow upon the temple, which had fractured the skull. This day we made another excursion in the pinnace, to survey the bay, but we found no flat large enough for a potatoegarden, nor could we discove the least prospect of cultivation: we met not a single Indian, but found an excellent harbour, and about eight o'clock in the evening returned on board the ship.</p>
              <p>On the 21 st, Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander went out fishing with hook and line, and caught an immense quantity every where upon the rocks, in between four and five fathoms water: the seine was hauled every night, and seldom failed to supply the whole ship's company with as much fish as they could eat This day all the people had leave to go on shore at the watering-place, and divert themselves as they should think proper.</p>
              <p>In the morning of the 22d, I set out again in the pinnace, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, with a design to examine the head of the inlet; but after rowing about four or five leagues, without so much as coming within sight of it, the wind being contrary, and the day half-spent, we went on shore
<pb xml:id="n220" n="208"/>
on the south-east side, to try what might be discovered from the hills.</p>
              <p>Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander immediately employed themselves in botanizing near the beach; and I, taking a seaman with me, ascended one of the hills. When I reached the summit, I found a view of the inlet intercepted by hills, which in that direction rose still higher, and which was rendered inaccessible by impenetrable woods: I was, however, abundantly compensated for my labour, for I saw the sea on the eastern side of the country, and a passage leading from it to that on the west, a little to the eastward of the entrance of the inlet where the ship now lay. The main land, which lay on the south-east side of this inlet, appeared to be a narrow ridge of very high hills, and to form part of the south-west side of the streight; the land on the op-posite side appeared to trend away east as far as the eye could reach; and to the south-east there appeared to be an opening to the sea, which washed the eastern coast: on the east side of the inlet also I saw some islands, which I had before taken to be part of the main land. Having made this discovery, I descended the hill, and as soon as we had taken some refreshment, we set out on our return to the ship. In our way, we examined the harbours and coves which lie behind the islands that J had discovered from the hill; and in this route we saw an old village, in which there were many houses that seemed to have been long deserted: we also saw another village which was inhabited, but the day was too far spent for us to visit it, and we therefore made the best of our way to the ship, which we reached between eight and nine o'clock at night.</p>
              <p>The 23d I employed in carrying on a survey of the place; and, upon one of the islands where I landed, I saw many houses, which seemed to have been long deserted, and no appearance of any inhabitant.</p>
              <p>On the 24th, we went to visit our friends at the Hippah, or village, on the point of the island, near the ship's station, who had come off to us on our first arrival in the bay. They received us with the utmost confidence and civility, shewing us every part of their habitations, which were commodious and neat. The
<pb xml:id="n221" n="209"/>
island, or rock, on which this town is situated, is divided from the main by a breach or fissure, so narrow that a man might almost leap from one to the other: the sides of it are every where so steep, as to render the artificial fortification of thesc people almost unnecessary: there was, however, one slight pallisade, and one small fighting-stage towards that part of the rock where access was least difficult.</p>
              <p>The people here brought us out several human bones, the flesh of which they had eaten, and offered them to sale, for the curiosity of those among us who had purchased them, as memorials of the horrid practice which many, notwithstanding the reports of travellers, have professed not to believe, has rendered them a kind of article of trade. In one part of this village we observed, not without some surprize, a cross exactly like that of a crucifix; it was adorned with feathers; and upon our inquiring for what purpose it had been set up, we were told that it was a monument for a man that was dead. We had before understood, that their dead were not buried, but thrown into the sea; but to our inquiry how the body of the man had been disposed of, to whose memory this cross had been erected, they refused to answer.</p>
              <p>When we left these people, we went to the other end of the island, and there, taking water, crossed over to the main, where we saw several houses, but no inhabitants, except a few in some straggling canoes, that seemed to be fishing. After viewing this place, we returned on board the ship to dinner.</p>
              <p>During our visit to the Indians this day, Tupia being always of our party, they had been observed to be continually talking of guns, and shooting people; for this subject of their conversation we could not at all account, and it had so much engaged our attention, that we talked of it all the way back, and even after we got on board the ship. We had perplexed ourselves with various conjectures, which were all given up in their turn; but now we learned, that on the 21st one of our officers, upon pretence of going out to fish, had rowed up to the Hippah, and that two or three canoes coming off towards his boat, his fears suggested that an attack was intended, in consequece
<pb xml:id="n222" n="210"/>
of which three muskets were fired, one with small shot, and two with ball, at the Indians, who retired with the utmost precipitation, having probably come out with friendly intentions, for such their behaviour both before and after expressed, and having no reason to expect such treatment from people who had always behaved to them not only with humanity but kindness, and to whom they were not conscious of having given offence.</p>
              <p>On the 25th, I made another excursion along the coast in the pinnace, towards the mouth of the inlet, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, and going on shore at a little cove, to shoot shaggs, we fell in with a large family of Indians, whose custom it is to disperse themselves among the different creeks and coves, where fish is to be procured in the greatest plenty, leaving a few only in the Hippah, to which the rest repair in times of danger: some of these people came out a good way to meet us, and gave us an invitation to go with them to the rest of their party, which we readily accepted. We found a company of about thirty, men, women, and children, who received us with all possible demonstrations of friendship: we distributed among them a few ribands and beads, and, in return, received the kisses and embraces of both sexes, both young and old: they gave us also some fish, and after a little time we returned, much pleased with our new acquaintance.</p>
              <p>In the morning of the 26th, I went out again in the boat, with Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, and entered one of the bays, which lie on the east side of the inlet, in order to get another sight of the streighr, which passed between the eastern and western seas. For this purpose, having landed at a convenient place, we climbed a hill of very considerable height, from which we had a full view of it, with the land on the opposite shore, which we judged to be about four leagues distant; but, as it was in the hazy horizon, we could not see far to the south-east; I resolved, however, to search the passage with the ship, as soon as I should put to sea. Upon the top of this hill we found a parcel of loose stones, with which we erected a pyramid, and left in it some musket-balls, small-shot, beads,
<pb xml:id="n223" n="211"/>
and other things, which we happened to have about us, that were likely to stand the test of time, and not being of Indian workmanship, would convince any European, who should come to the place and pull it down, that other natives of Europe had been there before him. When this was done, we descended the hill, and made a comfortable meal of the shaggs and fish which our guns and lines had procured us, and which were dressed by the boat's crew in a place that we had appointed. In this place we found another Indian family, who received us, as usual, with strong expressions of kindness and pleasure, shewing us where to procure water, and doing us such other good offices as were in their power. From this place we went to the town, of which the Indians had told us, who visited us on the 19th. This, like that which we had seen before, was built upon a small island or rock, so difficult of access, that we gratified our curiosity at the risk of our necks. The Indians here also received us with open arms, carried us to every part of the place, and shewed us all that it contained. This town, like the other, consisted of between eighty and an hundred houses, and had only one sighting-stage. We happened to have with us a few nails and ribands, and some paper, with which our guests were so gratified, that at our coming away they filled our boat with dried fish, of which we perceived they had laid up great quantities.</p>
              <p>The 27th and 28th were spent in refitting the ship for the sea, fixing a transom for the tiller, getting stones on board to put into the bottom of the bread-room, to bring the ship more by the stern, in repairing the casks, and catching fish.</p>
              <p>On the 29th, we received a visit from our old man, whose name we found to be <hi rend="sc">Toppa</hi>, and three other natives, with whom Tupia had much conversation. The old man told us, that one of the men who had been fired upon by the officer who had visited their Hippah, under pretence of fishing, was dead; but, to my great comfort, I afterwards discovered that this report was not true, and that if Topaa's discourses were taken literally, they would frequently lead us into mistakes. Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander were several times
<pb xml:id="n224" n="212"/>
on shore during the last two or three days, not without success, but greatly circumscribed in their walks by climbers of a most luxuriant growth, which were so interwoven together, as to fill up the space between the trees about which they grew, and render the woods altogether impassable. This day also I went on shore again myself, upon the western point of the inlet, and, from a hill of considerable height, I had a view of the coast to the N. W. The farthest land I could see in that quarter was an island which has been mentioned before, at the distance of about ten leagues, lying not far from the main. Between this island and the place where I stood, I discovered, close under the shore, several other islands, forming many bays, in which there appeared to be good anchorage for shipping. After I had set off the different points for my survey, I erected another pile of stones, in which I left a piece of silver coin, with some musket balls and beads, and a piece of an old pendant flying at the top. In my return to the ship, I made a visit to several of the natives, whom I saw along the shore, and purchased a small quantity of fish.</p>
              <p>On the 30th, early in the morning, I sent a boat to one of the islands for celery, and while the people were gathering it, about twenty of the natives, men, women, and children, landed near some empty huts: as soon as they were on shore, five or six of the women sat down upon the ground together, and began to cut their legs, arms, and faces, with shells, and sharp pieces of talc, or jasper, in a terrible manner. Our people understood that their husbands had lately been killed by their enemies: but while they were performing this horrid ceremony, the men set about repairing the huts, with the utmost negligence and unconcern.</p>
              <p>The Carpenter having prepared two posts, to be left as memorials of our having visited this place, I ordered them to be inscribed with the ship's name, and the year and month; one of them I set up at the wateringplace, hoisting the Union flag upon the top of it, and the other I carried over to the island that lies nearest to the sea, called by the natives <hi rend="sc">Motuara</hi>. I went first to the village, or Hippah, accompanied by Mr. Monkhouse
<pb xml:id="n225" n="213"/>
and Tupia, where I met with our old man, and told him and several others by means of Tupia, that we were come to set up a mark upon the island, in order to show to any other ship which should happen to come thither, that we had been there before. To this they readily consented, and promised that they never would pull it down: I then gave something to every one present, and to the old man I gave a silver three-pence, dated 1736, and some spike-nails, with the king's broad arrow cut deep upon them; things which I thought most likely to remain among them: I then took the post to the highest part of the island, and after fixing it firmly in the ground, I hoisted upon it the Union flag, and honoured this inlet with the name of <hi rend="sc">Queen Charlottie's Sound</hi>, at the same time taking formal possession of this and the adjacent country, in the name and for the use of his Majesty King George the Third. We then drank a bottle of wine to her Majesty's health, and gave the bottle to the old man, who had attended us up the hill, and who was mightily delighted with his present.</p>
              <p>While the post was setting up, we enquired of the old man concerning the passage into the eastern sea, the existence of which he confirmed; and then asked him about the land to the S. W. of the streight, where we were then situated. This land, he said, consisted of two Whennuas, or islands, which might be circumnavigated in a few days, and which he called <hi rend="sc">Tovy Poenammoo</hi>; the literal translation of the word is, “the water “of green talc:” and probably, if we had understood him better, we should have found that Tovy Poenammoo was the name of some particular place where they got the green talc, or stone, of which they make their ornaments and tools, and not a general name for the whole southern district. He said, there was also a third Whennua on the east side of the streight, the circumnavigation of which would take up many moons: this he called <hi rend="sc">Eaheinomauwe</hi>, and to the land on the borders of the streight, he gave the name of <hi rend="sc">Tieka. Witte</hi>. Having set up our post, an